Herbert Rees

Understanding
Injection Mold Design
Hanser Publishers, Munich
Hanser Gardner Publications, Inc., Cincinnati
The Author:
Herbert Rees, 248386-5 Sideroad (moro), RR#5 Orangeville, Ontario, Canada, L9W 2Z2
Distributed in the USA and in Canada by
Hanser Gardner Publications, Inc.
6915 Valley Avenue, Cincinnati, Ohio 45244-3029, USA
Fax: (513) 527-8950
Phone: (513) 527-8977 or 1-800-950-8977
Internet: http://www.hansergardner.com
Distributed in all other countries by
Carl Hanser Verlag
Postfach 86 04 20, 81631 MuÈ nchen, Germany
Fax: ‡49 (89) 98 12 64
Internet: http:aawww.hanser.de
The use of general descriptive names, trademarks, etc., in this publication, even if the former are not especially
identi®ed, is not to be taken as a sign that such names, as understood by the Trade Marks and Merchandise
Marks Act, may accordingly be used freely by anyone.
While the advice and information in this book are believed to be true and accurate at the date of going to press,
neither the authors nor the editors nor the publisher can accept any legal responsibility for any errors or
omissions that may be made. The publisher makes no warranty, express or implied, with respect to the material
contained herein.
Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data
Rees, Herbert, 1915±
Understanding injection mold designaHerbert Rees.
p. cm.
Includes bibliographical references and index.
ISBN 1-56990-311-5 (softback)
1. Injection molding of plastics. I. Title.
TP1150.R45 2001
668.4'12±dc21 00-054085
Die Deutsche Bibliothek - CIP-Einheitsaufnahme
Rees, Herbert:
Understanding injection mold designaHerbert Rees, -Munich : Hanser;
Cincinnati:Hanser Gardner, 2001
(Hanser understanding books)
ISBN 3-446-21587-5
All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means,
electronic or mechanical, including photocopying or by any information storage and retrieval system, without
permission in writing from the publisher.
# Carl Hanser Verlag, Munich 2001
Typeset in the U.K. by Techset Composition Ltd., Salisbury
Printed and bound in Germany by Druckhaus ``Thomas MuÈ ntzer'', Bad Langensalza
Introduction to the Series
In order to keep up in today's world of rapidly changing technology we need to
open our eyes and ears and, most importantly, our minds to new scienti®c ideas
and methods, new engineering approaches and manufacturing technologies and
new product design and applications. As students graduate from college and
either pursue academic polymer research or start their careers in the plastics
industry, they are exposed to problems, materials, instruments and machines that
are unfamiliar to them. Similarly, many working scientists and engineers who
change jobs must quickly get up to speed in their new environment.
To satisfy the needs of these ``newcomers'' to various ®elds of polymer
science and plastics engineering, we have invited a number of scientists and
engineers, who are experts in their ®eld and also good communicators, to write
short, introductory books which let the reader ``understand'' the topic rather than
to overwhelm himaher with a mass of facts and data. We have encouraged our
authors to write the kind of book that can be read pro®tably by a beginner, such
as a new company employee or a student, but also by someone familiar with the
subject, who will gain new insights and a new perspective.
Over the years this series of Understanding books will provide a library of
mini-tutorials on a variety of fundamental as well as technical subjects. Each
book will serve as a rapid entry point or ``short course'' to a particular subject
and we sincerely hope that the readers will reap immediate bene®ts when
applying this knowledge to their research or work-related problems.
E.H. Immergut
Series Editor
v
Preface
During the last ®fty years I have been almost continuously working with
molders, mold makers and mold designers, and in doing so learning the
intricacies of designing of molds for many different products, from the early,
simple compression molds to highly sophisticated injection molds. I have
worked with them not only in North America, but also in Europe and Japan, and
especially in the last 15 years, as consultant to those in developing countries
who only recently started to seriously compete in the huge ®eld of
manufacturing molded plastic products.
During my discussions with these newcomers to the ®eld, but also in earlier
years, when talking to ``old hands'' in this ®eld, I have often wondered how
many of them really understood what they were doing when it comes to
planning for and designing a new mold, and why they were doing it. In many
cases I believe they took simply ``the easy way out'' by just imitating what they
saw in other molds, and expanding on it, regardless of whether the molds used
as ``precedents'' were for comparable conditions, for the same plastic, for similar
molding machines, or for a similar production requirement. Another problem I
saw was that in many mold making shops, here and everywhere, some designers
were more intent on making ``pretty pictures'', in the shortest posssible time,
rather than understanding that the job expected of a mold designer is to consider
possible alternatives of how the planned mold could look, then make a practical
and most suitable layout of a mold to produce the best quality product, at the
lowest cost, and ®nally supply all pertinent information to the mold maker, the
machinists, and asssemblers.
With the advent of computer aided designing (CAD), the technique of
making mold designs and drawings has become much easier to handle, and in
some cases where products are similar, it has become often so simple that the
mold design can be performed almost automatically, by just following the
prompts of the computer, by recalling older complete or partial designs from the
CAD memory, and creating a new mold by just changing some dimensions. If
you are brought up in this environment, you may be able to produce good
vii
designs, based on the available good precedents, but you will be hard pressed to
generate a good mold for which there is no precedent on ®le.
I undertook to write this book ``Understanding Injection Mold Design''
essentially to explain what is really important in the design of an injection mold,
so that a good mold, best suitable for the application, can be created even if there
is no precedent. It is meant to be used to guide the designer to think, and to
frequently ask why, where, when, how, etc., when considering the many possible
choices before settling on a ®nal concept. Also, in my experience, the greatest
obstacle to creating a good design has always been the reluctance of the designer
to acknowledge the possibility that he or she may be wrong, and that there may
be a better way than the ®rst one proposed. The designer must never forget, it is
always cheaper to change a design layout even if it adds some design time, than
to change (re-machine or modify) a poorly designed but already built mold.
Herbert Rees,
Orangeville, ON
viii Preface
1 Introduction
I believe that a short history of injection molding will help in the understanding
of what is required from a mold designer. After the Second World War, when
plastics technology was beginning, there were no ``mold designers.'' When a
mold was needed, it was produced by artisans in tool and die maker shops, who
were trying to expand into new ®elds. They were skilled in building accurate
steel tools and dies, and the boss of such shops often worked closely with the
molder, who understood better what was required. The molder sketched, often
crudely, how the mold should look, and the boss, by closely supervising the
machinists as they built the mold components, then by assembling and testing
the molds himself (at the molder), built well-functioning molds. These were
usually suitable for the, at that time, few existing plastics molding materials, and
quite satisfactory for the (by today's standards, low) productivity expected from
such molds. But over the years, many new and better plastics were developed,
more suitable for the ever increasing variety of products, each often requiring
different molding parameters. At the same time, the demand for increases in
productivity became a high priority.
These increased demands of the traditional tool and die maker generated
high specialization, and the ``mold maker'' was born. The mold maker was still
essentially an expert in machining and assembling, and depended on the input
from plastics materials suppliers on how to process these materials; also, the
materials suppliers were not always knowledgeable enough, and depended on
feedback from the molders regarding performance of the plastics they supplied.
The molder was instrumental in the operating features the mold should have,
and was often involved even in the selection of mold materials (steels, etc.).
Eventually, all this information required to build a mold had to be shown on
paper, both for the use of machinists in the shop and for assembling of the mold.
The services of draftsmen or designers now became necessary, to relieve the
boss from these time-consuming chores. Gradually, mold designers became the
middlemen between the molder (the customer), the mold shop, and the plastics
suppliers. The designers and sometimes the molders attended meetings and
1
seminars to learn about new plastics and their expected processing requirements,
and to apply their newly learned knowledge to the design of all molds.
Eventually, everything depended on the mold designer, who became solely
responsible for the construction and functioning of the molds, and the mold
maker reverted to just building the mold, per instructions given by the designer
and as shown on drawings. At ®rst, only assembly drawings were produced, with
the more important dimensions shown, but gradually, in addition to complete
assembly drawings, every mold part was detailed (except standard hardware
items), complete with appropriate tolerances, so that any skilled machinist
would be able to produce these components, and the boss returned to running
the shop and was rarely involved in design problems. The molds could then be
assembled by strictly following the assembly drawing, ideally, without need for
adjustments (``®tting''). The mold was then ready for testing and production.
In earlier days, molds would be tested only at the molder, but, gradually,
many mold makers acquired molding machines of various sizes for in-house
testing, rather than shipping the molds to the molder, often interrupting his
production if he had no suitable machine available at the time, and then shipping
the mold back for adjustments if required. This shipping back and forth was
costly and time-consuming; quite often, it had to be done not only once but
several times. The investment in test machines proved not an expense but a
saving for all parties involved, even though the cost of testing is added to the
mold cost.
The mold designer must be involved in the testing of every mold, because
this is where the most experience is needed, especially if the new mold does not
function or perform as wanted, and revisions are necessary. It is important for
the designer to insist that the molding technician not make any changes to the
mold while it is being tested unless the designer is present; the only way future
designs can bene®t from these experiences is if the problems and solutions are
properly recorded and the changes are documented on the drawings before they
are made. A complete, comprehensive test report issued before the mold is
shipped will greatly assist the molder when starting up the new mold.
This book provides the designer student, and perhaps even the advanced
designer, with some ground rules for designing injection molds. It focuses on
the ``why,'' rather than going into the details of the design, the ``how.''
Quite often designers do things mechanically (especially with a CAD
[computer-assisted design] program), following designs or methods used before,
without questioning whether they are using the best approach to the problem.
The mechanical approach can be useful and time saving as long as the precedent
(the earlier example) is similar to the current job. But often, designers do not
really understand why they copied what they did. It may have been the right
2 Introduction
thing for one plastic material, but not for another; it may have been suitable for a
small production, but not for a large one; and so on.
Numerous new plastics have been developed over the last few years for
speci®c applications, such as toys, housewares, packaging, electronics, electrical
equipment, cameras, ®lms, automotive, farming and aircraft components,
furniture, clothing, and housing. Some of these plastics may require different
production methods to arrive at the shapes required, such as compression and
injection molding, blowing, extruding, thermoforming, and stamping. Some
plastics can be shaped by more than one process, but in most cases, a mold is
required to give the product the required form. Molds for low-pressures
processing are easier to build than molds for high pressures, such as injection
molds. (There is very little difference between injection molds for plastics and
molds for die casting, i.e., the molding of liquid metals such as zinc.)
In the future, other plastics and other methods of processing and shaping
them will be developed, but at the present time, injection molding seems to be
the most common and economical method to produce plastic products,
especially where large quantities are required.
1.1 Economics of Mold Design
Economics is often overlooked when this subject is taught. Every designer
knows that the mold is a large expenditure and that its cost will affect the cost of
the molded product. What designers often do not see is that this is only relative.
Certainly, a simple mold, without all the ``bells and whistles'' will be less
expensive, if the anticipated production run with the mold is relatively small. In
some cases, it may be even of economic advantage not to mold a product
completely as designed, but do some postmolding operations for those areas in
the design that would require expensive features in the mold. For example, holes
could be drilled after molding at an angle to the mold axis rather than designing
and building complicated side cores; similarly, stamping of side wall could avoid
a ``split'' mold. The designer must always consider the overall picture. It is more
important to produce the lowest cost of the ®nished molded part, taking into
account the cost of material, molding cost, and cost of direct labor involved in
®nishing the molded product, and including the cost of any postmolding
equipment, such as drilling ®xtures.
On the other hand, in real mass production, where many many millions of
parts are expected to be produced, the mold should be built with the best mold
1.1 Economics of Mold Design 3
materials and the best mold design features, always keeping in mind that the
actual mold cost, even though higher, will have a negligible effect on the cost
per unit. It should also be clear that there is a difference between mold making
as part of the molder's operation and mold making as a business, that is, making
molds for selling to a molder or end user. The molder may forgo some of the
``appearance'' features that would be expected from a reputable mold-making
business. The molder will also be more aware of the expected production
requirements and may take shortcuts that the mold maker in business would not.
Today, most molders, but also many mold makers, specialize in certain areas.
There are specialists for thin-wall molding, screw-cap making, large beverage
container crates, preforms for PET bottles, small gears, and many others. This
leads to the specialization of designers for the molds for these applications. But
regardless of what size and type product is injection molded or who designs or
builds the mold, the basic mold design principles as explained in this book are
always the same. In this book, the designer should not look for pictures
(drawings) of existing molds, but will learn instead the many things that must be
considered when designing a mold. This does not mean that pictures of molds
cannot be helpful, but every mold is different and some may require a better
approach than the older mold depicted.
I will refer occasionally to three of my earlier books: Understanding
Injection Molding Technology (IMT), Mold Engineering (ME), and Under-
standing Product Design for Injection Molding (PD).
4 Introduction
2 Starting New in the Mold Design
Field
The only prerequisite for the beginner is some knowledge of mechanical
drawing delineation, whether it is done electronically on a computer (with
programs like Autocad) or on the drawing board with pencil. Of course, the
designer must also be familiar with some areas of basic arithmetic and
trigonometry; both are required to put dimensions on the mold parts so they can
be machined. Some of the advantages of electronic drafting are the following:
(1) Designs of entire, or portions, of earlier built molds can be easily used
again by simply copying or modifying some existing design features
from the program's memory, without the need for tedious redrawing.
(2) An up-to-date library of standard mold components and hardware can
be established, which can be easily and quickly accessed and
reproduced in new designs without the need for redrawing them every
time they are needed.
(3) The quality of the drawings produced by a computer printout does not
depend on the skilled hand of the designer.
(4) The computer permits easy transmission of designs to other locations,
such as in-house manufacturing centers or manufacturers at other
addresses.
Note the computer is only a tool to the designer; ultimately, the quality of a
design depends entirely on how well the designer understands what is required
and what can be made. Also be aware that even the most experienced designer
will not always come up with the best design on the ®rst attempt, but will try out
different ideas in the course of the design job. This often necessitates sketching,
erasing, and redrawing part or all of the picture, which is much easier to do
electronically. There is a saying about the difference between a draftsman and a
designer: ``the draftsman uses the pencil, the designer uses the eraser.'' In the old
days, the designer made his drawings on paper without much care for the
5
appearance of the resulting picture; it was then usually left to draftpersons to
produce a good, readable drawing.
The important thing is the thought that goes into the design of the mold, to
ensure the best possible design. Different solutions are always possible to
achieve the same end; in fact, all mold designers have their own ideas on how to
solve certain design problems. To take advantage of various ideas, and to arrive
at the best mold, it is good practice for the designer, after creating a mold layout,
to consult with a colleague, or to arrange a design meeting of peers to discuss
the proposed design. In many cases it is even better to provide two or more
different layouts. These alternatives should then be discussed, and the best
design or a composite of the various ideas should then be agreed upon.
This procedure is standard practice in all major design of®ces around the
world. It may appear to be time-consuming, but the time (and emotions) invested
in such peer critique are usually outweighed by the bene®ts of arriving at a better
mold. Since, in general, mold designers (especially beginners) may not be
familiar with machining and assembly practices, someone who is familiar in
these areas should be included at such design meetings; this prevents a design of
mold parts that may be dif®cult (or even impossible) to produce economically or
to put together at assembly. It is also bene®cial to have someone who knows the
actual molding process look at a new layout. It is much less expensive to catch
an error while it is still in the designing stage, than to ®nd out about it later when
steel has been cut or, even worse, when the mold is completed.
Time and money can be saved by spending more time during the design
stage to consider alternatives and to get the designer involved in the
manufacturing process of the mold, than by rushing a job through the design
of®ce to save a few hours there. When estimating the total time to build a mold,
allocate approximately 15±20% of the total time for designing and detailing,
about 60±70% for machining, and 15±20% for assembling the mold. (This, of
course, depends on the shape of the product and the complexity of the mold.)
And remember that the better the drawings are when given to the shop (or an
outside source), the less time is wasted during machining and assembly of the
mold.
6 Starting New in the Mold Design Field
3 The Basics of an Injection Molding
Machine
(See also IMT, which contains much basic information on injection molding,
molding machines, and molds.) The injection molding machine (Fig. 3.1)
provides
A safe support for the mold
The opening and closing motion of the mold halves
The clamping force to keep the mold closed while injecting
The melted (plasticized) plastic to be injected
The injection force to ®ll the mold cavity space
The ejection force
All necessary sequencing and temperature controls
Any additional functions as may be required
Molding machines come in many different sizes, from small machines with a
few kilonewtons (tons) of clamping force, to giant machines with 80,000 kN
7
Figure 3.1 Schematic of an injection molding machine (top view).
(8800 US tons), for very large products. All machines can be equipped with a
choice of standard injection units, suitable for the mold size and output required.
At this point, we will not go further into the functions of the molding
machine. When discussing the injection mold, we will explain, when required,
how the functions of the machine and the mold are interrelated.
8 The Basics of an Injection Molding Machine
4 Understanding the Basics of the
Injection Mold
4.1 Design Rules
There are many rules for designing molds. These rules and standard practices
are based on logic, past experience, convenience, and economy. For designing,
mold making, and molding, it is usually of advantage to follow the rules. But
occasionally, it may work out better if a rule is ignored and an alternative way is
selected. In this text, the most common rules are noted, but the designer will
learn only from experience which way to go. The designer must ever be open to
new ideas and methods, to new molding and mold materials that may affect
these rules.
4.2 The Basic Mold
4.2.1 Mold Cavity Space
The mold cavity space is a shape inside the mold, ``excavated'' (by machining
the mold material) in such a manner that when the molding material (in our case,
the plastic) is forced into this space it will take on the shape of the cavity space
and, therefore, the desired product (Fig. 4.1). The principle of a mold is almost
as old as human civilization. Molds have been used to make tools, weapons,
bells, statues, and household articles, by pouring liquid metals (iron, bronze)
into sand forms. Such molds, which are still used today in foundries, can be used
only once because the mold is destroyed to release the product after it has
solidi®ed. Today, we are looking for permanent molds that can be used over and
9
over. Now molds are made from strong, durable materials, such as steel, or from
softer aluminum or metal alloys and even from certain plastics where a long
mold life is not required because the planned production is small. In injection
molding the (hot) plastic is injected into the cavity space with high pressure, so
the mold must be strong enough to resist the injection pressure without
deforming.
4.2.2 Number of Cavities
Many molds, particularly molds for larger products, are built for only 1 cavity
space (a single-cavity mold), but many molds, especially large production
molds, are built with 2 or more cavities (Fig. 4.2). The reason for this is purely
economical. It takes only little more time to inject several cavities than to inject
one. For example, a 4-cavity mold requires only (approximately) one-fourth of
the machine time of a single-cavity mold. Conversely, the production increases
in proportion to the number of cavities. A mold with more cavities is more
expensive to build than a single-cavity mold, but (as in our example) not
necessarily 4 times as much as a single-cavity mold. But it may also require a
Figure 4.1 Illustration of basic mold, with one cavity space.
Figure 4.2 Illustration of basic mold with two cavity spaces.
10 Understanding the Basics of the Injection Mold
larger machine with larger platen area and more clamping capacity, and because
it will use (in this example) 4 times the amount of plastic, it may need a larger
injection unit, so the machine hour cost will be higher than for a machine large
enough for the smaller mold. Today, most multicavity molds are built with a
preferred number of cavities: 2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 16, 24, 32, 48, 64, 96, 128. These
numbers are selected because the cavities can be easily arranged in a rectangular
pattern, which is easier for designing and dimensioning, for manufacturing, and
for symmetry around the center of the machine, which is highly desirable to
ensure equal clamping force for each cavity. A smaller number of cavities can
also be laid out in a circular pattern, even with odd numbers of cavities, such as
3, 5, 7, 9. It is also possible to make cavity layouts for any number of cavities,
provided such rules as symmetry of the projected areas around the machine
centerline (as explained later) are observed.
4.2.3 Cavity Shape and Shrinkage
The shape of the cavity is essentially the ``negative'' of the shape of the desired
product, with dimensional allowances added to allow for shrinking of the
plastic. The fundamentals of shrinkage are discussed later.
The shape of the cavity is usually created with chip-removing machine tools,
or with electric discharge machining (EDM), with chemical etching, or by any
new method that may be available to remove metal or build it up, such as
galvanic processes. It may also be created by casting (and then machining)
certain metals (usually copper or zinc alloys) in plaster molds created from
models of the product to be made, or by casting (and then machining) some
suitable hard plastics (e.g., epoxy resins). The cavity shape can be either cut
directly into the mold plates or formed by putting inserts into the plates.
4.3 Cavity and Core
By convention, the hollow (concave) portion of the cavity space is called the
cavity. The matching, often raised (or convex) portion of the cavity space is
called the core. Most plastic products are cup-shaped. This does not mean that
they look like a cup, but they do have an inside and an outside. The outside of
the product is formed by the cavity, the inside by the core. The alternative to the
cup shape is the ¯at shape. In this case, there is no speci®c convex portion, and
4.3 Cavity and Core 11
sometimes, the core looks like a mirror image of the cavity. Typical examples for
this are plastic knives, game chips, or round disks such as records. While these
items are simple in appearance, they often present serious molding problems for
ejection of the product. Usually, the cavities are placed in the mold half that is
mounted on the injection side, while the cores are placed in the moving half of
the mold. The reason for this is that all injection molding machines provide an
ejection mechanism on the moving platen and the products tend to shrink onto
and cling to the core, from where they are then ejected. Most injection molding
machines do not provide ejection mechanisms on the injection (``hot'') side.
We have seen how the cavity spaces are inside the mold; now we consider
the other basic elements of the mold.
4.4 The Parting Line
In illustrations Figs. 4.1 and 4.2 we showed the cavity space inside a mold. To be
able to produce a mold (and to remove the molded pieces), we must have at least
two separate mold halves, with the cavity in one side and the core in the other.
The separation between these plates is called the parting line, and designated
P/L. Actually, this is a parting area or plane, but, by convention, in this context it
is referred to as a line. In a side view or cross section through the mold, this area
is actually seen as a line (Fig. 4.3).
The parting line can have any shape, but for ease of mold manufacturing, it
is preferable to have it in one plane. The parting line is always at the widest
circumference of the product, to make ejection of the product from the mold
possible. With some shapes it may be necessary to offset the P/L, or to have it at
Figure 4.3 Illustration of schematic mold, showing the parting line.
12 Understanding the Basics of the Injection Mold
an angle, but in any event it is best to have is so that it can be easily machined,
and often ground, to ensure that it shuts off tightly when the mold is clamped
during injection. If the parting line is poorly ®nished the plastic will escape,
which shows up on the product as an unsightly sharp projection, or ``¯ash,''
which must then be removed; otherwise, the product could be unusable. There is
even a danger that the plastic could squirt out of the mold and do personal
damage.
4.4.1 Split Molds and Side Cores
There are other parting (or split) lines than those that separate the cavity and
core halves. These are the separating lines between two or more cavity sections
if the cavity must separate (split or retract) to make it possible to eject the
molded product as the mold opens for ejection.
Figure 4.4 shows simple ``up and down'' molds. The machine clamping
force holds the mold closed at the P/L. (In (B) and (C), the parting line could be
anywhere on the outside of the rim, between the two positions shown, but is
preferred as in (B).) In (D) we must consider the injection pressure p (as shown
with small arrows inside the cavity space), which will force the two cavity
halves in the direction of the the large arrow m. This force also exists in the other
examples, but is resisted by the strength of the solid cavity walls, which do
slightly expand during injection and then return to their original shape once the
injection cycle is completed. Since these side forces can be considerable (see
Section 4.6), the mold plates (the ``mold shoe'') must be suf®ciently solid to
Figure 4.4 Schematic illustrations of location of parting lines (P/L) (only one half of
mold shown): (a) core, (b) cavity. (A) Simplest case: P/L at right angles to axis of mold.
(B and C) Product with rim but still simple. P/L can be either as in (B) or in (C). (D)
Simple product but with rim and projection. Cavity is split, creating an additional P/L 2.
4.4 The Parting Line 13
contain these forces and provide the necessary preload to prevent opening of the
mold during injection. These side cores, or split portions of the cavities, can
represent just small parts of the cavity, or even only small pins to create holes in
the side of the products, but they could also be sections molding whole sides of
a product, as, for example, with beverage crates or large pails.
4.5 Runners and Gates
In Fig. 4.3, we showed molds with cavity spaces and parting lines. Now, we
must add provisions for bringing the plastic into these cavity spaces. This must
be done with enough pressure so that the cavity spaces are ®lled completely
before the plastic ``freezes,'' that is, cools so much that the plastic cannot ¯ow
anymore. The ¯ow passages are the sprue, from where the machine nozzle (see
Fig. 3.1) contacts the mold, the runners, which distribute the plastic to the
individual cavities, and the gates, which are (usually) small openings leading
from the runner into the cavity space. We discuss the great variety of sprues,
runners, and gates later. We illustrate here only two methods of so-called cold
runners (see Fig. 4.5).
The left part of Fig. 4.5 shows the simplest case of a single-cavity mold, with
the plastic injected directly from the sprue into the cavity space. This is a
frequently used method, mostly with large products. It is inexpensive, but
requires the clipping or machining of the relatively large (sprue) gate. The right
drawing is of a typical (2-plate) cold runner system, with the plastic ¯owing
through the sprue and the runner and entering the cavity space through relatively
small gates, which break off easily after ejection. Instead of the 2 cavities as
shown here, there can be any number of cavities supplied by the cold runners.
These and other runner methods are explained later.
Figure 4.5 Illustration of schematic mold, showing cold sprue (left) and cold runner
(right).
14 Understanding the Basics of the Injection Mold
4.6 Projected Area and Injection Pressure
At this point we digress and consider injection pressure and how it affects mold
design (see Fig. 4.6). As the plastic ®lls the cavity space under high pressure p,
the pressure, in the direction of the mold (and machine) axisÐin other words, in
the direction of the motion of the clampÐwill tend to open the cavity at the
parting line. The separating force F created by the pressure p is equal to the
product of the pressure p times the projected area A, which is the area of the
largest projection of the product at the parting line. The arrow describing
projected area in Fig. 4.6 really describes an area not a line, as delineated in this
section view of the mold. The actual area can be seen (and measured) in a plan
view of the mold cavity. From this it becomes clear that the clamping force, the
force exerted on the mold by the molding machine, must be at least as great as
the force F to keep the mold from opening (cracking open) during injection.
The dif®culty is how to determine the value of the injection pressure p. We
can easily calculate the injection pressure inside the machine nozzle, which is
directly related to the size of the injection cylinder of the machine and the
hydraulic (oil) pressure supplying the injection cylinder. The injection pressure
at the machine nozzle, in general, is adjustable between any low values, to a high
of about 140 MPa (20,000 psi), in most molding machines, and in some
machines can be as high as 200 MPa (29,000 psi) or even higher. This pressure,
Figure 4.6 Portion of a schematic mold, showing a cavity ®lled with plastic under
pressure acting in all directions.
4.6 Projected Area and Injection Pressure 15
however, is greatly reduced (by the pressure drop) by the time the plastic passes
through the machine nozzle ori®ce, the runners, and the gates, and as it ¯ows
through the narrow passages of the cavity space. The ¯ow also depends largely
on the viscosity (de®ning the ease of ¯ow) of the plastic, which depends on its
chemistry and on its temperature (the higher the temperature, the lower the
viscosity). This area is the subject of much research and experimentation, and
computer programs are available to calculate the pressures and the ¯ow inside
the cavity space (see Appendix).
A good working assumption is a cavity pressure p of approximately
30±40 MPa (4000±5000 psi) for average product wall thicknesses of about
2±3 mm or more, and 40±50 MPa (5000±6000 psi) or even higher for thin-wall
products. For example, a disk of 100 mm (10 cm) diameter, with a thickness of
2 mm, will generate an opening force of (10
2
p 4) cm
2
30 MPa = 235 kN
(approx. 26 US tons) per cavity.
4.6.1 Clamping Force
From the above example we see that a clamping force of at least 235 kN (26 US
tons) per cavity should be used to ensure that the mold will not crack open. If the
average wall of the product is thinner, or if the de®nition, that is, the accuracy
and clarity of reproduction of details in the cavity wall, is important, then the
pressure must be higher and a larger clamping force will be required.
4.6.2 Strength of the Mold
There are two other serious effects of the injection pressure p. First, as can be
seen in Fig. 4.6, the pressure also acts in the direction at right angles to the axis
of the mold. These forces, which are the product of the projection of the cavity
in this direction times the pressure p, will tend to stretch and de¯ect the cavity
walls outward. The greater the height H of the product, the greater will be this
force and the stronger must be the walls surrounding the cavity.
Second, the clamping force is applied as soon as the mold closes. At this
moment, the whole clamp force is resisted (``taken up'') by the area of the land,
which is the area surrounding the cavity that touches the core side. If this area is
16 Understanding the Basics of the Injection Mold
too small, the land will be crushed and damage the sealing-off surfaces of the
parting line, eventually ruining the mold. Proper sizing of the land and correct
materials and hardness (steel, etc.), or other measures to counteract the clamping
forces are the solution to this problem. Also, the mold setup technician should
be informed by a nameplate attached to the mold that the recommended
maximum clamp force for the mold must not be exceeded during mold setup or
during operation.
4.6.3 Why Are High Injection Pressures Needed?
High injection pressures are needed to ensure that the mold is completely ®lled
during the injection cycle, with the desired clear surface de®nition. There are
several problems to consider.
(1) The thinner the wall thickness of the product, the more dif®cult it is to
push the plastic through the gap between cavity and core, thus requiring higher
pressures. Since material (the plastic) usually accounts for 50±80% of the total
cost of a molded product, it is highly desirable to reduce the weight (mass) of
plastic injected to a bare minimum. This usually means reducing the wall
thickness as far as possible without affecting the usefulness of the product. Over
the years, many products have been redesigned just to reduce the plastic mass of
a product. This is also why many modern injection molding machines provide
higher injection pressures than older ones.
(2) The colder the injected plastic, the higher its viscosity, and the more
dif®cult it becomes to ®ll the mold. The cost of the product depends directly on
the cycle time required to mold a product. The higher the melt temperature of
the plastic, the easier it will ¯ow and ®ll the mold. However, higher melt
temperatures also require increasing the cooling cycle time to bring the
temperature of the injected plastic down to a level where the product can be
safely ejected without distorting or otherwise damaging it. This means more
power (for heating and cooling), longer cycles, and therefore higher costs. It is
often better to inject at the lowest possible temperatures, even if more pressure is
needed to ®ll the mold. Note that higher injection pressures will require greater
clamping forces and a stronger, possibly larger, machine. Another solution to the
problem might be to select a plastic that ¯ows more easily. Such plastics,
however, are usually more expensive and may not be as strong as desired.
(3) High injection forces are needed for good surface de®nition. Typically,
this is important when molding articles such as compact discs, where the clarity
4.6 Projected Area and Injection Pressure 17
and precision of the surface de®nition is in direct relation to the quality of the
sound reproduction of the recording.
4.7 Venting
As the plastic ¯ows from the gate into the cavity space, the air trapped in it as
the mold closed must be permitted to escape. Typically, the trapped air is being
pushed ahead by the rapidly advancing plastic front, toward all points farthest
away from the gate. The faster the plastic entersÐwhich is usually desirableÐ
the more the trapped air is compressed if it is not permitted to escape, or vented.
This rapidly compressed air heats up to such an extent that the plastic in contact
with the air will overheat and possibly be burnt. Even if the air is not hot enough
to burn the plastic, it may prevent the ®lling of any small corners where air is
trapped and cause incomplete ®lling of the cavity. Most cavity spaces can be
vented successfully at the parting line, but often additional vents, especially in
deep recesses or in ribs, are necessary.
Another venting problem arises when plastic fronts ¯owing from two or
more directions collide and trap air between them. Unless vents are placed there
the plastic will not ``knit'' and may even leave a hole in the wall of the product.
This can be the case when more than one gate feeds one cavity space, or when
the plastic ¯ow splits in two after leaving the gate, due to the shape of the
product or the location of the gate. Within the cavity space, plastic always ¯ows
along the path of least resistance, and if there are thinner areas, they will ®ll only
after the thicker sections are full.
Venting is discussed more thoroughly in ME, Chapter 11.
4.8 Cooling
Cooling and productivity are closely tied. In injection molding, the plastic is
heated in the molding machine to its processing (melt) temperature by adding
energy in the form of heat, which is mostly generated by the rotation (work) of
the extruder screw. After injection, the plastic must be cooled; in other words,
the heat energy in the plastic must be removed by cooling, so that the molded
piece becomes rigid enough for ejection. Cooling may proceed slowly, by just
letting the heat dissipate into the mold and from there into the environment. This
is not suitable for large production, but for very short runs ``arti®cial'' cooling of
a mold is not always required. However, for a production mold, good cooling to
remove the heat ef®ciently is very important.
18 Understanding the Basics of the Injection Mold
4.8.1 Basics of Cooling
The physics and mathematics of cooling are quite complicated. Computer
programs can determine the appropriate means of cooling a particular mold,
after input of the geometry of the product and the mold, and based on assumed
temperatures of melt and coolant, ¯ow patterns and sizes of the cooling
channels, and other variables, such as heat characteristics of the coolant and the
mold materials. This means that a computer program can determine the best
planned cooling layout for a mold only after the mold is designed. But the
designer wants to know how to design the best cooling layout in the ®rst place.
There are several rules, based on experience, to help the designer.
j Rule 1: Only moving coolant is effective for removing heat. Stagnant
coolant in ends of channels, or in any pocket, does nothing for cooling.
j Rule 2: All cavities (and cores) must be cooled with the same coolant
¯ow (quantity of coolant per unit of time) at a temperature that is little
different from cavity to cavity (or core to core). The coolant temperature
will rise as it passes through each cavity (or core), but this is the very
purpose of the coolant: to remove heat, which will raise its own
temperature. As long as the temperature difference DT between the ®rst
and the last cavity in one group of cavities (or cores) is not too largeÐon
the order of DT=1 5

C (2±9

F), depending on the jobÐthe system is
working properly. The smaller the difference, the more coolant will be
required (which is more expensive in operation). In many molds there can
be a good argument for compromise by having a greater DT and thereby
using less coolant. In some cases, however, the lowest DT value may be
necessary for quality requirements of the product. This may require
special coolant capacity and pumps.
j Rule 3: The amount of heat removed depends on the quantity (volume)
of coolant ¯owing through the channels in cavity (or core). The faster the
coolant ¯ows, the better it is, because (a) a greater volume will ¯ow
through the channels, and (b) there will be less temperature rise of the
coolant from the ®rst to the last cavity (or core).
j Rule 4: The coolant must ¯ow in a turbulent ¯ow pattern, rather than in
laminar ¯ow. Turbulence within the ¯ow causes the coolant to swirl
around as it ¯ows, thereby continuously bringing fresh, cool liquid in
contact with the hot metal walls of the cooling channels, and removing
more heat. By contrast, laminar ¯ow moves along the channel walls
4.8 Cooling 19
relatively undisturbed, so that the outer layer of the coolant in touch with
the metal will heat up, but the center of the coolant ¯ow will remain cold,
thus doing little cooling.
Turbulent ¯ow is de®ned by the Reynolds number (Re), which is calculated
as Re = (V D) n, where V is the velocity of the coolant (m/s), D is the
diameter of the channel (m), and n is the kinematic viscosity (m
2
/s). n = m r,
where m is the absolute viscosity (kg/m· s), and r is the density of the coolant
(kg/m
3
). A Reynolds number of more than 4000 (Re b4000) designates
turbulent ¯ow. The higher the number, the better the cooling ef®ciency. For good
cooling, 10,000 `Re `20,000 should be attempted. For water at 5

C (41

F),
r = 999X5 kgam
3
, m = 1X55 10
3
kgam· s, and n = 1X5508 10
÷6
m
2
as.
(More values can be found in ME, in Table 25.2.)
Thus, where cooling is importantÐin cavities, cores, inserts, side cores, and
so onÐsmall-diameter channels and fast-¯owing coolant are also important. Most
cooling lines for cavities and cores are supplied fromchannels in the underlying or
surrounding plates, and can be much larger, therefore having a much smaller Re
number. But this is usually satisfactory because these plates do not need as much
cooling as the stack parts, which come in contact with the hot plastic.
j Rule 5: Serial or parallel ¯ow? (See Fig. 4.7.) It does not matter
whether the coolant follows a serial ¯ow, that is, from cavity to cavity (or
core to core) in sequence (Fig. 4.7a), or whether the ¯ow is split so that
the coolant ¯ows in a parallel pattern (Fig. 4.7b), as long as each branch
has the same ¯ow. In many multicavity molds, the cooling channels are
arranged so that they are partly in parallel and partly in series (Fig. 4.7c).
Often, in the same mold, cavities are in one arrangement of series,
parallel, or both, and cores, inserts, or side cores, are in another
arrangement, whichever is more suitable for the layout. There is no rule
for which way to go, as long as the ¯ow rules are followed.
j Rule 6: The channel sizes (cross sections) must be calculated so that
there is always more than enough ¯ow capacity in a preceding section to
Figure 4.7 Schematic layout of (a) series cooling, (b) parallel cooling, and (c)
series±parallel cooling.
20 Understanding the Basics of the Injection Mold
feed equally all the channels in the following split, parallel sections. For
example, if there are 4 parallel channels of 40 mm
2
cross-sectional area
each, the (preceding) feeder must have at least 4 40 mm
2
= 160 mm
2
cross-sectional area. In some molds there are 4 or more points where the
cross sections step down in the cooling system. It does not matter if the
preceding section is greater than the calculated minimum value, but it
must not be smaller, if the coolant is to ¯ow equally through all
subsequent channels. Coolant, like plastics, always takes the path of least
resistance. For example, if the preceding cross section is 3x, and each of 4
succeeding parallel cross sections are x, there will not be enough coolant,
and one of the 4 channels will see little or no ¯ow through it.
Unfortunately, this is often missed in designs and the mold does not
function properly.
j Rule 7: The dif®cult-to-cool areas in the mold must be considered ®rst.
These are, essentially, all delicate mold features, such as thin and slender
core pins, blades, and sleeves. Slender signi®es, in this context, that the
ratio of length over the narrow bottom dimension or diameter of a pin or
insert is more than 2 to 1. Remember that heat always ¯ows from the
higher toward the lower temperature; the ¯ow decreases as the length of
travel increases and as the cross-sectional area through which the heat
travels gets smaller. Dif®cult-to-cool areas limit the mold cooling
capability and seriously affect the molding cycle. There is no sense in
providing good cooling for the easy-to-cool areas of the mold if there are
poorly cooled areas elsewhere in it. Selecting materials such as
beryllium±copper alloys may help to remove the heat faster, or special
cooling methods may be used, such as blowing (cold) air at the thin
sections while the mold is open. But ®rst the designer must try to ®nd a
way of getting coolant (not necessarily water) into the thin sections, or at
least get the best cooling into the mold parts supporting these thin
projections.
j Rule 8: Study the product to locate heavy sections of the plastic. They
are always a problem, even where it is easy to provide good cooling,
because of potential shrink and sink marks. Heavy sections are
particularly bad if they are toward the end of the plastics ¯ow where
there is less pressure to ensure good ®lling. The mold designer should
discuss this problem with the product designer. There may be the
possibility of a minor alteration of the product design to avoid heavy
sections so that not only is plastic saved but also cooling time is reduced.
For example, the heavy, solid handle of a coffee mug could be redesigned
4.8 Cooling 21
by coring it from both sides. This could add to the mold cost, but would
greatly reduce the cycle time. The question is whether the customer wants
to sacri®ce design features for productivity. (See also Understanding
Product Design for Injection Molding.)
4.8.2 Plate Cooling
An often overlooked fact is that mold cooling is not only for cooling the plastic,
but also for cooling the various mold plates that are close to areas heated by the
plastic, such as the hot runner systems discussed later or, in special cases, such
as injection blow molding, where the mold cores are heated to keep the plastic
hot, for blowing immediately after injection. As is explained in Section 4.10, all
materials expand when heated. In many molds, certain plates are essential for
the alignment system because they carry the leader pins and bushings or other
alignment members. If the mold plates are at different temperatures, they will
expand differently from their original, cold state, and cause misalignment
between the alignment elements. For example, assume that the distance of two
leader pins in a mold is L = 400 mm and that a temperature difference of
DT = 10

C (18

F) exists between the two plates carrying the pins and
bushings. With an approximate heat expansion for steel of 0.000011 mm/mm/

C,
L will increase by DL. DL = L DT 0X000011 = 400 10 0X000011 =
0X044 mm (0.00173 inch). Considering that the standard diametrical clearance
between leader pins and bushings is only 0.025 mm (0.001 inch), the example
shows the pins will bend at every cycle, or bind in the bushings. This points
to the importance of ensuring in the design that both mold halves should
be kept as close as possible to the same temperature. (Compression molding,
usually employed for thermosetting materials, requires heating of the mold,
regardless of productivity. In this process, the plastic must be heated to set (or
harden); the product leaves the mold hotter than the raw material used to ®ll the
mold.)
More about cooling later. See also ME, Chapter 13.
4.9 Ejection
After the plastic in the cavity spaces has cooled suf®ciently and is rigid enough
and ready for removal, the mold halves move apart, allowing suf®cient space
22 Understanding the Basics of the Injection Mold
between the mold halves for removal of the product. As with cooling, the
complexity of any provision for ejection from the mold is a question of the
desired productivity. Some products don't need any provision within the mold
for ejection. For example, a quick blast from an air jet applied manually by an
operator and directed at the parting line can lift a (simple) product off the core or
out of the cavity, but this would not be practical in most molds, and is rarely
used for real production. Usually, the products are ejected by one of the
following methods:
(1) Pin (and sleeve)
(2) Stripper plate or stripper ring
(3) Air alone
(4) Air assist
(5) Combination of any of the above (1), (2), (3), and (4)
(6) Unscrewing, in case of screw caps, etc.
(7) Combination of any of the above, combined with robots
The most common and oldest methods are
+ Pin (and sleeve) as shown in Fig. 4.8
+ Stripper plate or stripper ring, as shown in Fig. 4.9
These two systems can be used in most molds and for most plastics. The
problem with both these systems is that there are heavy moving parts
involved, and the upkeep of such molds is high.
+ Air ejection alone can be used for ¯at products (Fig. 4.10, left), but for
deep cup-shaped products (right) it is restricted to only certain plastics
and shapes. The main advantage is that it has no, or almost no, moving
Figure 4.8 (Left) Section through ejector pin mold: (a) backing plate, (b) ejector plate,
(c) ejector retainer plate, (d) core plate, (e) molded product, (f) ejector pin, (g) stop pin.
(Right) Section through sleeve ejector mold: (a) backing plate, (b) core pin retainer
plate, (c) ejector plate, (d) sleeve retainer plate, (e) molded product, (f) core plate, (g)
sleeve ejector, (h) core pin, (i) stop pin.
4.9 Ejection 23
parts. Air ejection alone is often used in very high production molds; the
same applies to (7), by combining any of the above ejection methods
with integrated robots.
Note that for best productivity, to reduce cycle time, the products should be
ejected as early as possible. Certain ejection methods permit earlier ejection;
others depend on the plastic to be stiffer. For example, stripping permits hotter
(softer) products to be ejected without damage to them, whereas unscrewing
requires the pieces to be more rigid.
Figure 4.10 Air ejection alone. (Left) (a) core and mounting plate, (b) molded product,
(c) air valves, (d) pressure air supply. (Right) (a) core and mounting plate, (b) core tip,
(c) circular air gap, (d) pressure air supply, (e) molded product.
Figure 4.9 (Left) Section through stripper ring mold: (a) mounting plate, (b) ejector
plate, (c) core plate, (d) stripper ring, (e) molded product, (f) machine ejector, (g)
connecting sleeve. (Right) Section through stripper plate mold: (c) core and mounting
plate, (d) stripper plate, (e) molded product, (f) machine ejectors.
24 Understanding the Basics of the Injection Mold
4.9.1 Automatic Molding
Earlier molds were all designed to require operators (often lowly paid and
unskilled) to sit or stand at the molding machine. After every cycle they opened
the safety gate to remove the products from the molding area, reclosed the gate
and initiated the next molding cycle. They also were, in some cases, supposed to
visually inspect the products at this time and even make adjustments to the
machine if they thought it necessary. Because the molds were often not properly
®nished, by today's standards, or had unreliable injection and ejection systems,
the operator was also often required to reach into the molding area to pry loose a
stuck, possibly defective product, and from time to time had to lubricate the
molding surfaces with mold release agents. All this was not only labor intensive,
adding greatly to the cost of production, but was also very unsafe and the cause
of many serious injuries. Since much of this operation also depended on the
acquired skill of the operatorÐsome workers are faster, some slowerÐand on
the time of the day or night, or even on the day of the week, the overall molding
cycle time could vary considerably, resulting in quality differences of the
product because of different residence times of the melt in the machine; many
rejects resulted. There was also the problem of absenteeism of the personnel,
which often played havoc with production planning. Much effort was therefore
spent on eliminating operators from the actual molding process.
Fully automatic (FA) molding depends essentially on two factors:
(1) Reliable injection. The molding machine must be repetitive from cycle
to cycle in every aspect, but especially in the dosing (the amount of
plastic injected) and the melt temperature.
(2) Reliable ejection. This is 100% the responsibility of the mold designer.
Every mold (with very rare exceptions) can be designed so that there is
no chance of the product hanging up and not ejecting. The key to good
ejection is that the product always stays on the side from which it will
be ejected, usually, but not necessarily, from the core side of the mold.
The designer must select the appropriate method of ejection and make
sure that there is enough ejection stroke to clear the products from the
cores. This is frequently overlooked and can also be caused by
improper setup of the mold. Many areas must be considered in the
design; some are discussed later.
The designer must keep in mind Murphy's law, which says that if it can happen,
it will.
See also ME, Chapter 12.
4.9 Ejection 25
4.10 Shrinkage
One of the most misunderstood areas of mold design is shrinkage. Every
material (metals, plastics, gases, liquids) expands as its temperature increases
(heat expansion) and returns to its original volume if cooled down to the original
temperature. The problem with all plastics is the characteristic of compressi-
bility. All solid materials compress under load, but most not as much as plastics.
When pressure is applied to plastics (or to hydraulic oil, but not to water),
plastics will compress signi®cantly (i.e., reduce in volume) in proportion to the
amount of pressure applied. This may be (within the range of molding
operations) as high as 2% of the original volume. Thus, we now have two
conditions that work against each other: heat expansion and compressibility. As
the plastic is injected, it is both hot and therefore expanded, but also under
signi®cant pressure, which reduces its volume. This makes it very dif®cult to
arrive at a true shrinkage factor, because the actual change in volume depends
on the type of plastic, the melt temperature, the injection pressure required to
®ll the cavity space, and the temperature at which it will be ejected from the
mold.
For practical purposes, and for many products and molds, the shrinkage
factors supplied by materials suppliers can be used. However, these ®gures
indicate only a range within which to choose, usually between 0 and 5%. In
some cases, where the volume or size of a product is important, this is not
accurate enough. With crystalline plastics, such as polyethylene (PE),
polypropylene (PP), and polyamide (nylon), the shrinkage factor is much
higher than with amorphous plastics, such as polystyrene (PS) and
polycarbonate (PC). Plastics ®lled with inert substances, such as glass or
carbon ®bers or talcum, have a much lower shrinkage than that for the same but
un®lled material. Shrinkage ®gures should be obtained from materials suppliers,
for guiding purposes.
4.10.1 Variable Shrinkage
The designer must understand that the areas within the cavity spaces close to the
gate see higher pressures, so the shrinkage there will be less and will require a
smaller shrinkage factor. Conversely, near the end of the ¯ow through the
narrow cavity space, the pressure in the plastic is much lower than near the gate,
and a higher shrinkage factor will apply. In some applications, more than two
26 Understanding the Basics of the Injection Mold
shrinkage factors may have to be selected within one cavity. It is also important
to establish at what temperature the product will be ejected. If it is ejected while
still hot, it will shrink more outside of the cavity space as it cools to room
temperature. If ejected later, when it is cooler, it will shrink less, as measured in
comparison with the steel sizes of the cavity and core.
This is sometimes, but uneconomically, used to arrive at the proper size of a
product such as a container or lid. If a molded product is too small because not
enough shrinkage value was added to the product dimensions when specifying
the mold steel dimensions, the proper product size can be achieved by ejecting it
later, when it is cooler, but this means loss in productivity. With high production,
the proper procedure is to resize the steel dimensions.
See also ME, Chapter 8.
4.11 Alignment
Various methods are used to align cavity and core plates. The method selected
depends on the shape of the product, the accuracy (or tightness of tolerances)
of the product, and even on the expected mold life. Several choices are
available:
(1) No provision for alignment within the mold
(2) Leader pins and bushings
(3) Taper lock between each cavity and core
(4) Taper lock between a group of cavities and cores
(5) Wedge locks
(6) Taper pins
(7) Combination of (2) with (3), (4), (5), or (6)
4.11.1 No Provision for Alignment
In the case of a ¯at product, without any cavity (depression) in one mold half,
and the cavity entirely in the other mold half, for example, in a mold for a ¯oor
mat, there is no need for alignment, even if there is some engraving on the ¯at
surface of the mold, because the most the dimensions can vary is by the amount
of play between the machine tie bars and the tie bar bushings.
4.11 Alignment 27
4.11.2 Leader Pins and Bushings
This common method of alignment between mold halves is shown in Fig. 4.11.
In cup-shaped products with heavy walls, there is really no need for alignment
within the mold, because the clearances between tie bars and their bushings are
usually much less than the tolerances of the product wall thickness. The main
reason to have leader pins in these cases is to protect the projecting cores from
physical damage, when handling the mold.
The protection of the cores by use of leader pins applies also to all other
mold alignment methods. Wherever leader pins are used, they should be placed
at the same mold side as the cores and be longer than the longest projection of
the cores to protect them from damage (see dimension s, in Fig. 4.11). There are
exceptions to this rule, for example, in some 3-plate molds.
What is often missed is that for most applications leader pins and bushings
are a very accurate method of alignment. Consider dimension t in Fig. 4.11, and
let's assume a wall thickness t = 1X50 mm (0.060 inch), with a tolerance of
±0X05 mm (0.002 inch), or 1.50 ±0.05 mm. With standard commercial
hardware, the leader pin is usually nominal size minus 0.025 mm (÷0X001
inch), and the bushing is nominal size plus 0.025 mm (÷0.001 inch). Therefore,
with one set of pins and bushings, the maximum clearance, in the highly
unlikely worst case, between one set of leader pins and bushings could be
0.05 mm (0.002 inch) on the diameter, so the centers would be misaligned only
half that amount. By having at least 2, but usually 4 sets, the total clearance
between the pins in all the bushings would be even less. In the worst case, the
Figure 4.11 Typical mold with leader pin and bushing alignment: (a) core plate, (b)
cavity plate, (c) leader pin, (d) leader pin bushing, (s) safety distance of pin above core,
(t) wall thickness of plastic product at parting line.
28 Understanding the Basics of the Injection Mold
possible play and misalignment would be well within the tolerance limits
speci®ed in this example, and therefore acceptable.
It can be easily seen that this holds true as long as the product has not much
smaller wall thicknesses, as is often the case with thin-wall containers, with wall
thicknesses in the order of 0.4 mm (0.015 inch) or even less. In those special but
frequent cases, other methods of alignment must be used such as taper ®ts. We
also must not forget the in¯uence of heat expansion of the mold plates, which
will affect the alignment accuracy.
4.11.3 Taper Lock Between Each Cavity and Core
Figure 4.12 shows 3 possible con®gurations of taper or wedge locks. On the left,
the tapers in both male and female members match perfectly. Because of
manufacturing tolerances, this is impossible to achieve except, perhaps, by
individual ®tting of parts, and even then it is dif®cult. To be able to produce any
mold part without need for ®tting (center), they must be closely toleranced and
accurately machined. To solve the problem of providing proper alignment, the
matching parts are dimensioned such that the male member is slightly larger
than the female member, and the female member will be slightly expanded from
the moment the mold halves touch, until the mold is fully clamped. The amount
that the pieces stay apart before ®nal clamping (d) is called preload in Fig. 4.12.
This amount d is very, very small, and depends on the length of the taper and on
its angle. It must be greater than zero. On the right, the female member is larger
than the male member. This taper lock is useless because the tapers don't touch
(f); no force is generated to pull the mold halves into alignment.
Figure 4.12 Taper (or wedge) lock: (a) male member, (b) female member, (c) taper.
(Left) Ideal condition. (Center) Correct application. d is called preload. (Right) Useless
taper.
4.11 Alignment 29
In practice, it can be easily seen on a mold if the tapers work: If the tapers (or
wedges) are shiny all around, they work; if they are rusty, or just dirty, they don't
work, and the mold probably depends on the tie bars and tie bar bushings for
alignment, or on the mold leader pins and bushings. It is surprising how many
molds are in this category. Many times the designer (or the mold maker) thought
that by providing tapers, the mold will be more accurately aligned. In most of
these cases, the taper ®t was wasted money. Note that working tapers are subject
to severe wear and must be made from suitable, hardened steels, and even so will
have to be replaced or repaired from time to time. Any size taper is acceptable,
between 5 and 20

. (Common tapers are 7, 10, and 15

.) Too small a taper may
cause locking and separation dif®culty because of friction in the tapers; too
large a taper requires too much force to close. Obviously, to move the tapers
for the preload distance d, until they seat properly, means that the matching,
female taper will have to be spread. This requires considerable force. When
considering the clamp force of the machine, this must be considered and the
forces calculated, especially with multicavity molds in which every stack is
aligned with taper locks. If too much force is required for closing the mold, there
may not be enough clamp force left for holding the mold closed during
injection.
4.11.4 Taper Locks and Wedges
Taper locks are conical (usually round) matching mold parts, and the taper of the
cone is designed to provide the alignment between two mold parts (cavity±core,
core±stripper ring, etc.). This method is very accurate and relatively
inexpensive, but has two inherent disadvantages:
(1) The alignment of the various components depends on the accuracy of
machining and once the assembly is ®nished, there is no possibility of
adjusting the alignment.
(2) Once the tapers wear, which is unavoidable due to the very nature of
this design, which must touch and rub, they are dif®cult to repair and
reuse without changing other mold parts as well. The easiest way is
often to replace the worn elements.
Wedges are pairs of hardened, ¯at bars, with one side tapered. Four sets of
wedges are always required per alignment, either for each cavity, or for the
whole mold. The advantage is that wedges can be shimmed or ground on
30 Understanding the Basics of the Injection Mold
opposite pairs to adjust for wear or for inaccurate manufacturing, or easily
replaced if shimming is not practical. The disadvantage of wedges is that they
require more space on the mold surface, so the mold size will be larger than
when using taper locks.
4.11.5 Taper Pins
Taper pins (and bushings) are sometimes used for the ®nal alignment of cavity
and core in addition to leader pins, where it is believed that the accuracy of
leader pins is insuf®cient. They act similarly to taper locks and are available as
standard mold hardware. It is questionable whether they do any better job than
the other methods of alignments explained here; and they are subject to the same
problems as taper locks, regarding wear and accuracy of machining the mold
and/or core plates.
4.11.6 Too Many Alignment Features
Another problem is frequently encountered in poorly designed molds. Typically,
cavities and cores can be aligned by either leader pins and bushings, or taper (or
wedge) locks. Where high accuracy in alignment is required, taper (or wedge)
locks are the preferred choice. However, they do not assure that the mold halves
will stay together when handling the mold; there is always the danger that the
cores and cavities could be damaged if the mold halves should separate and
bang together once the taper engagement is lost. It is therefore necessary to
equip the mold with leader pins (but not necessarily with leader pin bushings),
in addition to the taper locks. Since the tapers will determine the ®nal alignment,
the leader pins must ®t only loosely in their corresponding openings (or leader
pin bushings) without actually contributing to the ®nal alignment of cavities and
cores. Quite often, even for large molds, only two such pins need to be provided,
usually located at the top of the mold on the core side.
Similarly, some multicavity molds are built with small leader pins (usually
only two) and bushings for each set of cavity and core and are mounted on the
stack plates; they ensure the ®nal alignment of each stack. In addition, two or
four large leader pins are used to align the complete mold halves, but these pins
also must be ``loose'' in their bushings, to prevent ``®ghting'' between the two
4.11 Alignment 31
separate sets of alignments. An exception to this rule of loose pins is when a
more expensive but superior method is used: the cores are mounted such that
they can move slightly (¯oat) on their backing plates; as the mold closes, the
®nal alignment (tapers or pins) will move each core into position relative to its
cavity. In this case, the leader pins mounted in the mold shoe (on the core side)
will have their regular, standard clearances.
32 Understanding the Basics of the Injection Mold
5 Before Starting to Design a Mold
5.1 Information and Documentation
Before starting to design a mold, the designer must make sure that all the
information is on hand.
5.1.1 Is the Product Design Ready?
It is frustrating and wastes valuable time to ®nd during your work that
information is missing, or when signi®cant changes are made after starting that
can affect the concept of the mold.
5.1.2 Are the Tolerances Shown?
Are the dimensional tolerances speci®ed on the drawing the same as when the
mold cost was ®rst estimated and the mold price quoted? This can have serious
implications, especially if no tolerances were shown when the job was quoted;
for example, if a molder requests an approximate mold cost so that he can
estimate the ®nal cost of the product for his customer. Unfortunately, sometimes
there is not even a drawing, just a sample or model of the product used for the
estimate.
While it is desirable that the mold designer is involved in the product design,
to ensure that the product can be easily molded and will be satisfactory for the
purpose intended, mold designers should not agree to make a product drawing,
and if they do, they must insist that it be signed by the customer as acceptable.
This will eliminate any possible unpleasantness later on, if the product does not
look or function as expected.
33
5.1.3 Are the Tolerances Reasonable?
Are the requested product tolerances feasible, in view of the size of the product
and the plastic speci®ed? This is sometimes overlooked when quoting. As we
have seen in Section 4.10, while it is nearly always possible to make the mold
parts accurately, to very close tolerances, this does not mean that the molded part
will satisfy often unreasonable and unnecessary requests for close tolerances. If
very close product tolerances are wanted, an experimental setup may be required
to determine steel sizes, a process that can be very costly and time-consuming.
This must be made clear before work is started. Note that in the case of very
stringent tolerances, production (the actual molding) can become very
expensive, requiring close inspection of the molded products and possibly
causing many rejects.
5.1.4 What are the Cycle Times?
The designer should never guarantee cycle times and must make sure that the
customer understands this. If the customer insists on any guarantee, it could
require experimental work (test molds, remaking of mold parts, etc.), which
could become very expensive. Any such anticipated costs should be brought to
the attention of the customer, and added to the mold price. However, the
designer should have some idea of the expected cycle, from past experience with
similar products, or should try to get this information from someone with
molding experience with such products.
5.1.5 What is the Expected Production?
The designer must be aware of the total production expected from the mold, and
the expected life of it. There is a signi®cant difference if the mold should be
built for 1000, 100,000, 1,000,000, or 10,000,000 or more parts. This
consideration will affect all aspects of a mold, from mold materials selection
to many mold features selected by the designer.
It cannot be repeated often enough that the mold is the most important, but
only one link in a chain of requirements to produce a molded product. The
molder, or the ®nal user, should not really be interested in the mold cost, but
34 Before Starting to Design a Mold
only in the cost of the molded product. It is the duty of the designer to advise the
customer accordingly and build the most economical mold for the intended job.
The following is also a frequent scenario: A new widget is to be marketed.
After a few hundred test samples, the customer estimates that during the next
year he could sell 10,000 pieces. He does not yet know if the widget will be
accepted at large. What size mold will be required? How will the mold cost,
divided by this quantity, affect the cost of the widget? Obviously, because of the
small quantity, the mold cost will be signi®cant in this calculation. Also, because
of the relatively small quantity, there may be only one cavity or at most 2 or 4
cavities required. This means low productivity, resulting in a higher molding
cost. A simple cold runner system could be suitable and quite inexpensive. But
what if the widget turns out to be a success and the required quantities increase
to an estimated 1,000,000 over the next 3 years? The ®rst mold probably will not
be able to produce these quantities in time. This will then require a new, much
different mold, with more cavities, a hot runner system, and so onÐin short, a
more complicated mold, which will cost much more but, despite the higher mold
cost, will result in a much lower cost of the molded piece. Which is the better
mold? They are both good, and each one is suitable for the speci®ed
requirement.
5.1.6 What are the Machine Speci®cations?
Before starting, the designer must know the machine or machines on which the
mold is to operate.
5.1.6.1 Mechanical Features
(1) Tie bar clearances and platen size, front to back, top to bottom. Will the
planned mold ®t on the platens? In some cases it is all right to have the mold
larger than these dimensions, it may even overhang the platens, as long as the
cavities are located within the area between the tie bars. In some (today rare)
cases, it may be necessary to pull one or both top tie bars to be able to install the
mold. If this is required, the designer must ®nd out if the planned machines have
provisions for easy tie bar pulling.
(2) Locating ring size, sprue bushing radius. The locating ring centers the
injection half of the mold on the stationary (or ``hot'') platen. The sprue bushing
5.1 Information and Documentation 35
radius must ®t the injection nozzle radius. There are standards, but make sure
you have the appropriate sizes. Some of the machines for which the mold is
planned may have different sizes, so more than one locating ring (or an adaptor
ring) and different sprue bushings may be required.
(3) Mold mounting holes and slot pattern (Euro, SPI, or other standard?).
How will the mold be mounted on the platens? The best method is where the
mold halves are directly screwed onto the platens, using standard mounting
holes on the platens or clearance holes on the platens with threaded holes in the
mold. With this method the full holding force of the screw is utilized. But this is
often not possible, especially if the mold must ®t several, different machines. In
these cases, mold clamps are frequently used, with the clamp screws making use
of standard mounting holes or slots in the platens. The disadvantage of this
method is that only a portion of the holding force of the screw is utilized.
(4) Quick mold change features. There are a number of commercial and
proprietary systems, and the designer must get the speci®cations to ®t the
system before starting to design the mold.
(5) Machine ejector. The ejector force is usually about 10% of the clamp
force, which is suf®cient for most molds, but there are cases where this is not
enough. The mold may have to be equipped with additional ejection means,
often built-in hydraulic or air actuators. The machine ejectors are always on the
moving platen, but their size and pattern will vary according to the builder's
standards (Euro, SPI, other standard?). If the mold will make use of the machine
ejectors it is important to know their size and location when designing the
ejection mechanism.
(6) Shut height. This is the total height of the mold, that is, the distance from
the mounting face of the cavity half to the mounting face of the moving half.
This distance must not be greater than the maximum distance of the platen
surfaces of the machine when in fully closed position. The machine
speci®cations indicate maximum and minimum shut height. If the laid-out shut
height is too great, there are several ways to reduce it: (a) Investigate whether all
the shown mold plates are really necessary. In some molds, for example, the
mounting plate under an ejector box can be omitted, by fastening the mold to the
machine using the mold parallels (see Fig. 7.3). (b) Reduce the thickness of one
or more of the mold plates. (c) If neither is possible without compromising the
quality (strength) of the mold, a different machine must be selected. This should
be discussed with the molder before proceeding.
Conversely, if the shut height is too small, plate thicknesses can be increased,
which is not always a good solution because it makes the mold unnecessarily
heavy and adds cost to the mold. Some machines are equipped with Bolster
36 Before Starting to Design a Mold
plates, or bolster blocks, which are mounted on the moving platen in order to
decrease the minimum shut height.
(7) Clamp stroke. In most machines, the mold clamp stroke is adjustable.
For many molds, the suggested minimum stroke should be about 2.5 times the
height of the product to ensure that the molded pieces have enough space to fall
free between the mold halves during ejection; however, the stroke should not be
less than about 150 mm (6 inches), so that the mold surfaces can be accessed for
servicing while the mold is open. There are exceptions to these two suggested
values, for special applications, particularly when using automatic (robotic)
product removal methods, which are outside the scope of this book.
(8) Ejector stroke. This stroke is also adjustable, within the limits of the
machine speci®cations. The designer must make sure that the available ejection
stroke is large enough to push the products completely off the cores, in cases
where little draft is speci®ed, for example, when molding deep-draw containers.
With good draft, it is usually not necessary to do more than push the products
some short distance before they fall free, or before air-assist features will blow
them away. There are again some exceptions, particularly with robotic product
removal methods.
(9) Clamping force. The designer must make sure that the total projected
areas of all cavities, plus the projected areas of any runner system in the same
parting plane, multiplied by the estimated injection pressure, will not be greater
than the available machine clamping force. As we have seen earlier, the
estimated injection pressure depends on the ease of plastic ¯ow (viscosity,
temperature) and on the wall thickness of the product. In borderline cases, it is
sometimes possible to change conditions, for example, in a very large product,
by increasing the number of gates and placing them far apart; it may then be
possible to use lower injection pressures, thereby requiring less clamp.
(10) Auxiliary controls. Some molds may require specially designed air
circuits for air ejection or for air actuators. Is the machine equipped for such
circuits, to be timed within the molding cycles? In some cases, hydraulically
actuated side cores may be required. Has the machine a provision for timed core
pulls?
5.1.6.2 Productivity Features
(1) Shot size (mass per shot). The total calculated or estimated shot size, that
is, the total mass (weight) of the products coming from all cavities, plus the mass
of the runner system (in the case of cold runners) should be within 30±90% of
5.1 Information and Documentation 37
the shot capacity of the machine. The shot capacity of a machine is given in
g/shot of PS, with a speci®c gravity of about 1.05. The speci®c gravity of
materials such as PE and PP is less (about 0.90 to 0.95); that is, the same mass
will have a greater volume. Since shot size is rated in grams (or ounces) but is
actually a volume (cross section of extruder barrel times the stroke of the
extruder), the shot size of these materials will be less than for PS, by about 10%.
These are only approximate ®gures; exact values should be checked with
materials suppliers. What are the practical implications? If, for example, an
8-cavity mold is required to run in a speci®c machine, but its shot capacity is not
large enough, it would not make sense to build it for this machine. This is
especially important with cold runner molds, where the mass of the runner can
add considerably to the mass of the sum of all molded parts, per shot. A machine
could be well suited for a hot runner mold but be unsuited for a cold runner
mold for the same number of cavities. (This is a major advantage of the hot
runner system.)
(2) Plasticizing capacity (kilograms per hour). Plasticizing capacity is the
amount (mass) of plastic a machine can plasticize per hour, that is, melt the cold
plastic pellets into a melt of a speci®c temperature (and viscosity). Plasticizing
capacity is usually given as mass for PS, in kilograms (pounds) per hour. Here,
the same applies as with shot capacity. The actual mass of other materials, such
as PE, PP, or any other, will be different, mostly smaller, sometimes greater. This
should be carefully considered before starting. But, ®rst, the designer must
estimate the molding cycle, to ®nd out how much plastic per hour will be
required. Dividing 3600 (1 hour equals 3600 seconds) by the number of the
seconds of the estimated cycle will give the number of shots per hour (N).
Multiplying the total shot weight S (g/shot) calculated in (1) above, with the
number of shots N per hour we ®nd the total mass W
t
in grams per hour required
(W
t
ˆ S  N). For best quality of the melt (and the molded piece), it is also
suggested to use only between 30 and 90% of the rated plasticizing capacity. If
W
t
is more than the rated capacity, the machine can still be used but the cycle
time will have to be lengthened; in other words, fewer shots per hour can be
produced than the mold could yield with a suitable, larger size machine.
(3) Injection speed (grams injected into the mold per second). This is an
important consideration when molding thin-walled products. Because of the
narrow gap through which the plastic must ¯ow within the cavity space, the
injected plastic will cool rapidly when in contact with the cooled cavity and core
walls. As the plastic cools, the gap narrows even more, making it more dif®cult
to ®ll the mold. To overcome this condition, the melt and/or the mold
temperatures could be increased so that the plastic will not freeze before ®lling
the mold. However, this increase in temperature will also cause an increase in
38 Before Starting to Design a Mold
the cooling cycle (and a lengthening of the molding cycle), resulting in a smaller
output from the mold. This points to two areas for possible remedy: (1) The
injection speed and (2) the injection pressure must be increased. But these two
are interrelated. The higher the pressure, the faster the melt will be pushed
through its paths, from the machine nozzle to the farthest corners of the cavity
space. The problem is now that the injection speed depends on the speed with
which the hydraulic injection cylinder is ®lled with pressure oil. Therefore, the
speed of the injection cylinder depends on the hydraulic pump outputÐoil
volume per secondÐentering the cylinder, but it also depends on the size of the
associated hardwareÐhoses, valves, and so onÐfrom the pump to the cylinder.
Most machines for conventional (not thin-wall) products are served
suf®ciently well by the output of the pump (and the motor driving it). However,
the injection speeds required for thin-wall production require the cylinder to be
®lled more rapidly than what the pump alone can provide. To remedy this, the
machine could be equipped with a much larger pump and motor, but in many
cases this would be uneconomical or impractical. The preferred solution is to
provide the machine injection system with an accumulator, which stores high-
pressure oil during the time pressure oil is not used. Additional valving and
other hardware is required, which is often sold as an ``option'' with the machine,
called an accumulator package. The accumulator releases the stored high-
pressure oil together with the pump output into the cylinder when required for
injection. The designer will need to recognize when an accumulator package is
necessary for the product for which the mold is to be designed, and must discuss
this with the molder to make sure the right machine is available to run the mold.
5.1.6.3 Additional Requirements for Some Molds
(1) Pressure air. Some molds require air pressure for their operation. In
general, the designer should be aware that compressed air, especially in large
volumes, can be very expensive, especially if it is left to blow for any length of
time.
Blow downs (air jets or air curtains) are often used to assist the products
to rapidly clear the molding area. There are several commercial air jets
on the market with low consumption of pressure air. Their initial cost is
paid back rapidly by savings from wasted air volume.
Air-operated actuators. The air volume used is usually small, compared
with a blow down. There could be problems with controlling the speed
5.1 Information and Documentation 39
and uniform motion of air actuators, but they are simple and
inexpensive.
Air required for air ejection, which is usually activated on demand, for a
very short time. Most of the time, the actuation time is controlled from
the machine control panel. The designer must make sure that the
intended machine is equipped with suf®cient controls and hardware
(timers, valves, and large enough supply lines). It may be even necessary
to add pump capacity, for the added volume of air that will be required
for the planned mold. If much air is needed for short blasts, one or
several suitable accumulators could be installed near or even on the
mold. This is similar to the hydraulic accumulators cited in Section
5.1.6.2 (3).
Where pressure air comes into contact with the molded products, for
example, in blow downs or in air ejection, the air must be ®ltered from any oil
residues, water (always present in air lines), and so on, before reaching the
outlets in or at the mold, to prevent contamination of the products if they are
used for food or pharmaceutical purposes. (Unfortunately, most air actuators
require lubricated air, unless their seals are selected for dry air.) A low-pressure,
high-volume blower with its air intake from the shop environment, or better yet,
from within an enclosure built around the molding machine when special ``clean
room'' requirements are speci®ed, is a preferred solution to ensure that there is
no oil or water contamination in the air as it comes into contact with the plastic
products. In many cases, such blower can be directly mounted on the top of the
mold. Another advantage is that the power consumption of this type blower is
low, on the order of 0.2 kW (1/4 hp) or less, and does not require timing or
valving.
(2) Auxiliary hydraulic supply. For some operations, compressed air may be
not suitable. (a) Air cylinders are often jerky in their operation, especially with
long strokes. (b) In cases where several air cylinders actuate one large mold
member, the forces can be uneven and the member can jam. (c) In most molding
shops the compressed air pressure is fairly low, usually about 600 kPa (80 psi),
and rarely 900 kPa (120 psi), so large air actuators are needed to produce large
forces. It could be dif®cult to accommodate suf®ciently large cylinders within
the available mold space, or even outside the mold. In all these cases, the much
more powerful hydraulic cylinders would be an alternative. The hydraulic
pressure could be taken from the machine system with a pressure reducing
valve, and by providing the necessary safety measures to protect against the very
high pressures in that system. A preferred method, however, is to use an
auxiliary power supply, usually at a system pressure of about 3,500 kPa
40 Before Starting to Design a Mold
(500 psi). This is much safer and requires much less expensive hardware (valves,
hoses, etc.) than that for higher pressure. The motion of hydraulic operators is
smooth and the speed can be well controlled.
Two points of caution, though. Hydraulic oil (with some special, expensive,
exceptions) is highly ¯ammable and there is always the danger of leaks,
especially if the leaks were to occur near heated areas of the mold, as, for
example, near a hot runner system. Also, products used in the food or
pharmaceutical industry could be contaminated by the oil; this is usually
speci®ed as not allowed.
(3) Cooling water supply. This is a very important area of concern. There is
not much sense in designing the mold with very sophisticated cooling circuitry
if the cooling water supply is insuf®cient in temperature, volume, and pressure.
An individual chiller unit may be the answer if the plant supply is too small or
has not enough pressure. It is also important that the coolant is clean, that is,
with a minimum of minerals or dirt, and is not corrosive. Dirty coolant could
gradually plug the water circuits or coat the channel walls with a poor heat
conducting layer of dirt and lime, thus reducing the cooling ef®ciency, and could
require frequent cleaning of the coolant channels if the mold is expected to
maintain high productivity. Corrosive action of the coolant could attack and eat
away the mold steels; rust creates insulating layers similar to lime and dirt
deposits. It is always good policy for the designer to check with the molder to
ensure that there are no such problems with the water supply, and to specify that
only clean, noncorrosive coolant is used with the mold. See ME, Chapter 13.
(4) Electric power and controls. The electric power supply in North
America and in most developed countries is usually suf®ciently stable and
uninterrupted, except during natural catastrophes, and of not much concern to
the designer. This is not the case in developing countries, where power
interruptions occur frequently; the effects of such interruptions on the operation
of a mold may cause concern. Typically, in the case of a power failure, a
machine using a cold runner mold will just stop, but can resume work as soon as
the plastic is again up to molding temperature. However, in a hot runner mold
the melt will freeze in the manifold and nozzles and it may take much more time
to restart (in small molds between 15 and 30 minutes). The expected savings
through using a hot-runner mold may become an illusion. The controls
(breakers, heat controllers) available to operate a mold on a speci®c machine
must be discussed with the molder when designing a mold that will require
additional heat controls; typically, such controls are required for hot runner
molds. For safety reasons, heaters in molds are rated at 230 VAC or less, and the
power consumption may be from as low as 40 W per heater, such as in some
nozzle heaters, and up to several thousand watts in hot runner manifold heaters.
5.1 Information and Documentation 41
Since heaters are often bundled in parallel and operated by designated controls,
it is important to ensure that adequately sized circuit breakers and so on are
available; some can be controlled with time-percentage controllers or variable
(voltage) transformers, whereas some will need thermocouples and heat
controllers.
5.2 Start of Mold Design
Now that all our preliminaries are clear, the designer must decide what kind of
mold should be designed. With the expected production in mind, the most
suitable, that is, the most economical mold for the job must be selected. As was
already stated earlier, a very expensive mold intended for high productivity will
not necessarily be the best choice. The designer must always ®nd the most cost-
effective mold, that is, the mold that will result in the lowest cost of the product.
5.2.1 Mold Shoes
A mold shoe (sometimes also called ``chase'') is the total of all mold plates
making up the mold, including screws and alignment features, but not including
the stack, which is the arrangement of all mold parts that touch the injected
plastic, typically, the cavities, cores, any inserts in either of them, ejectors,
strippers, side cores, and so on. In simple molds (not necessarily low-production
molds) the cavities and cores can be machined right into the mold plates. A
decision on which way to proceed with the mold shoe should be made only after
the product drawing is carefully studied, and never losing sight of the expected
productivity of the mold. There are several choices for the designer.
5.2.1.1 No Mold Shoe Used
The mold may consist of only one plate for the cavity and another plate for the
core, with both cavity and core machined right into these plates. Ejection is
facilitated by air valves built directly into the core plate. The entire mold, then,
consists essentially of only two parts, plus alignment features and air valves.
Cooling channels are built right into the plates.
42 Before Starting to Design a Mold
5.2.1.2 Standard Mold Shoes
Mold shoes can be bought from mold maker supply houses (DME, Hasko, etc.)
from a large selection of standard sizes, with or without leader pin alignment,
and with or without ejector plates. All plates are machined and ground square,
and are ready for adding the required mold features. Many mold shops prefer to
buy these ready-made mold parts, and rather specialize in the making of the
stacks and doing the ®nal mold assembly. These plates are usually available in
several qualities of steel:
(1) The ®rst type is an inexpensive, ``mild steel,'' which is soft, with low
strength, and little wear resistance. It is suitable only where the expected forces
and wear in the mold are small enough that the steel will not be damaged, for
example, by the clamping pressure on a too small P/L, or by the hobbing effect,
which is the pushing of a supported small insert into a mild steel backing. Also,
since mild steels have a low tensile (and compressive) strength, they may
permanently deform if loaded beyond their yield point.
(2) Another common steel supplied is a type of ``machinery steel,'' typically
a steel called P20 or P20PQ (plastic mold quality). It is treated to a Rockwell
hardness of approximately Rc 30±35; P20PQ is produced especially clean, that
is without dirt enclosures, which could be detrimental if they appear on a
molding surface. These plates are more expensive but cost much less than so-
called mold steels; they are very suitable for cutting the cavity or core right into
the plates. This is of special advantage for large products where the cost of mold
steel would be very high. Mold steel is always supplied very soft (about the same
as mild steel), for easy machining; it must be hardened and ground after
machining, which represents an additional, considerable expense. In high-
quality molds, the stack parts are usually made from steels such as P20PQ for
large products, and from mold steels for smaller products.
(3) In high-quality molds, also, both the mold shoe and the stack parts are
made from stainless steels (SS). The larger mold parts are then machined from
prehardened steel, and smaller parts from SS mold steels. This is helpful in
humid climates to prevent rusting of the mold shoe, or where the plastic is
corrosive and could attack the stack parts. The higher material cost can often be
justi®ed with savings in mold maintenance. Note that for corrosive plastics (e.g.,
PVC) the stack parts made from regular mold steels must be chrome plated,
which is expensive and requires additional maintenance. Mild steel plates and
P20 plates can be protected against rust by a relatively low-cost electroless
nickel coating, or by just oiling well after use, before storing the mold. (More
about mold steels in Chapter 9.)
5.2 Start of Mold Design 43
5.2.1.3 Home-Made Mold Shoes
The mold shoes can be made in-house from raw steel plates, which the mold
maker can buy from the steel mills or dealers. The mold maker may keep certain
plate sizes and thicknesses in stock, and cut and machine them to size as needed.
This requires much plant space, heavy lifting and storage equipment, and
accurate milling and grinding machines. It is an economic decision that may be
different from shop to shopÐwhether to make the plates or buy them as
standard plates or as complete mold shoes. In any case, the same choices of steel
apply. Note that often, such in-house made mold shoes or plates are built to the
dimensions listed as standard parts by the hardware suppliers.
5.2.1.4 Special Mold Shoes
This applies mostly to special molds for which no suitable standard sizes are
commercially available, and to very high production molds, where the mold
shoe is built around the stacks, and optimum layouts are used for all mold
features, rather than the stacks being ®t into the space available in standard
molds. Some mold makers specializing in certain areas (preform molds,
unscrewing molds, etc.) create their own mold shoe standards. In high-
production molds, the mold shoe too is usually made from prehardened steel.
Also, often prehardened stainless steel is used for such molds.
5.2.1.5 Universal Mold Shoes
For low production and relatively small products, a universal mold shoe offers
another solution for making a relatively low-cost mold. Universal mold shoes
are essentially standard size chases that are constructed so that different stacks
can be easily mounted into them. The mold maker concentrates on making the
stacks, in sizes and to rules speci®ed by the maker of these universal mold
shoes. Mold features such as runners, cooling, and ejection are usually not as
ef®cient as in a mold speci®cally designed for a product, and the mold will not
cycle as fast; but, for the small quantities required this is no problem, and the
mold is much less expensive than a complete mold. This makes a lot of sense,
especially if a large number of such ``inserts'' are used or foreseen.
44 Before Starting to Design a Mold
5.2.1.6 Mold Hardware
Hardware items include leader pins, bushings, ejector pins and sleeves, screws,
and many other mold parts that are required for the mold. They are all listed in
catalogues issued by the various mold maker supply houses; they are mass
produced, using high-quality materials, and machined to very close tolerances. It
is always more economical to buy these parts rather than to attempt to make
them in-house. Also, a good mold designer will never modify these products,
with only one exception: the cutting to length of the ejector pins and sleeves. A
diameter should never be modi®ed; a way can always be found to make the
design use a standard size diameter. Also, screws used in molds must never be
modi®ed, not even their length; there is always a way to make the design use a
standard size, often by just changing the depth of a counter bore for the screw
head. Any modi®cation of a screw will reduce its strength; a modi®ed screw is
also dif®cult to replace in the ®eld. Because screws should be tightened to about
60±70% of their yield strength, in good maintenance procedures all screws
should be replaced every time the mold undergoes a major overhaul.
5.2.2 Mold Drawings
5.2.2.1 Assembly and Detail Drawings
The purpose of the assembly drawing (including the Bill of Materials discussed
later) is to convey the intentions of the designer to the people involved in
purchasing hardware and materials, assembling the mold, and, ®nally, operating
the mold. The assembly drawing of the mold must contain all pertinent
information, given in plan and section views and in notes, which are used to
explain where the drawings alone could be ambivalent or misinterpreted. Once
the assembly drawing is ®nished, there must be no doubt left about how the
mold is to be built and operated. Today, most mold makers depend on
machinists specialized in their trade, such as lathe, milling machine, EDM, or
other machine tool operators. These machinists need detail drawings, complete
with tolerances and, if deemed necessary, other instructions such as hardness,
plating, and ®nishing. These detail drawings are prepared from the assembly
drawings.
5.2 Start of Mold Design 45
5.2.2.2 How Many Drawings and Views?
This question is frequently asked. The answer is simple: enough to make sure
that there is no possible misreading of a drawing. Too few views (or sections)
means that in the best case, the machinist will interrupt his work to come and
ask for explanations, which costs in lost time. In the worst case, the machinist
will not ask, but will proceed in the wrong direction. This could become very
expensive if an incorrectly made piece is not discovered until it reaches
assembly, and then has to be remade, or it could cause major interruptions until a
solution is found to use and repair the wrong part. Sometimes other mold parts
have to be altered to make it possible to use an incorrectly made but expensive
part. On the other hand, too many, often unnecessary views make more work for
the detailer and can be confusing for the user of the drawings.
5.2.2.3 Arrangement of Views
Most molds are laid out by starting from a (signi®cant) cross section and then
drawing to the right of it (as the mold would be when mounted in the molding
machine) a view into the cavity half of the mold, that is, into the injection side
(see Fig. 5.1). The assembly drawing should show above this view words such as
``Plan view into cavities.''
On the left side of the section view, the core half is shown, as if looking into
the direction of the core and the moving platen. The assembly drawing should
Figure 5.1 Arrangement of mold drawing layout: (a) cavity (plate), (b) core (plate),
(c) parallels, (d) ejector plate, (e) mounting plate, (f) ejector retainer plate, (g) stop button,
(h) ejector pin, (i) sprue bushing, (j) locating ring, (m) leader pin, (n) leader pin bushing.
46 Before Starting to Design a Mold
show above this view words such as ``Plan view into cores.'' The plan view
drawings are made so that we see the parting line (plane) as visible, and all
plates and mold features behind it as invisible lines. Additional full or partial
cross sections and/or plan views should be added (usually on separate sheets)
only when they can add information to the views already shown. Remember, the
designer is in the business of designing molds, not making pretty pictures.
However, the drawing must always be drawn to scale, so that the various parts
can be seen in proper proportion. ``To scale'' in this context means to draw to a
selected, set ratio, preferably ``to size'' (1 : 1), or if this is not practical, in case of
large products, smaller, often 1 : 2, or even 1 : 5, or larger, often 2 : 1, 5 : 1 or
10 : 1.
5.2.2.4 Notes on Drawings
Whenever it is impossible or cumbersome to specify some important
information by using standard drawing techniques, a note should be added to
express in concise but clear words what is intended. The note should be short,
but not so short that it could be open to misinterpretation. Also, the drawing
should not be cluttered with too many notes, and must show clearly what the
notes apply to.
5.2.2.5 Additional Information on the Drawings
For more complicated molds, it is good practice to show also, on another sheet if
necessary, separate schematic views of (1) all coolant circuits, (2) any air and
hydraulic circuits, (3) any special electric circuits, and (4) a sequence of
operation of the various mold functions, for example, at what point in the cycle
ejection starts, and when air should be activated. This can have legal
implications: complete and correct information will protect the designer from
any possible future litigation, in case of an accident caused by the mold not
being installed and operated as recommended by the designer. Note that the
drawings are part of the job and must be shipped to the customer together with
the mold.
5.2 Start of Mold Design 47
5.2.3 The Stack Layout
By now, the designer will probably have decided what type of mold should be
built, guided by the possibilities discussed in Section 5.2.1. This does not
necessarily mean that the designer is bound by this early decision. It may
become necessary to reconsider as the design progresses. The designer must
always keep an open mind and be ready to scrap an earlier idea for a better one.
The more time spent on thinking and rethinking the problems at this time, the
more successful will be the ®nal result; this will save time and money in the long
run.
5.2.3.1 Signi®cant Cross Section
Which type of mold shoe will be ®nally selected for the job is, at this point, of
secondary importance. The designer must now start with showing, to scale, a
signi®cant cross section of the product. This means the section that shows all the
areas that must be considered when designing the stack. (If more than one
signi®cant feature cannot be shown in the main cross section, additionalÐor
partialÐsections may have to be shown.)
The cross sections will now be examined and a number of questions will
have to be asked, step by step.
5.2.3.2 Will the Product Slide (Pull) out of the Cavity?
This point should be investigated ®rst, because it will determine the complexity
of the cavity.
(1) In the case of a simple, cup-shaped product, there is usually no
problem.
(2) Holes (cutouts) or projections in the side wall of the product may
require special attention: will it be necessary to provide side cores? If
side cores, should there be one for each hole or one for a group of holes
or projections? Should the cavity have a complete side wall moving? In
the case of beverage crates, all four walls may have to move, which will
create four vertical split (parting) lines. All this will considerably
48 Before Starting to Design a Mold
increase the complexity of the mold and increase the space required for
each cavity and for the stack in general.
(3) Are there other projections in the side wall of the product? If they are
deep, they will probably be considered like holes. If they are shallow
(for example, engraved printing or ornamentation), it will depend on
the draft angle of the side wall and the plastic injected. In some cases,
typically with draft angles over 5

, shallow engraving could pull out of
the cavity, provided there are features (such as undercuts) on the core to
ensure that there is enough force on the molded piece to pull it out of
the cavity. Cases like this should be discussed with the designer of the
product for which the mold will be built. There may be a good chance
that the product design could be slightly changed such that side cores
are not necessary at all, thereby saving considerable expense.
(4) Other possibilities can be considered, especially for large openings in
the side walls, as, for example, the large cutouts in the sides of a
typical, large laundry basket, where the cavity and the core can meet at
an angle and produce additional, small parting lines, but not require
side cores or split cavities.
(5) The most common case is where the cavities split into two halves,
creating two vertical split lines.
(6) There may not always be enough space for the long side motions
required for two splits, and the cavity will split into four sections; this
is common with pail molds where four moving side cores are wedged
within the cavity block walls to contain the outward forces of the side
cores. Note that in all cases where side cores are used, they must be
preloaded and backed up against the forces generated by the injection
pressure.
5.2.3.3 Will the Product Eject Easily from the Core?
Are there any raised portions inside the product that would be molded in severe
undercuts in the core and prevent the product from being ejected easily?
(1) Snap (Fig. 5.2). A frequently used undercut is a snap feature, which is a
(usually circular) rim inside the product, shaped to snap over a similar extension
in a matching product, for example, the lid over a can. Provided the shape of the
snap rim (its cross sectionÐtapered and/or rounded suf®cientlyÐand the total
circumferential length) is suitably designed for ejection, there is no problem, and
a stripper ring will easily eject the product by forcing the rim to expand while
5.2 Start of Mold Design 49
ejecting (``stripping''). Stripping with ejector pins, located at some strategic
points, may also be used for stripping, in nonround products. To make the snap
ring easier to stretch and to come off the core without breaking, it can sometimes
be broken down into several sections, so that there will be, for example, four
sections, each covering about 60±70

of the circumference, instead of covering
the whole 360

. Of course, customer's approval must be secured before making
such a change. Note that this is more dif®cult to machine.
(2) Internal threads. If the threads are designed suitable for stripping, they
can be stripped from the core like the snap rim described above. It is better if
there is not more than one complete thread (360

). Multiple threads may cause
damage to the molded thread projections as they are dragged over the
depressions for the successive threads in the core during ejection. (In many
cases, one thread may be strong enough for its intended purpose.) It must also be
understood that there is a relationship between the amount the plastic that is
stretched radially and circumferentially. For a certain cross section of the snap
rim or thread, and if the product is small, there may not be enough length in the
circumference to stretch, and the product will tear.
(3) Unscrewing. In some cases, the product must be unscrewed from the
core, which means a much more complicated (and expensive) mold. There are
several moldmakers specializing in unscrewing molds, using standard design
mold shoes and stacks, thereby reducing the cost of such molds.
(4) Undercuts. Undercuts are used to hold the product on the core, to ensure
proper ejection, especially in cases where the product is designed so that it could
stay in the cavity while the mold opens, often held by the vacuum between
product and cavity wall. With many products, there are enough ``vertical''
surfaces in the core, such as slots for ribs, or specially shaped slots and holes as
often required in technical products, to hold the product on the core side; the
same is true for cup-shaped products with little side draft, where the product will
tend to shrink tightly onto the core. If this is not enough to hold the product on
the core, judiciously designed and placed undercuts should be speci®ed at the
time of designing; do not leave it to the molder to add undercuts after the mold
is in operation and causes ejection problems. The proper location for these
Figure 5.2 (Left) Section through a cap with snap; (Right) example of 4-section snap.
50 Before Starting to Design a Mold
undercuts (which are usually not speci®ed by the product designer) is (a) near
ejectors, or (b) preferably, especially with hot runner molds, near the tip of the
core where the undercuts are more effective because the bottom of the product is
stiffer.
(5) Two-stage ejection. Two-stage ejection (Fig. 5.3) may be a solution for
some, somewhat larger undercuts inside the core. (See ME, Chapter 12) This a
more expensive design of the core and the ejection mechanism, but it is
frequently used in products that require a snap design inside the product. It is
often used for overcaps for spray bottles that are produced in really large
quantities. The cooling is less ef®cient, but it is a well-accepted and reliable
design.
(6) Deep projection inside the product. This feature often requires very
complicated core design, possibly with moving, retractable core sections, or
``collapsible cores.'' Both systems are expensive, dif®cult to build, and hard to
maintain in operation; they are also usually dif®cult to cool adequately, and thus
run much slower than a comparable mold without these features. (See ME,
Chapter 12)
5.2.3.4 Establishing the Parting Line
(1) Primary parting line. Before proceeding, the location of the dividing
plane (parting line, P/L) between cavity and core must be decided. In cup-
shaped products, this is usually simple: it is at the widest portion of the product.
As stated earlier, a straight P/L is easiest to produce, preferably, but not
necessarily, at right angles to the direction of the mold opening, that is, the axis
Figure 5.3 Schematic of 2-stage ejection: (a) core, (b) sleeve, (c) stripper ring. During
ejection, ®rst (1) and (2) move together so that the core can slide out, then the stripper
moves up to push the product off the sleeve while the projection on the inner sleeve
moves inwards, as shown by the small arrows.
5.2 Start of Mold Design 51
of the mold. An offset (or stepped) P/L is sometimes required, due to the shape
of the rim. It is also, occasionally, used for molding a large projection, for
example, a simple handle of a mug, on the outside of the product; such an offset
P/L is preferable to a side core, which would be much more expensive to build
(see Fig. 5.4).
(2) Split cavities or side cores. At this time the designer must also determine
if the cavity needs to be split and where the split lines will be located, or if side
cores will be required. Usually, but not always, the split lines are parallel to the
axis of the mold, and side cores at right angles to it. Both split cavities and side
cores need backing up and preload against the forces created by the injection
pressure, and some method of operating mechanism, which will also require
space in the mold. Operating mechanisms can be angle pins (horn pins), or
rollers in tracks, both of which translate the opening motion of the mold into
sideways motion; they could also be timed, hydraulic actuators independent of
Figure 5.4 Schematic of mug with handle, showing offset parting line: (a) cavity,
(b) core.
Figure 5.5 Example of a louver mold: (a) cavity, (b) core, (c) round core pin, (d) side
core, (e) core pin with shaped tip.
52 Before Starting to Design a Mold
the clamp motion. The designer should also consider if a better mold layout
could be achieved by turning the product slightly, to achieve with a straight
(up-and-down) mold what would otherwise require side cores (see Fig 5.5).
In some cases, rotating the product 90

could also result in a better mold, as
shown schematically in Fig. 5.6. The right schematic shows the normally
expected mold layout, with the center line of the product parallel to the mold
axis. Because of the outside shape (e.g., deep engravings or projections) the
cavity will have to be split; the projected area (at right angles to the axis) of the
product is very small compared to the projected area of the sides of the product.
Therefore, the side cores will see considerably larger forces Fs at right angles to
the mold axis. These forces must be adequately backed up and preload provided
to prevent the splits from cracking open during injection. (See also Section 5.3.)
These backups, especially for large splits, can result in a very bulky mold.
But by turning the product by 90

(left schematic, in Fig. 5.6) the primary P/L
replaces the split line, and the cavity and core halves are clamped by the
machine clamping force Fc. The core must now be withdrawn sideways; it will
have a much smaller area exposed to the injection pressure and will need much
less backing-up force, but the stroke of such side cores will probably be much
greater than the stroke of the split cavities. This could be an undesirable feature,
but is often preferred to the alternative of split cavities. Only by laying out to
scale these alternatives, at this time of the design process, will the designer be
able to determine which is better for the contemplated mold and how to proceed.
Note that in the position shown in Fig. 5.6, the open end of the product is on top
and the product is ejected downward from the (side) core and can fall
unhindered. If the core has suf®cient draft, air pressure alone could be suf®cient
to eject the product from the core, which would make for a much simpler mold.
Figure 5.6 Illustration of a product and two possibilities of mold layout: (a) cavity,
(b) splits, (c) core, (d) core backing plate, (e) product, (Fc) clamp force, (Fs) force on
splits.
5.2 Start of Mold Design 53
5.2.3.5 Is the Cavity Balanced?
Figure 5.7 shows the elements present in every cavity shape. Within (A), the
cavity pressures are balanced; in (B) and (C), the cavity is imbalanced. It does
not matter if the side walls are at right angles to the internal pressure. There is
always a component of the pressure that will press in the direction at right angles
to the mold axis. As can be seen in Fig. 5.8, on the left, the pressures inside the
cavity push to the left and the right by the same amount, and there will be no
force to move the core relative to the cavity. The cavity is therefore balanced.
In the drawing on the right, the pressure p within the cavity tries to separate
the cavity and the core by pushing the cavity to the left and the core to the right,
as indicated with heavy arrows. This must be taken into account when designing
a mold with imbalance in the cavities. The force trying to separate cavity and
core can be balanced by placing a second, similar stack near the ®rst one so that
the forces are pushing in opposite directions. Failing this, there could be one pair
of wedges (similar to a wedge lock) located so that the imbalance is taken up
there. If this is not done, the forces of the imbalance will have to be taken up by
the leader pins and bushings, which may not be strong enough in some cases,
and wear rapidly.
5.2.3.6 Determining the Method of Cavity Construction
(1) Cavity and/or core are cut right into the mold plates. This would make
the simplest mold. Some molds have only one or a few cavities cut into the mold
Figure 5.7 Schematic of cross section of (A) cup-shaped product; (B), (C) open-sided
product.
Figure 5.8 Schematic illustration of (left) a balanced and (right) an imbalanced mold:
(a) cavity, (b) core, (p) internal injection pressure.
54 Before Starting to Design a Mold
plate, but the cores are usually separate from and mounted in or on the core
plate. For practical reasons, one-piece cavity and core plates are often selected
for single-cavity molds, mainly for very large products, but there have been
molds like this built for smaller products, with more cavities. The problem is to
provide the necessary accuracy of machining, especially in the absence of
suf®ciently large, accurate machine tools. The mold could consist of fewer parts,
and if there are no foreseeable problems with ejection, cooling, and mold life, it
is a good method, especially for very large molds. The mold steel selected
should be of ``mold quality,'' prehardened; a typical mold steel is P20PQ, or
stainless steel, prehardened. Such cavities and cores may still require inserts
(usually pins) whenever small holes and so on in the product would require
delicate projections in the molding surface. To machine such projections from
the solid steel, while possible, would be very costly to repair if they should be
damaged.
(2) Composite cavities and cores. Individual, solid cavities are cut from
mold steel, with inserts as needed; this is the most common design. These
cavities are then either mounted on top of the cavity plate or inserted into it.
Cavities can also consist of an assembly of separate pieces, arranged to form the
cavity assembly. If the outside of such an assembly is a (not necessarily round,
but suf®ciently strong) ring (or ``chase'') into which the inserts are placed, this
assembled cavity can be treated as a solid cavity and mounted on top of the
cavity plate or be inserted into it. In some cases, the inserts are directly placed
inside the cavity plate, without the need for a surrounding ring. Note that the
forces from the injection pressure on the sides of the cavities are considerable,
especially if the projected area at right angles to the mold axis is large, that is,
where the product is deep. These forces will tend to loosen the inserts and can
create gaps between them or between inserts and cavity plate, where plastic can
¯ash into. Properly designed, such inserts must be pressed into their chase (or
into the mold plate) to create a preload larger than the expected side forces.
5.2.3.7 Determining the Total Area of the Stack
The total area of the stack is the total of the space of the cavity (including the
ring discussed above, which may also include cooling channels) plus the area
(space) of any added features that may be required, such as side core
components outside the cavity or core, plus space for their motion, actuation,
and the backup. It can be seen that this total space can be much larger than the
cavity by itself, and will determine the size of the mold and affect the cavity
5.2 Start of Mold Design 55
layout. It is easily understood that a mold without side cores requires much less
space, and a much smaller layout, for the same number of cavities.
5.2.3.8 Determining the Core Construction
Cores may require quite a number of inserts and even moving parts; the
injection pressure is usually of little concern (except in some special cases)
because this pressure tends to compress the core from all directions rather than
expand it as it does the cavity, and is resisted by the compressive strength of the
core material. There is one serious problem, thoughÐthe ``core shift,''
especially with long slender cores, when the ¯ow and the pressure of the
inrushing plastic can de¯ect a core, resulting in uneven wall thicknesses around
the core. This is mostly of concern with thin-walled products, which require
higher injection pressures, and where uneven wall thicknesses can create
differential pressures on opposing sides of a core, thereby creating forces that
de¯ect (bend) the core during injection. Such de¯ected cores return to their
original shape as soon as the product is ejected, but by that time it already has
uneven walls. Problems like this can sometimes be solved by supporting the tip
of the core in a matching hole in the cavity when the mold is closed or by some
other, often patented methods. Core shift can also be affected by the location of
the gate; multiple gates are sometimes a solution. (See ME, Chapter 10.)
Cores are usually mounted on top of the core plate, either solidly (the most
common method) or ¯oating, which is better, but more expensive; they are
rarely inserted into the core plate.
5.2.4 Selection of a Suitable Runner System
We must now consider how the plastic will be channeled from the machine
nozzle to the cavity space. This could have been speci®ed with the job order,
but, nevertheless, we should understand the various systems and where they are
most appropriate.
5.2.4.1 Cold Runner, Single-Cavity Molds
The arrangement, as shown in Fig. 5.9, is simple, effective, and good for very
large products, but is also often used for smaller ones. The disadvantage is that
the gate is large and must be cut or even machined if appearance is important.
56 Before Starting to Design a Mold
5.2.4.2 Cold Runner, 2-Plate Molds
The mold on the left in Fig. 5.10 has only one P/L. An edge-gated arrangement
is shown. The products and the runners stay together when ejected and must be
separated after molding. There are other methods of gating, some of which are
self-degating as the mold opens, but products and runners are still mixed
together and require separation. More about gates in ME, Chapter 10.
The advantages of this system are (1) simplicity and (2) low cost. Also,
(3) color changes are easy, and (4) the system is not sensitive to dirt in the
plastic. If a gate is blocked, it is clean again after the runner is ejected.
The disadvantages are (1) these molds usually have longer molding cycles
because of the longer time required to cool the often large runners. (2) The mass
Figure 5.10 Schematic illustrations of (left) a 2-plate mold, (center) a 3-plate mold,
and (right) a hot-runner mold: (a) cavity plate, (b) core plate, (c) third plate, (d) cold
runner, (e) hot runner, (f) hot runner manifold, (g) hot runner backing plate, (h) nozzle.
P/L, parting line.
Figure 5.9 Schematic of (large) single-cavity mold: (a) cavity, (b) core, (c) sprue,
(d) nozzle seat, (f) gate.
5.2 Start of Mold Design 57
of the runners must be added to the mass to be plasticized for the products,
therefore, energy is wasted, ®rst in plasticizing, then in cooling. In some cases,
the mass of the runners is as great as the mass of the products, or even greater.
(3) Although in many cases the runners can be reused, this requires more
handling (costs), energy is needed for regrinding, and there is always a danger of
contamination of the plastic. Also, losses of plastic (maybe 10% of the scrap) in
the course of this process are unavoidable. Even so, 2-plate molds are used in
the vast majority of multicavity molds.
5.2.4.3 Cold Runner, 3-Plate Molds
Three-plate molds are also cold runner molds, but the system is inherently self-
degating. The mold in the center of Fig. 5.10 has two P/Ls. As the clamp opens,
®rst, the cavity plate travels with the moving mold half; as soon as the cavity
plate has reached a limited distance the moving mold half (the cores, with the
products still on them) continues to move away from the cavity plate and the
products can be ejected, after P/L 1 is opened. At the moment when the product,
still on the cores, start pulling out of the cavity, the plastic in the gates is severed.
Then, by some more or less complicated mechanism, P/L 2 separates and
permits the ejection of the runner system in a separate plane.
Advantages: (1) The products can be center gated, or gated anywhere on the
top surface. (2) Due to the absence of runners in the P/L, the cavities can be
closer together and more cavities can be placed in a mold of comparable size;
see the difference between left and center (or right) illustrations in Fig. 5.10.
(3) The gate vestige is usually very small, with excellent appearance. (4) Color
changes are easy. (5) The system is not sensitive to dirt in the plastic. If a gate is
blocked, it is clean again after the runner is ejected.
Disadvantages: (1) Three-plate molds are much more complicated and
expensive. (2) It is very dif®cult to guarantee 100% automatic ejection of the
runner system. There are numerous systems, with links, chains, air actuators,
and so on to provide the necessary motions. (3) With 3-plate molds, too, the
runner mass can be greater than the total mass of the products; the same
comments regarding productivity apply as for 2-plate molds.
This system is often used for very small products, such as screw caps,
overcaps, and so on, which should be center gated for best molding ¯ow, such as
in containers, and where the appearance of the top surface of the molded piece is
important.
58 Before Starting to Design a Mold
5.2.4.4 Hot Runner (HR) Molds
In the system on the right in Fig. 5.10, the plastic (melt) is kept hot, on its way
from the machine nozzle to the gate. Heaters in the sprue bushing, the HR
manifold, and (usually) the HR nozzles (which terminate at the gate) ensure that
the plastic stays at the required temperature. (Note that it is not the purpose of
the hot runner system to add to or regulate the melt temperature, but just to keep
it as it comes out of the machine nozzle.) When the mold stops operating, that is,
when the power is off, the plastic in the hot runner will freeze. To make the
plastic hot again to restart the mold in a reasonable time (15±30 minutes), the
heaters must be strong. But during operation of the mold, the heat requirements
are small, especially with a well-designed system with a minimum of heat losses
to the surrounding, cooled plates. Some molds, once ``on cycle,'' require no heat
at all or as little a 5% of the rated heater capacity of the hot runner system. The
main design problems in hot runner molds are the gate shape, the temperature
pro®le around the gate, and the materials selection.
(1) Open gates depend on their size and shape and on the operating pressure
and temperature of the plastic. At the end of the injection stroke, the gate must
freeze suf®ciently to stop the plastic from drooling into the cavity while the
mold is open for ejection of the products. When the mold recloses, the injection
pressure must push the frozen ``plug'' of plastic out of the gate into the cavity
space and thereby permit the plastic to ¯ow again.
(2) Valved gates are closed and opened by mechanical (or electrical) means,
as timed. This requires more mechanisms and controls, thus adding to the mold
cost. The size of the gates can be much larger than with open gates, which, in
some cases, can be very important for the ®lling of the cavity spaces; it also
reduces the sensitivity to dirt, because dirt can more easily pass through a large
opening. Larger gates are also of advantage for materials that are sensitive to
high stresses.
Advantages of hot runner molds: (1) The cavity spacing can be similar to a
3-plate mold, that is, closer, making good use of the available space. (2) The
mold output can be greater since all material that is plasticized is used to
produce products. (3) There is no need for regrinding, except for scrap during
start-up.
Disadvantages: (1) Higher mold cost (but not much different from a 3-plate
mold. (2) Dif®cult color changes. The plastic within the hot runner system must
be completely clean before a new color can be used. A measure of a good hot
runner system is the number of shots required to change from a darker color to a
lighter one. A good HR will do this in about 15 shots, after clean, new color is
5.2 Start of Mold Design 59
coming from the injection unit. (3) Very sensitive to dirt in the plastic. If there is
a gate blocked by dirt, the nozzles must be accessed for cleaning, which may
take anywhere from half an hour to a day; it may even be necessary to remove
the mold from the machine. A good mold design makes sure that this cleaning
can be easily performed while the mold is in the machine. (4) Cost of plastic.
The sensitivity to dirt also suggests that the molder should use virgin plastics
rather than regrinds, which are more likely to be contaminated. This will affect
the cost of the product. (5) With today's technology, there are still problems to
mold very small products, because of the long residence time of the plastic in
the runner system, which, if too long, causes the plastic to degrade.
5.2.4.5 Cold and Hot Runner Molds, in Combination
Combinations of hot and cold runner molds are usually selected for cases where
cold runner molds (edge or center gated) would have advantages over hot runner
molds. This is done sometimes for very small products, to avoid excessive
residence time in the HR system, or for very large products, to reduce the
pressure drop from machine nozzle to the gates, especially if the distances from
nozzle to gates are very large.
Two typical examples are shown in Fig. 5.11. Many such combinations are
possible.
(1) For multicavity molds (Fig. 5.11, left), the runner system could become
quite large. To prevent large pressure drops while avoiding unnecessary large
masses of plastic, the runner channels taper down from a heavy cross section
where the plastic enters the mold at the sprue, becoming gradually smaller every
Figure 5.11 Schematic of a 16-cavity mold: (Left) common cold runner mold; (Right)
combination hot and cold runner mold. (a) Cavity, (b) sprue, (c±f) cold runners, (g) hot
runner.
60 Before Starting to Design a Mold
time the runner splits, until it arrives at the gates (symbolized in Fig. 5.11 with
the line width of the runners). This will ensure that all cavities are ®lled properly.
However, the heavy runners are dif®cult to cool and add much to the plastic that
must be recycled; this is wasteful, as explained earlier.
Figure 5.11, right shows a simple, schematic example for a similar mold in
which the total runner system is divided into a (4-branch) hot runner system, and
each branch will then supply a cold runner system, 2-plate in this example.
The pressure drop in the hot runner channels is small, and the ®nal branches
of the cold runner can be kept as small as they would be with the common
runner layout shown on the left in Fig. 5.11.
(2) For very large products (Fig. 5.12) as found, for example, in the
automotive industry, the product should be edge gated. The edge gates are
located where best suited for the product, but instead of having a large cold
runner supply, these edge gates, a (usually nonstandard) hot runner manifold, or
other method of ducting the hot plastic will bring the plastic to the gates (or
group of gates), without signi®cant loss of pressure and without the need to
reprocess the heavy runners. Another advantage is that the product can be
placed approximately symmetrically around the center of the machine, for a
balanced clamp force. This is possible with standard 3-plate molds, but not with
2-plate molds because the machine nozzle is in the center of the platens.
(Exception: Special molding machines equipped with an offset extruder or one
that can be located outside the platen and injected in the side of the mold or even
into the P/L.)
Figure 5.12 Schematic of a large molding, with 6 cold runner edge gates and a hot
runner system with nozzles into each of the cold runners: (a) product, (b) sprue, (g) hot
runner branch, (h) hot runner nozzle, (i) gate, (j) cold runner.
5.2 Start of Mold Design 61
5.2.4.6 Insulated Runner Molds
Figure 5.13 (left) shows a mold similar to that in Fig. 5.9, but the sprue is an
insulated runner. The plastic within the runner will stay hot long enough that the
material injected during the next cycle will ``shoot through'' the still hot plastic,
even pushing the, by then, frozen gate out of the way, but only if the cycle is not
too long. Cycle times of up to 30 seconds can be successfully handled, and with
some materials even longer, before the plastic freezes. If the plastic freezes, the
cold ``plug'' is easily extracted after retracting the machine nozzle; as soon as
the machine nozzle is again in position, the next cycle can be started. This
method is simple, inexpensive, and reliable, and it is not sensitive to dirt. If some
dirt blocks the gate, it can be easily removed, as if the gate were frozen. The gate
can be very small but must be properly designed for shape and size.
Figure 5.13 (right) shows a mold similar to the schematics in Fig. 5.10 (right).
The hot runner is replaced with a much simpler insulated runner channel (e).
In this system, the plastic in the center of the runner remains hot, even though
the plastic close to the cooled walls will freeze; successive injected plastic will
be able to ¯ow through the hot core of the runner system without any added
heat. It works well at cycle times up to 15 seconds, and even longer, depending
on the plastic used. This system is very inexpensive, simple, and reliable, but the
start-up procedure is somewhat awkward and possibly dangerous if performed
by operators not skilled in this system; often several starts are needed before the
mold will run on cycle. If the runner freezes, the mold must be split open
between the cavity plate (a) and the backing plate (c); the, by now, frozen runner
must be removed; and the plates locked together again before restarting. Molds
with up to 16 cavities have been built and run successfully, but it is better to stay
Figure 5.13 Schematics of single and multiple insulated runner molds: (a) cavity,
(b) core, (c) backing plate, (d) nozzle seat, (e) insulated runner, (f) gate.
62 Before Starting to Design a Mold
with not more than 6 cavities. Color changes are very easy. Without ever
stopping the machine, by just changing to a new color in the extruder hopper,
after about 15 shots, pieces with the new color are produced. More about this in
IMT, p. 57.
5.2.4.7 Common Rules for Runner Systems
There are some basic rules to consider that apply to any and all runner systems.
Unfortunately, some of these requirements are contradictory, and in such cases
the best compromise must be found.
j Rule 1: Pressure drop. There should be a minimum pressure drop
between the machine nozzle and the cavity space, after the gate. This
affects selected runner lengths, runner cross sections, and gate size. The
longer the runners, the smaller the runner cross sections, and the smaller
the gates are, the higher will be the pressure drop; therefore, less pressure
is available to ®ll the cavities. This means that often the length and
thickness of runners must be increased, thereby increasing the inventory
(see rule 2) in the case of hot runner molds. This will increase the time
required for cooling the runners, in the case of cold runner systems,
because of the larger mass of the runners.
j Rule 2: Plastic inventory. In hot runners, there should be as small a
volume (inventory) of plastic as possible in the system between machine
nozzle and cavity. The larger the runners (less pressure drop, see rule 1),
the greater will be the inventory, and the longer the plastic will be
exposed to the heat in the hot runner manifold, which can degrade the
plastic within the runner system. The time for each temperature before the
plastic starts to degrade is different for each plastic and is shown in graphs
that can be obtained from plastics materials suppliers. Some plastics are
very heat sensitive; others are not. For most plastics, it is desirable to have
the inventory not larger than between 2 and 3 times the total mass of one
shot, so that the plastic within the manifold is continually replaced,
thereby reducing the length of exposure to heat. This is especially
important with slow cycles where the plastic resides for a long time in the
manifold; the same applies when molding very small products.
j Rule 3: Heat loss. There should be a minimum heat loss between
machine nozzle and cavity. Heat loss affects the melt temperature and
increases the viscosity of the plastic, making it harder to inject.
5.2 Start of Mold Design 63
j Rule 4: Cold runners only. The area around sprue and all runners should
be well cooled, for shortest molding cycles. In cold runner molds, poor
cooling of the runners (little heat loss of the melt) means longer cycles,
while waiting longer until the runners are cool (stiff) enough for ejection.
j Rule 5: Hot runner molds only. The hot runner system should be well
heat insulated from the surrounding plates. Some heat losses are
unavoidable because the hot runner manifold must be well supported
(against injection pressure) by its backing plate, and by the features
necessary to locate it within the mold. These necessary areas of contact
conduct heat away from the hot runner to the surrounding cooled plates.
Heat may have to be added through the hot runner manifold heaters to
make up any heat losses, thus increasing the electric power used. Also,
the heat loss into the surrounding plates can raise their temperature and
affect the mold alignment; good cooling is necessary for these plates.
j Rule 6: Balanced runners. In any runner system, the pressure drop
from the machine nozzle to each cavity space (gate) should be the same.
(See also rule 10.) Pressure differences from cavity to cavity will affect
the amount of plastic entering the gate before it freezes, the density of the
plastic in the cavity space, and thereby the strength and quality of the
molded piece. It will also result in differences in the surface de®nition,
and appearance of the product. It is not always possible to follow rule 6
completely, but every effort should be made to do so. In some cases,
individual adjustments to gate sizes may help to ensure more uniformity
of the products.
j Rule 7: Number of gates per cavity. Wherever possible, there should be
only one gate per cavity. There are exception to this rule: (1) where core
shift could be a serious problem, two or more gates may be located
symmetrically around a delicate core to equalize pressure and ¯ow
around the core; (2) where the ¯ow length L from the gate to the farthest
corner (or rim) of the molding is very great. This applies especially to
large moldings. See also Section 5.2.4.8.
j Rule 8: Location of gates. Gate location depends on the shape of the
product. A general rule is that the distance from the gate to the farthest
corners of the cavity space should be about the same. Ideally, gating in the
center of the product will ®ll this condition, but this is often more
expensive than edge gating. In some cases, center gating is not acceptable
if the center of the product must be clear or does not permit a gate vestige.
j Rule 9: Breaking up the plastics ¯ow. Preferably, gates should be located
so that the stream from the gate is broken up as soon as it enters the cavity
64 Before Starting to Design a Mold
space, by colliding either with an opposing wall or, at least, with some
projection (such as a pin) in the cavity space. This will prevent the effects
of jetting, that is, visible ¯ow lines of the plastic, or other surface ¯aws.
j Rule 10: Avoid reversed ¯ow (if possible). Gating into ribs or other
heavy sections may cause the plastic to ¯ow easily and quickly around
some thinner areas of the cavity space. This creates additional fronts
¯owing toward the front of the stream coming from the gate; it will trap
air, which must be vented. This occurs sometimes in heavier moldings,
and venting can often be provided by judiciously placing ejector pins or
vent pins at such locations where the plastics fronts are expected to meet.
5.2.4.8 L/t Ratio
An important characteristic of any product (and the cavity space) is the Lat (``L
over t'') ratio. This is the distance from the gate to the farthest corner (or rim) of
the product, divided by the typical wall thickness through which the plastic must
¯ow. It applies not only to cup-shaped products, such as containers, but also to
¯at products, whether they are center or edge gated. For example, a container,
center gated in the bottom, has a distance of 300 mm from the gate to the rim.
The wall thickness is 2.0 mm. In this case, the Lat ratio is 300 divided by 2,
which equals 150 (Lat ˆ 150).
From experience, it can be stated that an Lat smaller than 100 is usually easy
to ®ll and (with some exceptions) a ratio of 100 to 200 is more dif®cult to ®ll.
Any ratio above 200 is dif®cult to ®ll and may require special attention; it may
even be impossible to ®ll. In the case of large products, by increasing the
number of gates and spacing them judiciously, the Lat ratio can be reduced, and
a piece can be produced that would otherwise be impossible to mold. Reducing
the Lat ratio in this way would also allow the mold to cycle faster. Venting must
be carefully considered to ensure that any air trapped between the fronts of the
plastics ¯ow from more than one gate will be able to escape.
5.2.5 Venting
5.2.5.1 What Is a Vent?
Avent is a small gap in the molding surface, located where air is expected to be
trapped by the advancing and/or converging streams of plastic, during injection.
5.2 Start of Mold Design 65
5.2.5.2 Design Rules That Apply to all Molds
j Rule 1: How much venting? Always provide as much venting as
possible! The parting line is the ideal location for vents, but other areas
are often as important. Especially with thin-walled, typically, disposable
goods, but also with others products, the molding cycles depend on the
speed with which air can escape the cavity space.
j Rule 2: Ends of the melt ¯ow. For good ®lling of the product, provide
vents where the melt ¯ow is expected to end, and at any and all other
points where air could be trapped, thereby preventing the melt to enter
there, typically, at deep bosses or ribs. (If ribs end at the P/L, there is
usually no need for additional vents.)
j Rule 3: Weld lines. Consider locating vents at points where two or more
fronts of plastic ¯ow will meet (for example, where weld lines are
anticipated). This is important when using more than one gate into one
cavity space, or where it is expected that the melt ¯ow from one gate will
split and then reunite, for example, when large cross sections in the cavity
space cause the plastic to run around an enclosed area. Remember, all
¯uids always travel the path of least resistance.
j Rule 4: Vent gap. The gap must be large enough to let air pass, but
small enough so that the inrushing plastic cannot follow. There are
several considerations when designing the vent. Its size (the gap) will
obviously depend on the viscosity and the pressure of the plastic.
Commonly used are gaps of about 0.01 mm (0.0004 inch).
j Rule 5: Land, vent grooves, and channels (Fig. 5.14). The distance in
the gap through which the air has to squeeze is called the land. It is good
Figure 5.14 Examples of vents: (left) section through vent, vent groove, and vent
channel, (center) continuous vent, (right) spot vents. (a) Cavity, (b) core, (c) gap,
(d) land, (e) vent groove, (f) vent channel, (g) continuous vent, (h) spot vent.
66 Before Starting to Design a Mold
practice to make the land very short. The length suggested for most
molds is 1.5 to 2.0 mm (0.060 to 0.080 inch). (Longer land is, of course,
possible but will offer more resistance to the escaping air.) However, the
best-designed vent will not function if the air cannot go anywhere. As the
air escapes through the vent gap, it must be permitted to ¯ow away from
the mold; the land should end in a vent groove, running approximately
parallel to the edge of the product, and vent channels leading away from
speci®c vents or from vent grooves. For venting at the P/L, the cross
section of the vent grooves and channels should be commensurate with
the amount of air expected to ¯ow through them, at least 1 mm (0.040
inch) deep 62 mm (0.080 inch) wide. For vents not at the P/L, the land
should connect to a hole leading to the outside. This applies to ®xed vent
pins, and venting where two ®xed mold components have a vent cut, for
example, at the bottom of a deep rib.
j Rule 6: Width of gap. There are spot vents and continuous vents. Spot
vents were used commonly in earlier days of mold making. The molder
noticed spots where the plastic was burnt at the edge of the product;
where the burning occurred, a small vent at the P/L was cut into the mold,
often crudely, with hand tools. Today, the mold designer must anticipate
where spot vents will be required and specify their width. The vents can
be as narrow as 2 mm (0.080 inch) or even less, but are more often about
6 mm (0.250 inch) wide. Continuous vents on the P/L are often speci®ed
for high-speed molds where they allow air to escape quicker than through
a number of spot vents. It does not matter where the vents or channels are
located on the P/L; they can be on the core side or the cavity side of the
mold; the deciding factor is the ease of machining (grinding) them into
the mold.
j Rule 7: Cleaning of vents. Consider how vents are to be kept clean.
Most plastics exude sticky substances that over time plug the vents. The
vents in the P/L can be easily cleaned by wiping from time to time.
Ejector pins and sleeves have clearances suitable for good venting and,
because of their motion while ejecting, are considered self-cleaning.
Specially designed vent pins are ®xed in their locations and will have to
be cleaned from time to time to ensure proper functioning. Frequently, the
vent pins or other vents inside the mold are connected with drilled holes,
not to the outside, but to a permanently pressurized air supply that blows
through the vents when the mold is open. It does not affect the molding
because the injection pressure is many times greater than the air pressure.
5.2 Start of Mold Design 67
j Rule 8: Strength of P/L. The designer must not forget that the vents and
the vent channels reduce the area where cavity and core meet (the P/L).
The designer must make sure that in strength calculations referring to the
compression of this area when clamping the mold, the actual area of the
P/L is considered. This is sometimes overlooked, and after a few months
of operation, due to fatigue of the mold steels, the cavity or core surfaces
meeting at the P/L are compressed to such extent that the vent gap is
reduced or even eliminated; a mold that ran ®ne at ®rst gradually stops
producing good products and will require recutting of the vents.
5.2.6 Ejection (See also ME, Chapter 12)
This is the next step in the design of the stack. As discussed in Section 4.9, there
are many ways to eject a product. At this point in the design process, the
designer will determine which method will be most suitable for (1) the shape of
the product, (2) the type of mold, and (3) the expected productivity. The selected
method will now be shown in proper relationship to the (cavity and core) stack.
Space requirements for ejection mechanisms, including the location of the now
also selected ejector plate return features, can in¯uence the spacing of the stacks
in a multicavity mold. The designer must also consider that the core must be
backed up against excessive de¯ection of the core backing plate during
injection. This backing up is usually simple with stripper rings or plates; almost
the whole area under the core can be well supported because there are no ejector
pins or sleeves there. It is often quite dif®cult to locate the ejector pins in the
most effective locations, while allowing suf®cient space for the backing up of
the core plate and for aligning and guiding the ejector plate. Note that all ejector
plates must be guided independently; that is, these plates must not be guided by
ejector pins or return pins, because the weight of the plate will tend to bend
these pins in the (usually horizontal) molding machines. But even in molds to be
run in vertical machines it is good practice to guide the ejector plates.
If it is not possible (because of close spacing of ejector pins) to provide
direct backing support, such as support pillars, under the core plate, the only
solution is to provide very thick, heavy core backing plates to minimize
de¯ection. The plate thickness can be calculated with complicated but accurate
methods, or approximated as shown in ME, Chapter 17. The designer must also
consider that after the mold cooling has been decided, it still may be necessary
to relocate some ejector pins or some cooling channels. This may take several
attempts of layouts before settling on a ®nal solution.
68 Before Starting to Design a Mold
5.2.7 Cooling
This section does not go into the details of mold cooling, but only highlights the
most important areas and principles to be considered by the designer. For more
information, the designer should consult ME, Chapter 13.
5.2.7.1 Purpose of Cooling a Mold
(1) Cooling is directly related to productivity. An injection mold could also
work without any cooling; that is, it could rely entirely on giving up the heat
energy, which was put into it during injection of the hot plastic, to the
surrounding shop (ambient) temperature. This could take a very long time,
especially with heavy sections and large masses of plastic, but it is done
occasionally if the total production is very small. Instead of water cooling, air
could be blown at the hot mold surfaces to cool them and to speed the process
up somewhat. This is sometimes done even in production molds, when it is not
possible to cool a very delicate mold part by conventional cooling means.
(2) Productivity. The higher the productivity that is expected from a mold,
the faster the mold must be brought back to its optimal operating temperature,
that is, the better must be the cooling. As should be stressed again and again, the
molder is really interested only in getting the best product at the lowest cost, and
the mold cost becomes signi®cant only if production is fairly low. This means
that, while a relatively low production mold should be well cooled, it should be
done without ``going all out''; with high production molds, there should be no
limits to ingenuity when designing the cooling channel layout or selecting the
mold materials for good conductivity and mold life. This is a typical area where
compromises may be necessary. In certain types of molds (especially molds for
intricate technical products, even for high production), the cooling of the
mounting or backing plates is often acceptable, without any intricate cooling
channels within cavities and cores. The heat must travel through cavity and core
to the surface where they are mounted, and be removed by the plates by a pattern
of simple (drilled) water channels. This method is inexpensive but will add time
to the molding cycle, when compared to complicated cooling layouts. However,
the added cost to the molding process is small compared with the possibly much
higher mold cost with intricate cooling arrangements.
(3) Heat conductivity of mold materials. The designer must understand that
there are great differences in heat conductivity in the materials commonly used
for molds. The designer must also understand that the amount of heat removed
5.2 Start of Mold Design 69
per unit of time depends on the distance the heat must travel. Dirt and corrosion
in cooling lines also act like heat barriers and affect the heat transfer from the
mold to the cooling medium. In some cases, it may be almost impossible to
provide cooling lines in small mold parts; small pins and blades, for example,
will heat up much more than the well-cooled cavity walls, and thereby control
the molding cycle. Special mold materials, such as beryllium±copper (BeCu)
alloys, provide about four times better heat conductivity than steel, and are often
used for such delicate mold parts; the heat will then move faster than in steel to
reach a well-cooled mold part or plate. Certain larger parts in high-speed molds
are also made from BeCu, wherever it is important that heat be removed fast,
even though such parts can be well cooled by cross drilling or are surrounded by
coolant channels. This method is often used in mold parts opposite the gate
where the hot plastic hits ®rst as it comes out of the gate, and in parts
surrounding the hot gate. Note that BeCu is much more expensive than mold
steel; it can be used prehardened at about Rc 35±38, which is in many
applications suf®cient. BeCu, even when hard, is not as resistant to wear as hard
mold steel; gates if made from BeCu must be replaced frequently, as the plastic
stream tends to wash out and increase the gate size. The designer will make sure
that such replacement is easy to do.
Caution: BeCu gives off poisonous gases during machining, and special
precautions, such as ventilation of the work place, are necessary.
(4) Heat conductivity of molding materials. Plastics, too, have different heat
conductivities. There is also the difference between crystalline and amorphous
plastics. Crystalline plastics (e.g., PE or PP) contain more heat and give it up
slower to the coolant than amorphous plastics (e.g., PS); without going into
details, more energy (heat) is needed to melt crystalline plastics, and more
energy (in cooling) is needed to cool it down again. In practical terms, for
example, by using the same mold, it will take longer to mold a product from PE
than from PS.
As soon as the plastic touches the walls of the cooled cavity space, it freezes,
which makes it more dif®cult for the following layers to give up heat to the mold
wall or insert. This is signi®cant for products with heavy walls and will increase
the cooling time regardless of how well the wall (or mold part) is cooled. Also,
as soon as the plastic begins to cool, it will start to shrink; this happens (in most
cases) in the direction away from the cavity. Because the shrinking plastic will
start to hug the core, there will be (a) a better contact with the core, and (b) a
space created between the plastic and the cavity wall; this space contains a
vacuum or if properly vented, will contain air. Both air or vacuum are ideal heat
insulators and reduce the heat ¯ow from the plastic to the cavity wall. In most
such molds the cavity does not need as much cooling as the core. Unfortunately
70 Before Starting to Design a Mold
for the designer, there is a problem: usually, there is much more space in the
cavityÐwhere cooling is not needed as muchÐto provide lots of cooling
circuitry, while the coreÐwhich does more of the coolingÐis much more
dif®cult to cool, especially when there are also ejectors, moving parts, and/or air
channels in it. Many existing molds have lots of unnecessary cooling in the
cavity.
With molds for thin-walled products, it is somewhat different. The injected
plastic is so thin that there is less effect of shrinkage, and the cooling of the
cavity also becomes important because the plastic stays in contact with the
cavity walls for much longer.
There are exceptions to the foregoing. For example, if a product has heavy
walls and a large gate, injection pressure can be maintained longer, the shrinking
volume is replenished during the cooling cycle, and the plastic stays in contact
with the cavity wall longer. Even so, the cavity cooling is never as important as
the core cooling.
5.2.7.2 Show Cooling Lines in Stack
The next step in the design is to show the selected cooling lines in the stack, that
is, the cavity, core, and, occasionally, the stripper plate and any side cores or
cavity splits. This may require several attempts of layouts before settling on one
solution. For very high production molds, this may take considerable design
time but it is always worth it. It may also require going back to the stack layout
and changing the ejection layout to arrive at a good compromise in locating both
ejection and cooling. As mentioned earlier, make sure that all channels are
dimensioned so that the coolant will have turbulent ¯ow and that the location of
channels from the molding surfaces is as suggested for ef®ciency and strength.
How will the coolant be supplied to the cavities and cores, in case of
multicavity molds? There are several possibilities.
(1) Each cavity or core is mounted on its respective backing plate, and each
has its own coolant connection to a central water supply (header, etc.) This is
fairly inexpensive, but not very good because of the large number of hose
connections required, especially when there are more than six cavities.
Remember that every cooling circuit has an IN and an OUT connection
(2 hoses), and often there are several cooling circuits per cavity, and, similarly,
often more than one cooling circuit per core or cavity. In addition, some plates
should also be cooled because of possible alignment problems. All this can add
5.2 Start of Mold Design 71
up to a very large number of hose connections, a possible nightmare for mold
installation.
(2) Cavities and cores receive the coolant from their underlying plate. This
method is more complicated than (1), but reduces the number of hoses required
to a minimum. The mold plates are cross drilled with channels of various
(larger) sizes to supply the coolant and to return it. These sizes should be
calculated and located so that all cavities or cores will be able to draw, as nearly
as possible, the same amount of coolant. Cross-drilled channels are more
expensive to produce than the method shown in (1), but such molds are much
less troublesome to install, or in operation. Note that the coolant should not be
used to regulate the ¯ow through some portions of the mold during the operation
of a mold. The coolant should be either ON or OFF. In exceptional cases, it may
be necessary to shut off the cooling around hot runner nozzles during start-up,
but even this is old-fashioned and unnecessary if the mold is properly designed.
(3) The cavities are often inserted (fully or partly) and therefore ®xed in
position. The cores are usually screwed on backing plates, sometimes even
allowed to ¯oat, for perfect, individual alignment. For the coolant connection,
the same applies as in (2).
Regardless of which of the above three methods are used, the designer must
now consider where the coolant connections are located in those stack members
that will be cooled. It is very desirable (for mold making and for servicing) that
all stack parts are the same; the designer should spend some time to see if all
parts can be mounted without the need for ``right'' or ``left'' parts. In cases (2)
and (3), this can often be achieved by judiciously locating the coolant channels.
To prevent leaking, O-rings will be required at all ¯uid passages from one mold
part to another. O-ring grooves and ®nishes must be properly speci®ed. In some
cases, more than one passage may be covered by one O-ring (use O-ring
manufacturers guidelines). Any leakage from one passage to another within the
O-ring (``wet'') area can be ignored, but it is important that no screws are
allowed in a wet area.
5.2.7.3 Screws
At this time only, the designer will locate the screws connecting the cavities and
cores to their plates. In some cases, where cavities or cores are inserted in plates,
they can be held in them with ``heels,'' and, therefore, do not require screws; but
if the inserts are round, they must be oriented, for example, with dowels, so that
they cannot turn. If screws are used they too should be located so that there is no
need for ``right'' and ``left'' parts. The designer should always make sure to use
72 Before Starting to Design a Mold
the lowest number of screws required to contain the expected forces that the
screws are supposed to withstand, and to select the largest screws possible in that
location. In manufacturing, as a general rule, any screw thread smaller than
8 mm diameter (while of course possible) is more costly to produce. From
experience, most molds have too many, often unnecessary, screws. Note that the
foregoing applies for all screws in the mold, not necessarily the stack. (See also
ME, Chapter 19.)
5.2.8 Alignment of Stack
This should also be decided now, before proceeding. Will the overall alignment
of the mold shoe with leader pins be enough? Should each stack be aligned by
taper locks? By a pair of leader pins? For this decision, see Section 4.11.
5.2.9 Design Review
This is a good time to sit back and contemplate what has been achieved so far. Is
it really the best thing the designer could come up with? Please note that all the
things discussed up to now in this text are, or at least should be, in the head of
the experienced designer, and all the work done up to now would normally not
take more than a few hours for an easy mold or maybe a few days for a more
complicated one. This is also the time that the designer arranges for a design
review, as discussed earlier. The result of such review will then determine
whether to proceed as shown, or to ``go back to the drawing board.'' Often, only
minor changes may be required, but frequently, as experience has shown, new
ideas come out of these meetings, and the result will be a better operating, and
maybe a lower cost, mold.
5.3 Preload
The term ``preload'' has been mentioned several times in our discussion. What is
preload? As an example, imagine two blocks that are held together by two
screws. These blocks are subjected to a force F trying to separate them. If both
screws are hand tightened, that is, tightened just enough that the blocks touch,
without any gap between them, the screws will not exert any force SF on the
5.3 Preload 73
blocks; the combined total screw force SF equals zero (SF ˆ 0). As soon as the
force F is applied, and because F is greater than FS (F b FS), the blocks will
separate and the screws will be stretched until the resistance (or force) in the
screws SF equals F (SF ˆ F). But by then, the blocks have separated and left a
gap between them. In molds, any undesired gap means ¯ashing or leaking, and
is not acceptable. To prevent such gaps, the screws must be tightened to such an
extent that they will be stretched to a desired preload. FS must be greater than
the expected force F (FS b F). When the force F is now applied, the blocks will
not separate unless F becomes greater than FS. In practice, there are two types
of preload.
(1) The preload exerted by screws. Screws must always be tightened to the
manufacturers suggested values, that is, to about 60±70% of the yield strength of
the screw. The resulting force (or holding power) of the screw can be found in all
screw tables.
(2) The preload can be provided by stretching the steel of mold parts, such
as tapers, wedges, stripper rings, and so on, or mold plates, as in the following
example, and by press ®ts, which are a kind of preload, or by shrinking of rings
or bars overÐusuallyÐcavities, for building up cavities from sections. When
specifying preload on tapers or wedges, it is common practice to indicate the
distance (which, unfortunately, is also called preload) that the tapers are allowed
to move (and thereby stretching the steel) before coming to a stop. This preload
is especially important where cavities split in two or more sections.
For example, a mold for a mug with handle (see Chapter 7) will split in a
vertical plane through the handle. If the two cavity halves are not preloaded, the
splits will open under the injection pressure and the mold will ¯ash both at the
handle side and at the side opposite the handle. In this case, the preload is
provided by having the cavity sections backed up by wedges, preferably both on
the cavity and core side, which will make contact with the cavity sections before
the mold is fully closed. As the mold closes fully (over the length of the ``other,''
calculated preload) the wedges stretch the cavity plate and (preferably) also the
core plate. The stretching of these plates provides the necessary ``real'' preload
(in kN or US tons) to hold the mold together against ¯ashing.
Preload is explained in much detail in ME, Chapter 30.
5.4 Mold Materials Selection
At this time (or maybe even earlier, while designing the stack), the designer will
think of the materials (steels, etc.) to be used for the mold. (See also Chapter 9)
74 Before Starting to Design a Mold
5.4.1 Effect of Expected Production
Before making any decision, the designer must again consider the lifetime
production expected from the mold. There is no point in specifying the best
possible (and expensive) materials if the mold will be required for a small
production. Also, there is a difference whether, for example, 24 million pieces
are to be produced in a 24- or an 8-cavity mold. With 8 cavities, the mold will
operate 3 million cycles; with 24 cavities, it will operate only 1 million cycles.
This requires the designer to consider fatigue in metals, as discussed in
Section 5.4.3.3.
5.4.2 Forces in Molds
The designer must know what forces are present within the mold when deciding
on the strength of the mold component to resist these forces. The most important
forces acting within the mold affect these strengths:
(1) Tension: the forces created by the injection pressure of the plastic
inside the runner system and in the cavity space, usually requiring high
tensile strength
(2) Compression: the compressive strength required to counteract the
clamp force of the machine, typically, the forces on the P/L, and the
forces seen where inserts are supported by plates, and so on
(3) Bending (or de¯ection): the forces seen by cores, and by all plates,
especially the ejector and stripper plates
(4) Wear: the forces created by wedge action, as in stripper rings and so on,
or tapers and wedges for alignment, which create wear on the matching
surfaces
(5) Torsion: the forces seen by coil springs and in mold features, such as
unscrewing, or in some robots
(6) Shear: forces seen by dowels, or by the backup of wedges
Note that in many cases, we have combinations of any of the above forces.
5.4.3 Characteristics of Steels and Other Mold Materials
For mold steel selection, see Section 9.2.
5.4 Mold Materials Selection 75
For every mold part the following must be considered: which of these
characteristics are most important? Unfortunately, some of them are directly
opposite to each other (e.g., toughness and hardness) and compromises are
necessary.
5.4.3.1 Availability
This applies not only to selected raw materials, but also to hardware items: the
designer must make sure that any material, hardware, or standard mold
component intended to be speci®ed is also available when required. Many items
are often shown in catalogues or other listings as ``standard'' but this does not
always mean that they are readily available, on the shelf, in the desired size, and
in the quantities needed.
5.4.3.2 Strength of Material
This applies to steel, BeCu, aluminum, bronze, and so on. Strength is speci®ed
by its tensile strength; compressive strength is often but not always about the
same. Shear and torsional strength is about one-half the tensile strength. The
designer should always get the exact values from a machinery handbook or from
the supplier.
Always watch whether the values given are in ISO or in inch systems. The
strength values are given either in kPa (kilopascal) or in psi (pound/in
2
).
5.4.3.3 Fatigue (See ME, Chapter 18)
The strength ®gures for steel and other metals are arrived at from stressing a test
sample, for one cycle only. The results of such tests are satisfactory for steady
loads, such as seen, for example, by preloaded screws, but molds often operate
many, sometimes millions of cycles. If there are more cycles, the rated strength
gradually declines.
This decline is usually shown, as in Fig. 5.15, in logarithmic graphs, as a
straight line declining from the rated strength (e.g., tensile or yield strength) for
one cycle to a point where the value remains the same regardless of the
additional number of cycles; this is for all steels at about 2 million cycles. The
76 Before Starting to Design a Mold
strength of the material, after 2 million cycles (the fatigue strength) depends
very much on the material and hardness selected, but also on features such as
notches, holes drilled into it, and surface ®nish. The fatigue strength can be as
low as 15±20% of the yield strength (yield, in hardened mold steels, is only a
little less than the tensile strength; many data are given in yield rather than
tensile strength). Note that so-called machinery steels, but also the related P20 or
P20PQ, do not lose as much strength as hard mold steels.
The fatigue strength is equivalent to the safety factor often used by designers
(frequently, 5) when calculating the strength of a part. The problem is that all
force calculations depend on an assumption of the injection pressure, as
discussed in Section 4.6.1. But we know that the forces will be greater for thin-
wall molding, and since most of them are designed for a very large number of
cycles, the selection of only the very best materials with appropriate strength and
hardness is suggested.
Note that springs inside molds (sometimes speci®ed for ejector plate return)
are especially sensitive to cycling. When designing for springs, use the
manufacturer's suggested values for maximum compression and load of the
selected spring.
5.4.3.4 Wear
Some materials are better for wear than others. Lubrication (or the lack of it) can
be a decisive factor. Wear points could be steel on steel, steel on bronze, steel on
hard plastic, and so on. Hard steels are always better, but the designer must never
use the same alloy for both members rubbing against each other, as in wedges or
Figure 5.15 Typical fatigue graph for a machinery steel.
5.4 Mold Materials Selection 77
taper locks, except if the wear points can be lubricated. Each alloy has a distinct,
different grain structure, and the problem is that when using identical grain
structures, the surfaces will lock (seize) when sliding under pressure, and
damage (tear) the surfaces. Hardness differences alone are no substitute for
different grain structure, except where one of the rubbing surfaces is treated with
methods such as nitriding. In nitriding, very hard nitrogen compounds enter
between the grains and alter the surface of the steel. Lubrication in molds is
never permitted where it could contaminate the molded products, especially for
pharmaceutical and food use.
5.5 Stack Molds (See also ME, Chapter 15)
All that has been said so far applies to any mold, single-level (conventional) or
multilevel (stack). In principle, a stack mold is an arrangement where a number
of single-level molds are placed back to back in the molding machine. Here,
only the most common, two-level stack mold is discussed, although 4 levels and
more have been built. The two injection (usually cavity) halves are mounted
back to back in one moving (``¯oating'') platen between the standard machine
platens; the core halves are then mounted one each on the stationary and moving
platens. (Because these are usually also the sides where the ejectors are located,
special provisions must be made for ejector actuation on the stationary mold
side; this is sometimes built into the mold.)
The stack mold system is often used for very large production, requiring
many cavities, but often also for molds producing different parts that are paired
in assembly. Stacks for one product are in one level, and stacks for another
matching product are in the other level. The mold cost is about the same (or even
a little less) than the cost of two molds, each built for half the number of cavities.
The advantage is that one stack mold on one machine, requiring much less
plant space and investment, can have the same output as two molds, requiring
two machines, provided that the clamp has suf®cient stroke and shut height to
separate both P/Ls far enough for ejection from both sides. Also, the injection
unit must have a large enough plasticizing and shot capacity to ®ll both sides
without increasing the cycle time, which, of course, would defeat the purpose of
this system. Because the molds are stacked on top of each other, only the
projected area of one level need be considered. The forces due to injection
pressure within the center plate cancel each other; however, it is suggested to use
a machine that has a clamping force of about 10% more than would be required
for an equivalent single-stack mold. Today, in most systems, the injection unit is
78 Before Starting to Design a Mold
connected with a long sprue extension to the hot runner in the center platen with
the cavities. In some cases, the plastic is injected from the side, with a special
extruder arrangement.
A disadvantage of the stack mold system is that in case of mold or machine
trouble, with stack molds, there is no production at all, whereas with
conventional molds, half the production will continue.
5.6 Mold Layout and Assembly Drawings
Now the designer has all the basic information about the mold to be built and
can start to ®nalize the mold assembly drawing.
5.6.1 Machine Platen Layout
The platen layoutÐincluding tie bar locationsÐof the machine (or machines)
the mold will be used on should be shown ®rst. This will determine the outer
limits of the mold and where to place certain mold features. It will, for example,
specify where coolant connections must not be located, or any planned auxiliary
actuators outside the mold, latches, and so on. The mounting and ejector holes
that will probably be used for the mold must also be shown.
5.6.2 Symmetry of Layout, Balancing of Clamp
For multicavity molds, it is important that the stacks are positioned such that the
projected area of each cavity is as symmetrical as possible about the center of
the machine, to ensure that all tie bars are loaded equally as the mold is clamped,
thereby providing each cavity with the same preload to prevent ¯ashing. This
can present a problem with ``family molds,'' where several different stacks or
cavities with different projected areas are used in one mold. A small amount of
asymmetry is often acceptable. With edge-gated, single-cavity molds, to balance
the load, a pressure pad must be used opposite the stack location to simulate the
force of a second cavity. In this case, the cavity itself will see only one-half of
the clamping force of the machine. This is important for the selection of size of
clamp, for the job. There is no such problem with center-gated, single-cavity
molds.
5.6 Mold Layout and Assembly Drawings 79
5.6.3 The Views
Start with the signi®cant mold cross section or sections, but always work with all
views at the same time; that is, both the plan views of cavity and core will
``grow'' side by side with the cross section. This prevents surprises arising when
one view is far advanced and then it becomes apparent that it does not go
together because another view shows some interferences. Show the selected hot
runner hardware, if this is planned to be a hot runner mold. If it is a mold for
which the hot runner section is purchased completely assembled by the supplier,
show the interface points and dimensions only.
5.6.4 Completing the Assembly Drawing
Everything can now be shown in all views. It is not a good practice to show the
complete stack in every location, even though it is easy to do with a CAD
system. It would make it dif®cult to read the drawings, especially if there are
many other features in the stack. To facilitate the reading of the drawing, the
stack should be shown in only one location of each plan view, and just its
outlines in all other locations, for example, with heavy, dotted lines. However,
important information such as the centers of coolant connections, screws,
alignment features, and so on should be identi®ed in all locations with small
crosses and/or circles, which can then also be identi®ed with a code, such as S1,
S2 for screws and D1, D2 for dowels. Such codes will make it easier to read the
drawing; they will be also important when completing the cooling lines layout in
the plates and the location of plate supports and large screws holding together
the various mold plates, where applicable. Show now also the alignment
features, the ejection system, the method of mold mounting and any connection
(®xed or loose) with machine ejectors, and everything else needed by the
detailers to produce the shop (detail) drawings.
At this time, show also where the outside of the mold must be marked
(preferably die stamped) to identify coolant and air connections. There would be
a 1 IN, 1 OUT, 2 IN, 2 OUT, and so on, and AIR 1, AIR 2, and so on. The IN
and OUT can be important for cooling because in many cases it does make a
difference where the cold coolant should go ®rst (IN). For example, in the core
of a container mold, it should ®rst hit the area opposite the gate.
80 Before Starting to Design a Mold
5.6.5 Bill of Materials (BoM) and ``Ballooning''
This is also the time to specify the BoM so that all materials can now be ordered
and be available when required for the machining operations and the ®nal
assembly. The BoM should specify not only the ®nal sizes of steels and so on,
but also the hardness of the ®nished mold part. This is important not only for the
buyer, but also for the detailer of the shop drawings.
``Ballooning'' is the identi®cation of each mold part on the assembly
drawing. Several methods are used, but the preferred one is to show balloons
(circles or ellipses about 12±15 mm in size) outside around the drawings. Each
balloon contains a number identifying each mold component, but only once,
from stack parts to plates to screws, and so on. This number corresponds to a
line in the BoM. Each balloon has a leader (line) connecting it with the part
identi®ed. Preferably, the balloons should be shown around the main cross
section of the mold or near partial sections; only if these locations would not be
clear enough and could cause errors should they be shown in other sections or in
the appropriate plan view.
5.6.6 Finishing Touches
Finishing information of the molding surfaces should also be shownÐ
preferably with standard symbolsÐon the assembly drawing, for future
reference, and to be used by the detailer when making the shop drawings.
Cross hatching should be used sparingly, only where it really helps to make the
assembly drawing clearer. This also applies to detail drawings. This is also the
time to show any notes on the drawing. (See also Section 5.2.2.4)
Usually one ``main'' title block is shown, preferably on the drawing with the
main cross section; additional, smaller title blocks are on all other drawings. The
title blocks identify the mold design of®ce or the mold maker, the project
number and drawing numbers, the designer (by name and initials), the checker,
and the detailer, if applicable. It will also show any other information pertinent
to the product and will specify for which machines the mold was designed, the
types of plastic, and any other information that deserves to be recorded for
future use. Tolerances are not shown on the assembly drawings. They are strictly
limited to the detail drawings. However, it is a good practice to show ®ts and
clearances where they apply, but only if they are different from standard ®ts and
clearances.
5.6 Mold Layout and Assembly Drawings 81
6 Review and Follow-Up
After the drawings and the ®nal BoM have been released for production, there is
usually a quiet time for the designer, as far as this mold is concerned. Hopefully,
there are no problems in buying and machining. If there are problems in the
shop, for example errors in machining orÐheaven forbidÐerrors in the
drawings, any corrective action must be approved and recorded by the designer
or his delegate. There is always the possibility that the same mold will be
required again maybe in a year, or much later, and it would be embarrassing if
the same errors would then be repeated. After the mold is ®nally ready for
testing, the designer must be present and see that the installation and setup
procedures are in accordance with the speci®cations on the assembly drawings.
The designer must also approve any changes required to make the mold work as
expected and record what was done to make the mold work before it is shipped.
A complete report, specifying the test machine, all temperatures, times, pressure
settings, and plastics speci®cations should be supplied to the customer, together
with the mold.
A good designer will then follow up the mold with the molder, especially in
case the designer has not heard from the molder ®rst, to see how the mold works
in production. Unfortunately, frequently, a mold goes into the customer's
molding shop, and if there is any problem, the shop people cannot be bothered
to go back to the mold maker but make adjustments that may not have been
necessary if they had followed the instructions received with the mold. Any later
problems experienced by the customer should also be recorded for future
reference.
82
7 Typical Examples
A few examples are provided of typical molded products and how they should
be approached. These examples are used to illustrate material discussed earlier
in the text.
7.1 Containers or Other Cup-Shaped Products
Containers are not necessarily drinking cups, but any container, round or of any
other shape, such as boxes or many technical housings. The main characteristics
of container molds are as follows: (1) Although they can be edge gated, they are
usually outside center gated; they may have more than one gate. (2) Core
cooling is usually easily accomplished, which is the basis of higher productivity.
There are all kinds of shapes, too many to show in one book, but there are some
signi®cant typical differences. Some examples are shown here.
Figure 7.1 depicts two very similar cups: on the left is a typical cup (or
container) with a plain bottom, and on the right is a cup with a reentrant bottom.
Note that the bottom is preferably domed, as shown. While shrinking, the
curvature of the dome will change somewhat but it will not pull inward and
thereby deform the side wall of the container. It is always quite dif®cult to mold
any straight surface, especially from high-shrinkage plastics, unless the cooling
cycle is greatly extended to permit the product to reach the mold temperature
before ejection. A typical mold for such a product is illustrated in Fig. 7.2. The
gating can be a hot runner, 3-plate, insulated runner or through shooting.
Note that Fig. 7.2 shows a conventional mounting plate (17). As discussed in
Section 5.1.6.1 (shut height), this illustrates a typical example where this plate
can easily be omitted. The mold on the left in Fig. 7.3 uses a stripper plate, and
the ejector plate comes to a stop when the stripper taper seats on the core taper,
so the ejector plate does not need a stop. In the case of an ejector plate using
83
ejector pins (right illustration), solid stops (shoulder bolts, etc.) must be
provided; they can be mounted on the underside of the core backing plate.
In Fig. 7.3, the parallels and the supports under the cores (supporting pillars)
will sit directly on the machine platen. The designer must make sure that when
the mold is mounted in the machine, all pillars are fully supported; that is, they
must sit on the machine platen but should not sit solely on top of any weak areas
of the platen such as T-slots.
Note that in any mold, all the outside edges of mold plates, or any other area
where sharp edges could cause personal injury during handling, should be
properly broken (rounded or chamfered). However, in some areas, especially in
the path of plastic ¯ow, especially on inserts, sharp corners must be kept sharp;
the designer must indicate this on the drawings.
The right illustration in Fig. 7.1 shows a typical cup with a reentrant bottom.
Here, too, the bottom is preferably domed, as shown. But because of the
reentrant, especially if the depth of the dimension f is greater than twice the
thickness of the plastic at that spot, it will be dif®cult or even impossible to ®ll
this portion of the bottom; also, if a piece of plastic breaks off in that narrow
section and remains there, it would be very dif®cult to remove it without
dismantling the mold. Therefore, special measures must be provided in the
mold: the cavity of the mold must follow the core as the mold opens, for a short
distance (about for the distance f ) until the mold part that forms the inside of the
reentrant, which usually also contains the gate, is completely withdrawn from
the molded plastic piece. Only after this happens is the mold allowed to separate
at the regular parting line. This method also facilitates good venting at the
bottom, as indicated; otherwise, the thin section would be a ``dead pocket'' and
not ®ll, as already discussed Section 5.2.5.2, rule 2. Note that this method is
Figure 7.1 Schematic illustration of two typical cups: (left) a simple cup shape; (right)
a similar cup but with a reentrant bottom.
84 Typical Examples
called moving cavity (Fig. 7.4); it is, in principle, similar to the two-stage
ejection illustrated in Section 5.2.3.3.
The cavity plate is guided on a separate set of guide pins to control its
location relative to the gate retainer plate (or hot runner plate or cavity backing
plate, as should be the case). Its stroke is limited to be only slightly larger than
Figure 7.2 Schematic illustration of a section through portion of a simple cup mold:
1, back plate or hot runner plate; 2, gate pad with cooling; 3, cavity; 4, stripper ring;
5, core; 6, guide bushing for ejector sleeve; 7, O-rings; 8, ejector sleeve; 9, support
under core; 10, ejector plate; 11, cavity retainer plate; 12, leader pin bushing; 13, leader
pin; 14, locking ring (for alignment of cavity and core); 15, core backing plate; 16,
parallel; 17, mounting plate; A, cavity cooling; B, gate pad cooling; C, core cooling.
7.1 Containers or Other Cup-Shaped Products 85
Figure 7.4 Typical construction of a moving cavity feature to release deep reentrants in
the cavity. The left half shows the mold in the closed position, whereas the right half
shows the mold at the point of opening when the cavity stops; the core continues to open
until the mold is fully open. The product is ejected as soon as the cavity is suf®ciently
distant from the cavity half. Note the venting arrangement.
Figure 7.3 The elimination of the mounting plate of the mold assembly. Mounting
slots 18 have been added to permit the use of mounting clamps. (Left) A variation to
Fig. 7.2. (Right) This application for a mold with ejector pins. There must be always a
clearance (g) where shown.
86 Typical Examples
dimension f. Air actuators (usually four) built right into the backing plate push
the cavity plate so that it follows the mold opening motion until the set limit is
reached. The product is now easily ejected from the core, and there is no danger
that the ``foot'' gets trapped between the gate pad and the cavity. There must be
ample venting provided where the alignment ring meets the gate pad.
7.2 Technical Products
When designing molds for technical products, consider ®rst: (1) gating and
runners, (2) core cooling, and (3) alignment of cavities and cores.
(1) As discussed earlier, 2-plate molds with edge (or tunnel) gating are
simpler and much less complicated and expensive than 3-plate molds or hot
runner molds. They can be, and still are today, used in the majority of all molds,
especially if the production is fairly low. The problem with edge gating is that
any runner, leading from the sprue to the ®nal branch runner (with the gates),
must never be located so that it will have to cross an open space. This makes it
necessary that all cavities and cores must be inserted in the cavity and/or core
plate, with a perfectly smooth (but not necessarily ¯at) surfaceÐthe parting
lineÐbetween them, without any gap into which plastic could ¯ow. This also
applies to any stripper plate with inserted stripper rings. Such rings, even though
of great advantage for better alignment with the cores and ease of replacement,
must not ¯oat in the stripper plate because of the obvious gap between ring and
plate, a gap over which the runner would have to pass. The designer must decide
whether to make rectangular or round pockets (or cutouts) into the plates, and
(a) insert the complete cavities or cores with tight ®t into them, or (b) cut the
cavities (or even the cores) right into the plates and just place inserts, if required,
into them. A round pocket will contain just one cavity or core; in a rectangular
pocket, one or more can be packed (see Fig. 7.6). Many molds, from 2-cavity to
multicavity molds, are built this way. This decision will also affect the choice of
materials for the plates. Mild steels would be acceptable in one case (a) but
usually not in the other (b).
The alternative is to gate into the top (outside) of the product, from the
cavity, as with 3-plate, insulated or hot runner molds, where the runners are not
in the parting line. With this choice, the cavities are frequently inserted into the
cavity (or cavity retainer) plate or as individual units. The cores are usually
individual units mounted on top of a core backing plate with gaps between them.
(2) The core cooling for technical products is usually not as simple as for
containers, because of the often large number of inserts within the core or cavity.
7.2 Technical Products 87
There is most often only one choice: to forget about intensive cooling with
channels right into the cores or the inserts, and to depend on the heat conducted
from the hot plastic, through the inserts and core or cavity, to the supporting,
cooled plates (see Fig. 7.6). In some cases, better conducting materials, such as
beryllium±copper, are used to make inserts or even complete cores or cavities.
Note: Every gap (clearance), but even every area of changeover from one part to
another, even when ®tting tightly and without any gap, constitutes a heat barrier
and slows down the heat ¯ow. For this reason, most molds for technical products
will cycle slower than the well-cooled molds for containers of similar weight and
wall thickness.
(3) Multicavity, 2-plate molds with inserted cavities and cores (or where
they are cut right into the plates) require high accuracy in the location of cavity
and core, because there is no possibility of adjusting their relative position once
the mold is ®nished. There is also the problem of heat expansion of the plates,
which can shift the relative positions if the plates are not of the same
temperature. For this reason, this type of mold should not be selected for thin-
wall products where the wall thickness can be greatly affected by any
misalignment. If high accuracy is required, it is best to have the cavities ®xed in
the cavity plate, and the cores mounted ¯oating on the core backing plate, with
individual method of alignment either with tapers as shown for a container, or,
as is most commonly done, with additional, small leader pins and bushings in
each stack. This will, of course, make it impossible to use runners in the P/L,
and will require a mold with gating into the top of the product, as shown in (1)
above.
A typical, technical product is shown in Fig. 7.5.
7.3 Mold with Fixed Cores
If a rib ends in a side wall as in section z±z (Fig. 7.5), venting of such rib is no
problem since the sidewall ends at the well-vented parting line. If, however, the
Figure 7.5 Schematic of a technical product, with inside ribs. One rib is as shown in
section x±x, the other as in section z±z.
88 Typical Examples
rib is ``closed'' as shown in section x±x, venting becomes very important,
especially if the rib is ``thin,'' that is, if the ratio of depth over thickness is greater
than about 2±3.
The illustration in Fig. 7.6 could be a section through a 4-cavity mold. Both
cavities A and C and cores B and D are set into pockets in the mold plates.
Inserts (cross hatched) are located either in cutouts (core, left side), which is
better for cooling, or in pockets (core, right side). Note, in the left portion of the
illustration, that the venting channels for those ribs do not end in the side wall of
the product. Note also that the runners sit on top of the line where two mold
parts meet; they will not leak. Both cavities and cores are cooled from their
underlying plates, as indicated by the circles, representing drilled holes for
cooling. Note that the inserts in the left core are better cooled because there are
fewer heat barriers.
7.4 Mold with Floating Cores
Figure 7.7 shows portion of a mold for a product similar to that in Fig. 7.5, but
the requirements for accuracy are high, so the cores are mounted ¯oating on the
Figure 7.6 A schematic of an edge-gated mold, with two of more cavities shown. One
cavity (right) has ribs as shown in Fig. 7.5, section x±x, the other (left) has ribs as shown
in section z±z.
7.4 Mold with Floating Cores 89
core backing plate (see ME, Section 14.4.2). The leader pins (1)Ðusually 2 per
stackÐare shown here with a bushing (2) in the cavity, but the bushing is often
omitted, since the cavity itself is usually made from hardened steel.
Note that in these applications, with or without ¯oating cores, the cavity is
usually easier to cool, by cross drilling, than the core; however, as mentioned
earlier in this book, there is not much gained by it because the core cooling
usually controls the molding cycle. Much more can be gained by carefully
considering where to gate, and providing ample venting in any area of the stack
where air could be trapped.
7.5 Molds with Side Cores or Splits
For all molds with side cores or where the cavity splits into two or more
sections, these sections must be preloaded against the forces from the injection
pressure to prevent ¯ashing along the split lines. Refer to Fig. 7.8. As the mold
opens, the cavity ``splits'' move for a short distance with the core, while the
splits open sideways. Only then can the cup be ejected. With the closed mold,
Figure 7.7 Schematic of a mold portion with ¯oating cores. (A) Cavity plate with
runner system (R) indicated with broken line. (B) Core backing plate. 1, Leader pin; 2,
bushing; F, ¯oating core mounting.
90 Typical Examples
during injection, the injection pressure p inside the cavity acts on the projected
area of the sides of the cup, F ˆ p ÂD ÂH. In mold B, the force F pushes
against the wedge, which is part of the cavity plate and is counteracted by the
steel of the cavity plate, with a cross section of b ÂW. There are now two
problems to consider: (1) the force F will stretch the portion of the plate with a
length L, and create an undesired gap at the split line. The wedges must therefore
be preloaded as explained in Section 5.3 of this book. (2) Because of the
distance m between the forces and reaction forces, there will be a bending
moment m ÂF which will force the wedge to bend outward as indicated
(arrow d). This system is therefore only suitable for shallow products. For deep
products, the side forces must be taken up on both the cavity and core sides of
the mold. This is illustrated by mold C, which has wedges both in the cavity and
the core side. The forces F trying to push the halves apart are thereby divided,
and both cavity and core plates will provide reaction forces. The preload must be
calculated and provided for each set of wedges.
Figure 7.8 Schematics of a mold for a cup with handle: (A) plan view into the cavity,
(B) section through a mold with wedges on the cavity half only, (C) a similar mold, but
with wedges on both cavity and core sides. W, width of the plates; L, length of stretched
cavity plate; b, thickness of cavity plate along L; H, height of cup; D, cup diameter;
F, the forces to be contained.
7.5 Molds with Side Cores or Splits 91
8 Estimating Mold Cost
One of the most dif®cult jobs in the mold making business is to determine as
accurately as possible the cost of the mold for the product for which it is to be
built. The estimator should be an experienced mold designer who can visualize
from the product drawing submitted (and occasionally from a sample) what kind
of mold will be most suitable to produce the product economically.
8.1 Need for Estimate
Before estimating, the designer (and the person negotiating with the client for an
order) should ®rst establish if the ``request for quotation,'' that is, to quote a
price for such a mold, is serious and how the outlook is for getting the order.
This is an important consideration: in the author's experience, many molders are
often approached by their customers solely to ®nd out how much it would cost,
approximately, to start a new product line; they need a mold price to determine
their own costs before proceeding. In some cases, the customer approaches not
only one, but possibly three or more molders for mold prices, and each of these
molders may in turn approach three or more mold makers for estimates of the
necessary molds. One mold maker may then get the same inquiry from several
molders, for the same product. In fact, only one of all these requests for
estimates can result in an order. This means that the estimator, faced with all
these requests, cannot spend too much time with each one, or the cost of
estimating would become excessive. In many cases, the ``boss'' of the mold shop
will decide whether it is really necessary to quote at all, or he or she may decide
to just give a ballpark ®gure and skip the formal estimating process altogether.
From the author's experience, with such multiple requests, the lowest price is
often based on errors in quoting; with clients who habitually select the lowest
bidder, the mold maker is bound to lose money. Any smart buyer of molds,
before placing an order, should consider ®rst the background and reputation of
92
the mold maker and his or her expertise in building the particular type of mold
requested. Only then should the price be considered. As has been said here
repeatedly, only the best-suited mold for the planned production will result in the
lowest product cost, which is really what the client needs. This often leads to
specialization by the mold maker, which is bene®cial to both customers and
mold makers. Requests for molds that are outside the mold maker's expertise
should be declined, unless the mold maker intends to enter this new ®eld. If the
request for quotation is considered serious, the estimator will ®rstÐin his or her
mindÐcompare the product with other jobs of similar products and then search
for precedents in personal (or the shop's) records, such as old drawings, book
illustrations, or electronic ®les.
8.2 Precedents
If there are close similarities (precedents), the estimating process is relatively
simple, because there is a good basis from which to extrapolate what will be
required for the new mold. For example, the precedent can be a mold with only a
few cavities for a product with a shape similar to the one for which the mold is
to be estimated, for the same number or for more or fewer cavities. In this case it
is up to the estimator to ®nd out from records, if possible, how good the mold
performed in operation, and if the hours estimated to produce the mold were
adequate; in other words, was the customer happy and did the shop make money
with this mold? This process is easy if proper records are kept, as was suggested
in Chapter 6. The estimator should consult with the people who actually made
that mold to ®nd out if there were any problems during manufacture or testing of
the mold, and then adjust for it when pricing the mold. With the absence of good
records, unfortunately, this is possible only if there was little turnover in
personnel in the shop.
8.3 No Precedents
If molds for a similar product have never been made before or the estimator is
not familiar with the type of mold requested, there are, in general, two
possibilities to be considered.
8.3 No Precedents 93
(1) The estimator will make sketches using previous experience as a mold
designer and show at least one method as to how the product could best be
made. These sketches will then be the basis for the estimate. (The problem with
this method is that it will take much estimating time, and even so, the estimator
cannot devote as much time to it as the mold designer will have after the order
for this mold has been booked. It is important that any such preliminary sketches
are made available to the mold designer, who then may (or may not) follow them
for the ®nal design. From the estimator's sketches it is then fairly easy to prepare
an estimate. The main problem with this method of estimating is that the
estimator makes a bad mistake, typically by not seeing, underestimating, or even
ignoring any dif®culties that may arise due to a peculiar product shape. The
mold designer will then not use these sketches, but will come up with a proper
mold design, which could be more (sometimes much more) expensive to build
than was ®rst estimated. In this case, any responsible mold maker (whose
reputation is at stake) will have no choice but to build this mold, even if it will
result in a ®nancial loss. Such losses can then be written off as learning
experience or as research and development expenses.
(2) A good alternative is to invite the participation of the client to share in
advance the cost of designing the new mold before estimating. This is often very
useful if the product is completely new and the projected quantities are
extremely large, or where the product is considered very complicated to mold.
For a certain quoted price, the mold maker will offer to design either concepts of
the mold, or a complete mold. This is also often done for a whole system, that is,
not only a mold but including any product handling and postmolding operation
of the product. After agreeing with the client that the proposed mold and/or the
whole system will do what is needed, the mold and related equipment cost can
be fairly easily estimated on the basis of this preliminary design, and there is
much less risk of too low or too high an estimate. Traditionally, mold makers
add an often quite high safety factor when quoting unfamiliar molds, to cover
the unexpected. If the mold is fully designed, there is no need for such
insurance; this will result in a lower mold and system price, which bene®ts the
client. The cost of the design paid in advance is then considered in the ®nal mold
price. If the client decides not to proceed with the project, at least the mold
maker will have the sometimes considerable design expenses paid.
8.4 Methods of Estimating
(1) One method is to actually break down each and every mold part into its
estimated cost: material, the cost of the various machining steps (milling,
94 Estimating Mold Cost
turning, grinding, EDM, polishing, etc.), the cost of heat treating and other
expenditures for ®nishing in house or by suppliers, the cost of standard
hardware, and the costs of assembling and testing the mold. Include also the cost
of any ®xtures or special tools required in the manufacture of the mold parts.
While some of the costs are usually quite simple to establish from price lists and
records, this method expects that the estimator or assistants have intimate
knowledge of the machining operations involved and the operating times
required for each step. Since molds consist of many different parts, this is
obviously a slow, time-consuming process; however, as long as the estimator
really knows the business well it can yield quite accurate estimates.
(2) The method used most often is to base an estimate on experience from
precedents. If, for example, the mold considered has 8 cavities and there is a
suitable precedent of a 4-cavity mold, it is fairly easy to extrapolate, by
calculating the cost of the new total number of stacks plus the proportional
increase of the cost of the larger mold shoe. Many estimators then add a risk
factor, which, depending on the difference from the precedent and the general
familiarity with the type of mold, may be anywhere up to 50% (or even more) on
top of the estimated cost, depending on the mold maker's practice and policies.
It is best if the estimator works from a ®nished product drawing, with all
dimensions, and where all tolerances are shown. There is usually little risk if the
same mold has been built before, and much risk if there are many unknowns.
This method is good if there are good records of many similar molds made over
the years; there is less risk of repeating earlier mistakes.
(3) ``Ballparking'' should be used with care. It requires real experience and
solid background in mold making. It should also have the proviso that the
quoted price is only a rough estimate and must be con®rmed at a later date when
all data are ready (including tolerances) and after the order is received.
8.5 Mold Cost and Mold Price
The estimator, in essence, prepares only the foreseen cost to be incurred when
building the mold. The cost is the basis for quoting the actual price to the
customer. There will be a standard markup on top of the estimated cost, in
percentage over the cost, or whatever the company's policy is to cover overhead,
expenses, risk (with this mold), and pro®t. Since every mold is different in size,
number of cavities, complexity, and so on, it is usually dif®cult to create a
standard price list for molds, except if many identical molds based on standard
mold components are built on a regular basis.
8.5 Mold Cost and Mold Price 95
There is another management consideration: The plastics mold business is
traditionally up and down, seasonally. In times of low sales, molds may be
quoted at prices lower than the costs determined by the estimator, solely to get
the job, and to keep the shop busy to avoid layoffs. One unfortunate result of this
method is that as soon as the shop is ®lled with such money-losing molds, as the
business picks up again, well-paying jobs may have to wait because the shop is
busy.
96 Estimating Mold Cost
9 Machining, Mold Materials, and
Heat Treatment
9.1 Machining of Mold Components
This section is not meant to be a guide for the actual machining operations, but
gives some descriptions of the evolution of machining in mold making. Earliest
mold components and plates were produced by ®rst sawing the raw blanks from
steel plates of the appropriate thickness bought from the steel mill, with
reciprocating or (endless) band saws. The next step was then squaring and/or
rough machining these blanksÐmostly plates, but also blanks for cavitiesÐon
shapers, with the blank held solidly and a single cutting tool moving back and
forth over the surface. This slow method was abandoned in favor of rough
grinding with special, large grinding machines or milling with large cutting
heads in vertical or horizontal milling machines. Both these methods are now
used extensively. Since this requires large, expensive machines, which smaller
mold makers cannot usually justify economically, a service industry developed,
specializing in the machining of theÐoften largeÐplates; this was the origin of
the mold supply houses such as DME, National, Hasco, and others. While they
made (and still make) any requested size within a certain range, the biggest
advance came with the standardization of sizes (length, width, thickness), which
permitted listing them in catalogues, available for fast delivery. These supply
houses rapidly widened their lines by adding other items that, up to then, the
molders had made themselves, such as leader pins and bushings, ejector pins
and sleeves, and many other mold components and accessories and hardware
that have come into use as the industry expanded.
By standardizing designs of these hardware items it became possible to mass
produce such parts, using the best-suited materials and ®nishes, often using
specialized machines, thereby making parts not only of better quality, but also at
a much lower cost than would be possible in most mold shops, with their limited
equipment. Today hardly any mold maker makes mold hardware, but it took
97
quite a while for some to realize the advantages of the quality, the ready
availability, and the low cost of these mass-produced parts. (Standard sized
screws and nuts have been used for many years.) The supply houses also provide
a service to machine large cutouts and openings in standard plates (and mold
sets) and the bores for leader pins and bushings to their own standard or the
customer's speci®cation, which is very convenient if the mold maker lacks the
large and accurate machines to do it in-house.
For the manufacture of the large mold parts, mostly plates, and large cavity
blocks, there have also been signi®cant changes. Blank plates are usually
purchased, ready rough ground, ¯at and square to standard or special sizes. They
should be somewhat thicker (maybe 0.1 mm, depending on the size of the plate)
than the ®nal dimension, to permit regrinding to the ®nal size, if necessary. This
is especially important after roughing out large volumes of steel, which may
release stresses in the plates, which can result in warpage. The plates (or large
cavity blocks) are machined with common machine tools such as lathes, drilling
and milling machines, and jig bores. These machines have also improved over
the years, becoming much more rigid, allowing the use of better cutting tools,
multiple cutting heads, carbide cutters, higher cutting speeds, and the
introduction of computerized, numerical controls (CNC). This last advance
became possible only after the mold designs improved and began to provide
mold part detail drawings. This also necessitated another manufacturing step,
the introduction of specialists (production planners or engineers), usually
persons with all around experience in machining, to prepare the logical steps in
the machining of the parts, that is, the sequence of operations and the tools to
use. Up to then, this was usually left to the machinist operating the machine
tools; in fact, the old but still widely used practice was that the machinists move
with the work pieces from one machine tool to the next until the mold part is
®nished.
The next step in modernization was to provide the milling machines and so
on with automatic tool changers. The responsibility of the machinists became
mainly the mounting of the work pieces in the machine tool, seeing that all tools
are prepared as speci®ed before installing them in the tool changer, and
generally observing the machine to prevent trouble. This gradually eliminated
the need for the operator to actually work ``hands on'' during the cutting process,
and even allowed the use of one operator for more than one machine tool. The
setup of the work piece in the machine is always critical to ensure the proper
reference to speci®ed edges or tooling holes of the work piece. Some of the
modern machines don't even require this step in the setup: the machine ®rst feels
(reads) the position of the work piece as it is mounted in a jig or ®xture, and then
automatically adjusts all coordinates to this position.
98 Machining, Mold Materials, and Heat Treatment
For smaller stack parts, blanks are still cut from bars or rods and machined
with machine tools such as lathes, drilling and milling machines, and jig bores.
These machines, too, have improved over the years, by becoming more rigid,
using better cutting tools, carbide cutters, higher cutting speeds, and the
introduction of CNC. The ®nish surface and cylindrical grinding of these parts
(where required) have also greatly improved over the years with higher cutting
speeds and by pro®le grinding odd ¯at or round shapes.
Electrical Discharge Machining (EDM) and later the wire EDM have been
major advances; both permit the shaping or cutting of odd or otherwise dif®cult-
to-machine (or even ``impossible'') shapes. A main disadvantage of these
methods is that they are very slow, that is, they remove much less steel than any
chip-removing machine tool, in any given time. They should be used only if
there is no other way to cut a shape. These machines usually run automatically.
The cutting electrodes for EDM are made from special copper alloys, or from
some carbon/graphite composition. They are machined on conventional
machine tools; the problem is that they are wearing and getting smaller during
operation, and two or more electrodes are required from roughing to ®nal sizing.
There are methods of reducing the cost of machining these electrodes, for
example, by casting or molding them to shape; these castings are made to order
by specialists in this ®eld. Note that the ®nished surface created by EDM
depends largely on the amount of steel removal. (The higher the current through
the electrodes, the faster will be the cutting speed.) To produce a ®ne ®nish, the
operation becomes very slow. But even a rough EDM ®nish is often good
enough for some molding surfaces; the type of ®nish must always be speci®ed.
EDM can be used regardless of the hardness of a work piece; the very ®rst EDM
machines were used mainly to remove broken, very hard tools, such as drills and
taps, from a work piece. Since the EDM process may take many hours, one
operator can usually look after a number of machines.
The increasing specialization of the mold-making business had another
impact on the machining methods used. As a result of specialization, and an
increase in demand for multicavity molds, the quantity of similar, often
standardized components (cavities, cores, stripper rings, etc.) can become so
large as to make it possible to introduce fully automatic machines such as
automatic (CNC) lathes combined with other operations, with automatic tool
changing; such parts can now be produced from steel blanks or rods right up to
their pre®nished shape (turning inside and outside, drilling, milling, tapping,
etc.) ready for the next step, such as heat treatment, in minutes rather than hours,
for each part.
Jig grinding, another machining operation, provides precision grinding, both
for location and size, of holes (dowels, etc.), or even nonround shapes in cavity
9.1 Machining of Mold Components 99
work, from diameters as small as 2 mm (0.060 inch). Large, cylindrical shapes
can be honed, a practice used for many years in accurate machine building. Both
these operations require special, expensive equipment and are often subcon-
tracted to specialists.
Deep hole drilling, also called gun drilling, is a relatively late addition to the
mold-making business; it originated in the manufacture of long bores in guns.
Special drill bits are used either in attachments to lathes or in special deep hole
drilling machines. The process allows the drilling of straight, very deep holes,
without the problems of ``wandering'' encountered with the conventional twist
drills. The cutting face of the drill bit is lubricated with pressurized coolant
through the center of the bit, and the chips are ¯ushed out along the outside of
the bit. (See also ME, Chapter 22.) Holes as long as 2 m or even longer, and
diameters as small as 8 mm can be drilled fast, and without any signi®cant
deviations from the intended straight path. This is of particular importance when
drilling cooling and pressure±air channels in large plates, but it is also important
for much shorter and smaller-diameter holes often required in cavity and core
cooling circuits or in side cores.
Polishing is an important phase in the mold making process. Traditionally, it
is done by hand, which is a long, tedious, and therefore expensive process. In the
early days, polishing was sometimes farmed out, usually low-paid women who
did the polishing at home. Later on, the speci®cations for polishing were closely
scrutinized: is it really necessary to polish this surface? Is the ®nish as it comes
from the milling machine or grinder good enough? Some plastics require good
polish, others not. Often, only some areas need good or even exceptional polish,
for appearance or for the intended use of the product. By being critical, much
time can been saved in this operation. It is up to the mold designer to specify
where and how ®ne to polish. Some of the polishing operations that used to be
done manually are now done by automatic machines; the operator mounts the
work piece and the machine does the rest. Other, handheld machines, do the
reciprocating motion required for the polishing stone or diamond paste. Flat
faces are very dif®cult to polish while maintaining their true ¯atness, which is
especially important if the product requires optical clarity without refraction. In
such cases, the use of lapping equipment may be required, in-house or at a
specialist, and the mold must then be designed so that the ¯at surface (of the
cavity or core) can be accessed when using a lapping machine. This usually
means providing the cavity or core with inserts that can be easily lapped.
Hobbing is another method of making small cavities, such as for bottle caps
or other, often odd-shaped forms. A male punch in the shape of the outside of
the molded product (including shrinkage allowance for the plastic) is pushed
with great force into a soft steel blank. Obviously, the punch must be very hard
and strong; the force is on the order of thousands of tons. The making of the
100 Machining, Mold Materials, and Heat Treatment
hobs and the actual hobbing is done by hobbing specialists, who have the
necessary skills and equipment. Around the middle of the 20th century, and
later, it was quite common to use this method for multicavity molds. The main
advantage is that one punch, while dif®cult to make, can be used for as many
cavities as 30±60, which are then all identical. If, for example, the product has a
dif®cult shape, ornamental ribs or embossings, and even lettering and
escutcheons, it is easier to do it once on the outside of a male part, rather
than inside of many cavities. Also, the polish on the hob is always perfectly
reproduced. If the hob is well polished, so will be the cavities made from it, and
will not require additional polishing. By necessity, the steel of the blank must be
soft enough to permit the process; but this is too soft to serve for a high-
production mold. The blank, after hobbing, must be rough machined on the
outside and then carburized and hardened. Because the steel will slightly grow
and possibly move in the hardening process, the hard blank must then be ground
to ®t the bores in the cavity plate. These are all long and expensive operations;
with better machining methods, and especially with the advent of EDM, where
the ®nal shape of the product can be easily created in the already hardened but
otherwise ®nished cavity blank, the hobbing process is rarely used today.
Electroforming is another method of making cavities, usually for small and
long shapes, such as fountain pen barrels. A mandrel of the shape of the cavity
wall acts as the electrode in a nickel electrolyte bath. Nickel is slowly deposited
on the mandrel until it reaches a desired thickness of about 2 to 3 mm (0.080 to
0.120 inch); the blank is then stripped off the mandrel. The ®nish of the cavity
wall is an exact replica of the ®nish of the mandrel, so no further polishing is
required. The blank must then be machined on the outside to ®t a cavity retainer.
This method is best done by specialists in this ®eld. It is slow and quite
expensive, but sometimes the only way to produce a cavity.
Computerized molecular build-up is a new electrochemical approach to
building small, intricate cavities or cores. A computer reads the mold part
drawings three dimensionally and builds up, layer by layer, the molecules of the
desired mold material until the complete shape is created. This process is still in
development and the author knows of no actual molds built, to date.
9.2 Materials Selection
Production molds are almost always made from steel, both for the mold shoe
and the cavities, except for certain mold parts where requirements for better heat
conductivity suggests the use of beryllium±copper alloys. Sometimes bronzes or
9.2 Materials Selection 101
even rigid plastics are used for cams and areas where moving parts cannot be
lubricated, or must not be for sanitary reasons. Experimental molds may use
softer materials such as aluminum, copper alloys, or even special, metal-®lled
epoxy-type mixtures, or other materials; they will not be discussed further.
The types of steels used depend on the requirements for each application.
Throughout this text it has often been said that the designer must always keep
costs and planned productivity of the mold in mind. This will often determine
the selection of the right steel for each mold component. There are two points to
be aware of: (1) the material (mostly steel) represents about 10±15% of the total
mold cost and (2) steel costs vary widely, depending on the annual requirement
of the mold makerÐthe higher the requirements, or at least, the more volume is
contracted to purchase over a certain period, typically, one year, the lower the
base cost of the steel. Also, the blank size has signi®cant bearing on the cost. Per
unit of mass, large pieces are cheaper than small ones. In addition, there are
weight, cutting, and other charges, so that even though the base price may
appear to be low, by the time the piece is cut and delivered, the price is much
higher. It is always worthwhile to contact a steel sales person and get all the
details about steel pricing. In general, steels, particularly mold and tool steels,
are sold by brand names, different for each steel mill, but it is better to specify
steels by their generic names or numbers. In general, there is little or no
difference between steels of the same speci®cation originating from different
suppliers. However, new mold steels are constantly developed for ``better''
characteristics, and it may become necessary to reevaluate and update the lists of
steels used by the designers from time to time.
9.2.1 Steel Properties
Earlier molds used mild steels even for stack parts, but they did not last for long
production runs. Mold makers were gradually switching to the types of hardened
steels that were used in tool and die making; however, these steels were often too
brittle or otherwise unsuitable for mold applications, so the steel industry began
to develop steels speci®cally designed for the plastics industry. The important
features for mold makers are essentially as shown below.
(1) Tensile (or compressive) strength. This is important for long life of the
components as they are subjected to high stresses within the mold,
particularly those created by high injection pressures and large
clamping forces.Tensile strength Compressive strength
102 Machining, Mold Materials, and Heat Treatment
(2) Toughness. This is especially important for long, slender cores and
inserts subjected to side forces de¯ecting them during injection.
(3) Wear resistance. Wear results from plastic abrasion during injection,
and mostly wear from mold parts rubbing against each other.
(4) Hot hardness. This is of special importance for hot runner
components, but also for molds for some plastics that are molded
at high temperatures. Note that many hardened tool steels start to
anneal at temperatures lower than the melt temperatures sometimes
required for injection.
(5) Corrosion resistance. Some plastics attack (corrode) steels and other
mold materials. In a high-humidity environment, molds corrode (rust)
because of the high water content in the air. In all such circumstances,
the mold parts and plates should be chrome or nickel plated, which
can be quite expensive, especially when considering the often high
handling costs where the plating is performed by outside suppliers.
These stack parts and plates can also be made from stainless steel,
which is more expensive than other steels, butÐconsidering the
overall cost connected with chrome platingÐthe difference may not
be that big, especially if the stainless steels can be bought in large
volume.Chromie plated Nickel plated
(6) Thermal conductivity. This can be important with high-speed molds.
However, keep in mind that, in many cases, good cooling can also be
achieved with steel by using a better layout of the cooling channels,
and thus avoiding the use of the softer copper alloys, which require
more upkeep than steel.
(7) Ease of hobbing. See Section 9.1 about hobbing. Hobbing is not
much used today.
(8) Ease of machining. This is an important consideration. The addition
of certain alloying elements to the steel makes it much easier to cut
chips; this can make a big difference in the time and the cost of
machining.
(9) Ease of polishing. Some steels are not well suited for polishing and
will not permit or maintain the high surface polish often required.
Don't forget, however, that high polish is often not required.
(10) Ease of nitriding. Nitriding is a surface treatment applied on top of an
already well-hardened and otherwise ®nished part to provide a very
hard surface. It is used mostly to improve the wear characteristic of
the steel. To nitride on top of a soft base does not make any sense: the
hard (nitrided) surface will collapse under any heavy load because the
supporting steel is soft.
9.2 Materials Selection 103
(11) Ease of welding. In some cases, it may be important to be able to
repair a worn mold part by welding. While this, in general, is not a
good practice and should be done only in exceptional cases, it may
permit a ``quick ®x'' to keep a mold running until it can be properly
repaired.
(12) Cost. We stated earlier that material constitutes a substantial portion
of the mold cost, but cost alone must never be the reason to select any
steel. There is only one goal for the mold maker and designer: to
produce the best mold for the speci®ed purpose, that is, the mold that
will produce the lowest cost of the product for the speci®ed
production requirements.
Tables 9.1 and 9.2 are intended to give the designer an overview of some
common mold materials. The data are approximate, and may vary somewhat
from one manufacturer to another. More about molds steels and application
examples can be found in ME, Chapter 16.
Table 9.2 shows the average of some of the properties of the above materials
that are of interest to the mold designer.
By studying the various steels, it can be seen that all steels have only a few
of the characteristics required for a certain purpose; typically, a steel may be
Table 9.1 Comparison Chart of a Few Selected Mold Materials
Item Type AISI
Designation
DIN
Material
No.
Steel Code Recommended
Hardness
(Rc)
1 Prehardened 4140 1.7225 42CrMo4 30±35
2 P20 1.2330 40CrMnMo7 30±35
3 Stainless steel
Prehardened 420SS 1.2083 X42Cr13 30±35
4 Carburizing steels P5 59±61
5 P6 1.2735 58±60
6 Oil hardening O1 1.2510 106WCr6 58±62
7 Air hardening H13 1.2344 X40CrMoV5 1 49±51
8 A2 1.2363 X100CrMoV5 1 56±60
9 D2 1.2379 X155CrVMo12 1 56±58
10 Stainless steel (SS) 420SS 1.2083 X42Cr13 50±52
11 High-speed M2 1.3343 S-6-5-2 60±62
12 Beryllium±copper BeCu 28±32
a
a
It is customary to indicate hardness of machinery steels and bronzes in the Brinell scale. The
above chart, however, uses equivalent Rockwell ``C'' values to give a better comparison with the
hardness of tool steels.
104 Machining, Mold Materials, and Heat Treatment
Table 9.2 Comparison of the Properties of Different Mold Materials
Item Wear
Resistance
Toughness Compressive
Strength
Hot
Hardness
Corrosion
Resistance
Thermal
Conductivity
Hobbability Machinability Polishability Nitriding
ability
Weldability
1 F VG F F P G P G G F F
2 F E F F F G P G VG G F
3 F E F F G F P F E VG F
4 VG G G G F F E E VG VG E
5 VG VG G G F F VG E VG VG VG
6 VG F E G P G G VG VG F F
7 G VG VG VG F F G E VG E G
8 E F E VG F F F VG VG VG F
9 E F VG VG F F F F G E P
10 G G G VG VG F F VG E VG G
11 E P E E F F F F G E F
12 F P P F G E E E E N/A VG
Note. Item numbers 1±12 refer to the material types in Table 9.1. P, poor; F, fair; G, good; VG, very good; E, excellent.
9
.
2
M
a
t
e
r
i
a
l
s
S
e
l
e
c
t
i
o
n
1
0
5
very tough but not be very hard or it may not readily accept nitriding. Therefore,
the designer will always have to ®nd the most suitable compromise when
selecting a steel for a mold part. Some very expensive steels are occasionally
used in molds: tungsten carbides are very hard and three times as stiff as steel,
but also very brittle and dif®cult to produce mold parts; and ``maraging'' steels
are tough, hard, and very stable steels that do not move in the hardening process.
New steels are constantly being developed by steel manufacturers, with better
properties than before, for general mold making and for new applications, to
keep pace with the development of new plastics and with new methods of use in
mold making.
9.3 Heat Treatment
We will not go into details of the metallurgy and the behavior of steels during
heat treatment and the various hardening methods. Basically, the steel structure
of certain steels can be changed by heating and subsequent chilling of the work
piece to increase the hardness of the steel from a hardness (usually soft) suitable
for machining to the hardness that will provide good working life of the steel
under repeated exposure to heat, high pressure, and wear. In general, only steels
with a carbon content of at least 0.35% can be hardened. So-called mild steels,
with lower carbon content (usually in the range of 0.1±0.3%), cannot be
hardened. However, to use these relatively inexpensive steels for mold parts that
need good hardness, the surface of such mild steels canÐafter machining to
their shapeÐbe provided with a carbon-rich skin by the process of
``carburizing,'' that is, subjecting the work piece at high heat, for about 24 to
48 hours, to a carbon-rich atmosphere. This causes the surface to absorb carbon
to a depth of usually between 0.5 and 1.5 mm (0.020 and 0.060 inch). The work
piece can then be hardened like through-hardening tool steels, by heating to a
high-temperature, quenching in water or oil, and then tempering (reheating to a
lower temperature than before quenching) and ®nally cooling in air.
At the beginning of the ``plastics revolution,'' most molds were made from
these mild steels, and special alloys were designed to provide better
polishability. The advantage of these steels is their relatively low cost, ease of
machining, and availability. The disadvantages are the costs for carburizing and
the subsequent heat treatment: during carburizing, the steel often distorts and
even grows slightly. The art in using these steels is to foresee such changes and
to allow enough material for grinding after heat treatment to arrive at the ®nal
106 Machining, Mold Materials, and Heat Treatment
mold dimensions. Since the carbon content diminishes with its depth, which is
dependent on the time required for carburizing, the danger is that too much
grinding allowance can make the hardened skin disappear during grinding, and
in such areas the surface hardness is then as soft as the base steel. Tool and mold
steels are ``through-hardened,'' and the amount of grinding to size will not affect
the surface hardness. For these reasons, over the years, mild mold steels have
been used less and less.
Today, with the development of better machining methods and more rugged
machine tools, larger mold stack parts are made mostly from prehardened mold
steels, which are supplied from the steel mills and the supply houses at a
hardness of about Rc 30±33. This allows the ®nish machining of most parts
without the need for any heat treatment after machining. Note that very large
mold parts may require three steps for ®nishing: (1) premachining to remove the
bulk of the outside and any large openings or cutouts, which may cause stresses
within the steel to distort the work piece; (2) the piece should then be stress
relieved, before (3) ®nish machining to the desired close dimensions. Smaller
mold stack parts are also often made from prehardened blanks, or, for high
production molds, from through-hardened mold or tool steels. After hardening,
it may still be necessary to grind or otherwise machine the work piece to the
®nal shape before polishing. Heat treatment is usually done by specialists, thus
requiring shipping of the parts to and from them, adding time and cost to the
heat treatment. By standardizing a small number of different mold steels
requiring hardening, costs can be reduced; for larger mold makers, this may
make it economical to provide in-house heat treatment.
9.3 Heat Treatment 107
Appendix 1 CAD/CAM (Computer-
Assisted Design±Computer-
Assisted Manufacturing)
As stated before, this book is not about the actual technique of designing
(delineating) molds, but about the logic and reasons behind a successful mold
design and the questions the designer must consider and answer at every step of
the design process. Computers now play an important part in this process,
especially if there are many precedents accessible to the designer to be used for
new designs and if there is a large collection of standards that can be accessed
from computer memories without the need for tediously drawing and redrawing,
from simple parts to complicated subassemblies. Also, by using special
programs, many calculations can be performed rapidly and accurately, and
newly created mold designs can be easily checked for ef®ciency of plastics ¯ow,
cooling, strength of materials, cam motions, and so on.
Because there are so many design programs, the designer usually starts by
redrawing the customer's information, which may have been submitted as hard
copy (prints) or electronically, but originating from a different system than the
one used by the designer. Once the to be molded part (the product) is drawn and
dimensioned to the designer's shop rules, a program will be used to add the mold
shrinkage to established rules. A constant factor may be used for the product, or
different shrinkages may be applicable, as explained earlier in this book.
The designer will now go through the motions as explained earlier, either
designing ``from scratch,'' or searching the ®les for a suitable precedent. If a
good precedent is found, it can now be merged with the new product drawing
and the mold can be designed. Once completed in principle, various programs
can be used to check selected areas (plates, cavities, etc.) for physical strength
and to check with other programs the expected ef®ciency of ®lling the mold
cavities, gate location and sizes, runner sizes, the cooling layout, and so on. Note
that all results from using these programs depend on the accuracy of the data
108
provided, such as reasonable assumptions as to temperatures, pressures, times,
and so on.
Once the mold drawings are ®nished, they are transferred to the
manufacturing group. By using related, compatible CAM programs, which are
often developed in-house, and the input of experienced machinist/programmers,
the manufacturing group will determine the best tools to use for the selected
machine tools and the appropriate tool paths for each mold part for each tool and
for each machine tool.
The following is a list of better known and widely used CAD and CAM
programs.
CAD/CAM Programs
Autocad, Autodesk Canada Inc. (mostly for PCs)
90 Allstate Parkway, Suite 201, Markham, ON, Canada L3R 6H3
905-946-0928
Unigraphics, Unigraphics Solutions
2550 Matheson Blvd., Mississauga, ON, Canada L4W 4Z1
905-212-4500
Proengineer, Parametric Technologies Co.
128 Technology Dr., Waltham, MA 02453, USA
781-398-5000
Fluid Flow Programs
CADMOULD, Simcon Inc. (mold¯ow, cooling, shrinking and warpage)
10914 N 39th. St., Suite B-4, Vancouver, WA 98682
888-754-8628
MOLDFLOW, Mold¯ow Corp. (mold ¯ow, cooling)
91 Hartwell Ave., Lexington, MA 02421, USA
781-674-0085
FEMAP Enterprise (¯uid ¯ow, all ¯uids)
PO 1172, Exton, PA 19341, USA
610-458-3660
CAD/CAM (Computer-Assisted Design±Computer-Assisted Manufacturing) 109
FIDAP, SPRC (¯uid ¯ow)
1155 North Service Rd., Suite 11, Oakville, ON, Canada L6M 3E3
905-465-1733
(partner for Fluid Dynamics International, 708-491-0200)
Mechanical Stresses
ANSIS Mechanical Dynamics Ltd.
400 Carlingview Dr. Toronto, ON, Canada M9W 5X9
416-674-2144
AL GOR
150 Beta Dr., Pittsburg, PA 15288, USA
412-967-2700
110 CAD/CAM (Computer-Assisted Design±Computer-Assisted Manufacturing)


111
This page has been reformatted by Knovel to provide easier navigation.
Index


Index Terms Links

2-plate molds 14 57 87
3-plate molds 58 87
accessories 97
accumulator 39 40
- package 39
accuracy 27
adaptor ring 36
air assist 23 37
air ejection 23 37
air-operated actuators 39
alignment 27 64 73
- features 80
amorphous plastics 26
angle pins 52
appearance 58 64
assembly drawing 2 45 80
assembly drawings 2
assumptions 109
automatic molding 25
auxiliary actuators 79
auxiliary controls 37
availability 76
backing up 52
backup 55
balanced cavity 54
balanced runners 64
ballooning 81
bending 75
beryllium-copper 70 101
beverage crates 48
Bill of Materials 45 81
blades 21
blow downs 39
blower 40
bosses 66
breakers 41
bushings 27 45 97
CAD 2 109
CAM 109
carburizing 106
cavity 11
- construction 54
- shape 11
- space 9 16 38


112
This page has been reformatted by Knovel to provide easier navigation.
Index Terms Links

- spacing 59
- walls 16
center gated 58 79
chase 42 44 55
chrome plated 103
circuit breakers 42
clamp stroke 37
clamping force 13 15 16 37
CNC 98 99
cold and hot runner molds 41 60
cold runner 14 38 56 57 63
64
collapsible cores 51
color changes 57 59
composite cavities 55
composite cones 55
compressibility 26
compression 75
compressive strength 102
computer 5 19 108
conductivity 70
containers 83
contamination 40 58
continuous vents 67
coolant connections 72 79 80
cooling 18 19 69
- channels 68 103
- circuit 72
- lines 71
- lines layout 80
- water supply 41
copper alloys 103
core 11 55
- backing plate 87
- construction 56
- cooling 87 90
- shift 56 64
corrosion resistance 103
cost-effective 42
counter bore 45
cross hatching 81
crystalline plastics 26
cup-shaped product 48
cycle times 34
deep hole drilling 100
deep-draw containers 37
deflection 75
degrade 63


113
This page has been reformatted by Knovel to provide easier navigation.
Index Terms Links

design 6
- review 73
- rules 9
detail drawings 45 80 98
diamond paste 100
die casting 3
dowels 72 75
draft 37
- angles 49
drawings 46
drinking cups 83
drooling 59
economics 3
EDM 99
ejection 22 68 78
ejector pins 45 67 97
ejector plate return 68 77
ejector stroke 37
electric power 41
electrical discharge machining (EDM) 99
electroforming 101
electroless nickel 43
electronic drafting 5
estimator 92
Euro 36
experimental molds 102
experimental setup 34
expertise 93
family molds 79
fatigue 68 75 76
Filtered air 40
Fitting 2
Flash 13 74
Flashing 74
Floating mounting 56
Floating platen 78
Flow capacity 20
forces 75
gate 14
- location 64
- retainer plate 85
- size 63
grain structure 78
grinding allowance 107
guide pins 85
gun drilling 100
handling the mold 31
hardness 76


114
This page has been reformatted by Knovel to provide easier navigation.
Index Terms Links

hardware 76 97
heat 69
- barrier 89
- controllers 41
- expansion 88
- loss 63 64
- losses 59
- treatment 97 106 107
heaters 41 59
high shrinking plastics 83
hobbing 100 103
holes 48 77
horn pins 52
hose connections 72
hot hardness 103
hot runner 38 63 79
- molds 41 59 64 87
- manifold 63
housings 83
hydraulic supply 40
in-house testing 2
injection blow molding 22
injection molding machine 7
injection pressure 13 15 17 37 39
55 59 74 75
injection speed 38 39
injection unit 78
insulated runner 62
insulated runner molds 62
interface points 80
internal threads 50
jig grinding 99
L/t ratio 65
laminar 19
land 16 66
lapping 100
large production 78
latches 79
leader pins 27 45 97
leaking 74
learning experience 94
legal implications 47
locating ring 35
low-cost mold 44
lubrication 77
machine ejector 36
machine nozzle 14
machine platen layout 79


115
This page has been reformatted by Knovel to provide easier navigation.
Index Terms Links

machine specifications 35
machinery steel 43
machining 97 103
machinists 45
manifold 59 64
- heaters 41 64
maximum clamp force 17
melt 38
- Flow 66
- temperature 17 25 59
- temperatures 103
mold 9
- clamps 36
- cost 4 92 95
- designers 1
- drawings 45
- hardware 45
- maker 1
- materials 69 74 97
- mounting 36 80
- plates 74
- price 92 95
- release agents 25
- shoes 42 44
- steels 43 102
- supply houses 97
molding cycle 38 70
molecular build-up 101
mounting plate 83
moving cavity 85
moving platens 78
multicavity molds 11 30 31 71
multilevel 78
multiple gates 56
nameplate 17
nickel plated 103
nitriding 103
notches 77
notes on drawings 47
nozzle radius 36
number of cavities 10
number of gates 37
number of screws 73
open gates 59
overcaps 58
parallel 20 84
parting line 12 51
path of least resistance 21 66


116
This page has been reformatted by Knovel to provide easier navigation.
Index Terms Links

plain bottom 83
plastic fronts 18
plastic inventory 63
plasticizing capacity 38 78
plastics Flow 64
plate cooling 22
plate deflection 68
plate thickness 68
plate supports 80
platen size 35
plates 76 97
polishing 100 103
polishing stone 100
postmolding operations 3
power consumption 41
power failure 41
precedents 2 93 108
preferred number 11
prehardened mold steels 107
preload 29 49 52 55 73
79 91
press fits 74
pressure air 39
pressure drop 16 63
product design 33
product drawing 95
production 34 75 87
productivity 18 37 42 68 69
projected area 15 37 78
projections 48
protection of the cores 28
quenching 106
quick mold change 36
quotation 92
reentrant bottom 83 84
records 93
regrinding 58 60
requirements 34
residence time 25 60
retractable core 51
reversed Flow 65
ribs 50 66
risk factor 95
robots 23 75
rollers 52
runner 14
- mold 80
- systems 56 63


117
This page has been reformatted by Knovel to provide easier navigation.
Index Terms Links

safety factor 77 94
safety gate 25
screw caps 58
screws 45 72 80
self-cleaning 68
self-degating 57 58
sequence of operation 47
serial 20
shallow engraving 49
shot capacity 38 78
shot size 37
shrinkage 11 26 108
shrinking 70
shut height 36 78
side cores 3 13 37 48 49
52 55 90
side forces 13
side wall 48
significant cross section 46 48
single-cavity molds 56
single-level 78
sink marks 21
sketches 94
sketching 5
sleeves 21 45 67 97
slender core pins 21
slender cores 56 103
slots 50
snap 49
specialists 4 107
specialization 93
SPI 36
split cavities 49 52
split molds 13
splits 90
spot vents 67
springs 78
sprue 14 64
- bushing 35 59
- extension 79
stack 42 55 71 80
- layout 48
- molds 78
stainless steels 43 103
standard hardware 2
standard mold components 95
standard mold shoes 43
standardizing 107


118
This page has been reformatted by Knovel to provide easier navigation.
Index Terms Links

standards 108
start-up 72
stationary platen 78
steel sizes 34
steels 74 101
strength of material 76
stress relieved 107
stripper plate 23 87
stripper rings 23 68 74 75 87
stripping 50
stroke 78
support pillars 68 84
surface definition 17 18 64
surface finish 77
symmetry 10
taper lock 27 29 30
taper pins 27 31
tapers 74
technical products 87
tensile strength 102
tension 75
test machines 2
test report 2 82
thermal conductivity 103
thermocouples 42
thin-wall molding 77
thin-walled 56 71
tie bar 79
- clearances 35
title block 81
tolerances 2 27 33 34 95
torsion 75
toughness 76 103
T-slots 84
turbulent 19 71
two-stage ejection 51
undercuts 49 50
universal mold shoes 44
unscrewing 50 75
valved gates 59
variable shrinkage 26
vent 65
- channels 66
- gap 66
- grooves 66
- pins 67
venting 18 65
vertical split 48


119
This page has been reformatted by Knovel to provide easier navigation.
Index Terms Links

views 46 80
virgin plastics 60
viscosity 16 17
wall thickness 17
wear 30 75 77 103
wedge 30 74 76
- action 75
weld lines
welding 66
wet area 104
wire EDM 72
yield strength 99
77

The Author: Herbert Rees, 248386-5 Sideroad (moro), RR#5 Orangeville, Ontario, Canada, L9W 2Z2 Distributed in the USA and in Canada by Hanser Gardner Publications, Inc. 6915 Valley Avenue, Cincinnati, Ohio 45244-3029, USA Fax: (513) 527-8950 Phone: (513) 527-8977 or 1-800-950-8977 Internet: http://www.hansergardner.com Distributed in all other countries by Carl Hanser Verlag Postfach 86 04 20, 81631 Munchen, Germany È Fax: ‡49 (89) 98 12 64 Internet: http:aawww.hanser.de The use of general descriptive names, trademarks, etc., in this publication, even if the former are not especially identi®ed, is not to be taken as a sign that such names, as understood by the Trade Marks and Merchandise Marks Act, may accordingly be used freely by anyone. While the advice and information in this book are believed to be true and accurate at the date of going to press, neither the authors nor the editors nor the publisher can accept any legal responsibility for any errors or omissions that may be made. The publisher makes no warranty, express or implied, with respect to the material contained herein. Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data Rees, Herbert, 1915± Understanding injection mold designaHerbert Rees. p. cm. Includes bibliographical references and index. ISBN 1-56990-311-5 (softback) 1. Injection molding of plastics. I. Title. TP1150.R45 2001 668.4'12±dc21 00-054085

Die Deutsche Bibliothek - CIP-Einheitsaufnahme Rees, Herbert: Understanding injection mold designaHerbert Rees, -Munich : Hanser; Cincinnati:Hanser Gardner, 2001 (Hanser understanding books) ISBN 3-446-21587-5 All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying or by any information storage and retrieval system, without permission in writing from the publisher. # Carl Hanser Verlag, Munich 2001 Typeset in the U.K. by Techset Composition Ltd., Salisbury Printed and bound in Germany by Druckhaus ``Thomas Muntzer'', Bad Langensalza È

v

Introduction to the Series
In order to keep up in today's world of rapidly changing technology we need to open our eyes and ears and, most importantly, our minds to new scienti®c ideas and methods, new engineering approaches and manufacturing technologies and new product design and applications. As students graduate from college and either pursue academic polymer research or start their careers in the plastics industry, they are exposed to problems, materials, instruments and machines that are unfamiliar to them. Similarly, many working scientists and engineers who change jobs must quickly get up to speed in their new environment. To satisfy the needs of these ``newcomers'' to various ®elds of polymer science and plastics engineering, we have invited a number of scientists and engineers, who are experts in their ®eld and also good communicators, to write short, introductory books which let the reader ``understand'' the topic rather than to overwhelm himaher with a mass of facts and data. We have encouraged our authors to write the kind of book that can be read pro®tably by a beginner, such as a new company employee or a student, but also by someone familiar with the subject, who will gain new insights and a new perspective. Over the years this series of Understanding books will provide a library of mini-tutorials on a variety of fundamental as well as technical subjects. Each book will serve as a rapid entry point or ``short course'' to a particular subject and we sincerely hope that the readers will reap immediate bene®ts when applying this knowledge to their research or work-related problems. E.H. Immergut Series Editor

vii Preface During the last ®fty years I have been almost continuously working with molders. by recalling older complete or partial designs from the CAD memory. With the advent of computer aided designing (CAD). and why they were doing it. for similar molding machines. it has become often so simple that the mold design can be performed almost automatically. and in doing so learning the intricacies of designing of molds for many different products. regardless of whether the molds used as ``precedents'' were for comparable conditions. but also in Europe and Japan. Another problem I saw was that in many mold making shops. and expanding on it. simple compression molds to highly sophisticated injection molds. the machinists. as consultant to those in developing countries who only recently started to seriously compete in the huge ®eld of manufacturing molded plastic products. you may be able to produce good . from the early. but also in earlier years. During my discussions with these newcomers to the ®eld. and ®nally supply all pertinent information to the mold maker. and especially in the last 15 years. I have often wondered how many of them really understood what they were doing when it comes to planning for and designing a new mold. for the same plastic. the technique of making mold designs and drawings has become much easier to handle. or for a similar production requirement. at the lowest cost. when talking to ``old hands'' in this ®eld. in the shortest posssible time. and creating a new mold by just changing some dimensions. In many cases I believe they took simply ``the easy way out'' by just imitating what they saw in other molds. If you are brought up in this environment. and in some cases where products are similar. mold makers and mold designers. I have worked with them not only in North America. rather than understanding that the job expected of a mold designer is to consider possible alternatives of how the planned mold could look. some designers were more intent on making ``pretty pictures''. here and everywhere. and asssemblers. then make a practical and most suitable layout of a mold to produce the best quality product. by just following the prompts of the computer.

but you will be hard pressed to generate a good mold for which there is no precedent on ®le. I undertook to write this book ``Understanding Injection Mold Design'' essentially to explain what is really important in the design of an injection mold. can be created even if there is no precedent. in my experience. when considering the many possible choices before settling on a ®nal concept. when. Also. and that there may be a better way than the ®rst one proposed. The designer must never forget. etc. Herbert Rees. best suitable for the application. ON .viii Preface designs. based on the available good precedents. it is always cheaper to change a design layout even if it adds some design time. and to frequently ask why. how. It is meant to be used to guide the designer to think. than to change (re-machine or modify) a poorly designed but already built mold. Orangeville. so that a good mold. the greatest obstacle to creating a good design has always been the reluctance of the designer to acknowledge the possibility that he or she may be wrong.. where.

also. etc. Gradually. then by assembling and testing the molds himself (at the molder). and the boss of such shops often worked closely with the molder. both for the use of machinists in the shop and for assembling of the mold. more suitable for the ever increasing variety of products. mold designers became the middlemen between the molder (the customer). who understood better what was required. who were trying to expand into new ®elds. the materials suppliers were not always knowledgeable enough. Eventually. They were skilled in building accurate steel tools and dies. The mold maker was still essentially an expert in machining and assembling. At the same time. But over the years. few existing plastics molding materials. These increased demands of the traditional tool and die maker generated high specialization. how the mold should look. often crudely. and the boss. many new and better plastics were developed. After the Second World War. there were no ``mold designers. and quite satisfactory for the (by today's standards.1 1 Introduction I believe that a short history of injection molding will help in the understanding of what is required from a mold designer. The molder was instrumental in the operating features the mold should have. and was often involved even in the selection of mold materials (steels.). built well-functioning molds. The molder sketched. at that time. and depended on feedback from the molders regarding performance of the plastics they supplied. The services of draftsmen or designers now became necessary.'' When a mold was needed. when plastics technology was beginning. all this information required to build a mold had to be shown on paper. by closely supervising the machinists as they built the mold components. and the plastics suppliers. the mold shop. each often requiring different molding parameters. The designers and sometimes the molders attended meetings and . low) productivity expected from such molds. and the ``mold maker'' was born. it was produced by artisans in tool and die maker shops. to relieve the boss from these time-consuming chores. and depended on the input from plastics materials suppliers on how to process these materials. These were usually suitable for the. the demand for increases in productivity became a high priority.

'' rather than going into the details of the design. Eventually. In earlier days. and the mold maker reverted to just building the mold. It may have been the right . It focuses on the ``why. ideally. the ``how. But often. and perhaps even the advanced designer. and revisions are necessary. even though the cost of testing is added to the mold cost. quite often. and the boss returned to running the shop and was rarely involved in design problems. and then shipping the mold back for adjustments if required. molds would be tested only at the molder. in addition to complete assembly drawings. The molds could then be assembled by strictly following the assembly drawing. every mold part was detailed (except standard hardware items). A complete. This shipping back and forth was costly and time-consuming. comprehensive test report issued before the mold is shipped will greatly assist the molder when starting up the new mold. especially if the new mold does not function or perform as wanted. designers do not really understand why they copied what they did. but.'' Quite often designers do things mechanically (especially with a CAD [computer-assisted design] program). so that any skilled machinist would be able to produce these components. because this is where the most experience is needed. following designs or methods used before. often interrupting his production if he had no suitable machine available at the time. with some ground rules for designing injection molds. only assembly drawings were produced. many mold makers acquired molding machines of various sizes for in-house testing. and to apply their newly learned knowledge to the design of all molds. The mold was then ready for testing and production. At ®rst. gradually. complete with appropriate tolerances. The investment in test machines proved not an expense but a saving for all parties involved. The mechanical approach can be useful and time saving as long as the precedent (the earlier example) is similar to the current job.2 Introduction seminars to learn about new plastics and their expected processing requirements. it had to be done not only once but several times. without questioning whether they are using the best approach to the problem. The mold designer must be involved in the testing of every mold. everything depended on the mold designer. It is important for the designer to insist that the molding technician not make any changes to the mold while it is being tested unless the designer is present. who became solely responsible for the construction and functioning of the molds. rather than shipping the molds to the molder. without need for adjustments (``®tting''). with the more important dimensions shown. per instructions given by the designer and as shown on drawings. the only way future designs can bene®t from these experiences is if the problems and solutions are properly recorded and the changes are documented on the drawings before they are made. This book provides the designer student. but gradually.

1. For example. and so on. What designers often do not see is that this is only relative. especially where large quantities are required. such as drilling ®xtures. The designer must always consider the overall picture. but at the present time. but do some postmolding operations for those areas in the design that would require expensive features in the mold. but not for a large one. On the other hand. It is more important to produce the lowest cost of the ®nished molded part. taking into account the cost of material. In some cases.) In the future. packaging. Some of these plastics may require different production methods to arrive at the shapes required. Numerous new plastics have been developed over the last few years for speci®c applications.1 Economics of Mold Design Economics is often overlooked when this subject is taught. and housing. holes could be drilled after molding at an angle to the mold axis rather than designing and building complicated side cores. thermoforming. such as toys. without all the ``bells and whistles'' will be less expensive. electrical equipment. and including the cost of any postmolding equipment. blowing. Molds for low-pressures processing are easier to build than molds for high pressures. molding cost. furniture. similarly. and stamping. a simple mold. i. housewares. the molding of liquid metals such as zinc. other plastics and other methods of processing and shaping them will be developed. but in most cases. the mold should be built with the best mold . Every designer knows that the mold is a large expenditure and that its cost will affect the cost of the molded product. ®lms. in real mass production. where many many millions of parts are expected to be produced. stamping of side wall could avoid a ``split'' mold. and cost of direct labor involved in ®nishing the molded product. if the anticipated production run with the mold is relatively small. electronics. injection molding seems to be the most common and economical method to produce plastic products. extruding. it may be even of economic advantage not to mold a product completely as designed.1 Economics of Mold Design 3 thing for one plastic material. a mold is required to give the product the required form. (There is very little difference between injection molds for plastics and molds for die casting.. clothing. such as injection molds. Some plastics can be shaped by more than one process.1. cameras. Certainly. such as compression and injection molding.e. but not for another. automotive. farming and aircraft components. it may have been suitable for a small production.

The molder will also be more aware of the expected production requirements and may take shortcuts that the mold maker in business would not. There are specialists for thin-wall molding. small gears. Mold Engineering (ME). and Understanding Product Design for Injection Molding (PD). But regardless of what size and type product is injection molded or who designs or builds the mold. Today. This does not mean that pictures of molds cannot be helpful. most molders. but will learn instead the many things that must be considered when designing a mold. large beverage container crates. In this book. will have a negligible effect on the cost per unit. that is. screw-cap making. specialize in certain areas. even though higher. and many others. the basic mold design principles as explained in this book are always the same. I will refer occasionally to three of my earlier books: Understanding Injection Molding Technology (IMT). The molder may forgo some of the ``appearance'' features that would be expected from a reputable mold-making business. preforms for PET bottles.4 Introduction materials and the best mold design features. making molds for selling to a molder or end user. It should also be clear that there is a difference between mold making as part of the molder's operation and mold making as a business. always keeping in mind that the actual mold cost. the designer should not look for pictures (drawings) of existing molds. . but also many mold makers. but every mold is different and some may require a better approach than the older mold depicted. This leads to the specialization of designers for the molds for these applications.

and redrawing part or all of the picture. Of course. the designer must also be familiar with some areas of basic arithmetic and trigonometry. which is much easier to do electronically. both are required to put dimensions on the mold parts so they can be machined.5 2 Starting New in the Mold Design Field The only prerequisite for the beginner is some knowledge of mechanical drawing delineation. whether it is done electronically on a computer (with programs like Autocad) or on the drawing board with pencil. Some of the advantages of electronic drafting are the following: (1) Designs of entire. Note the computer is only a tool to the designer. the quality of a design depends entirely on how well the designer understands what is required and what can be made. ultimately. without the need for tedious redrawing.'' In the old days. Also be aware that even the most experienced designer will not always come up with the best design on the ®rst attempt. (4) The computer permits easy transmission of designs to other locations. or portions. the designer uses the eraser. This often necessitates sketching. There is a saying about the difference between a draftsman and a designer: ``the draftsman uses the pencil. but will try out different ideas in the course of the design job. which can be easily and quickly accessed and reproduced in new designs without the need for redrawing them every time they are needed. (2) An up-to-date library of standard mold components and hardware can be established. of earlier built molds can be easily used again by simply copying or modifying some existing design features from the program's memory. erasing. such as in-house manufacturing centers or manufacturers at other addresses. (3) The quality of the drawings produced by a computer printout does not depend on the skilled hand of the designer. the designer made his drawings on paper without much care for the .

this prevents a design of mold parts that may be dif®cult (or even impossible) to produce economically or to put together at assembly. When estimating the total time to build a mold. (This. when the mold is completed. These alternatives should then be discussed. and 15±20% for assembling the mold. the less time is wasted during machining and assembly of the mold. but the time (and emotions) invested in such peer critique are usually outweighed by the bene®ts of arriving at a better mold. to consult with a colleague. It may appear to be time-consuming. after creating a mold layout. even worse. In many cases it is even better to provide two or more different layouts. it was then usually left to draftpersons to produce a good. It is also bene®cial to have someone who knows the actual molding process look at a new layout. . it is good practice for the designer. The important thing is the thought that goes into the design of the mold. allocate approximately 15±20% of the total time for designing and detailing. in fact.) And remember that the better the drawings are when given to the shop (or an outside source). than to ®nd out about it later when steel has been cut or. in general. depends on the shape of the product and the complexity of the mold. someone who is familiar in these areas should be included at such design meetings. This procedure is standard practice in all major design of®ces around the world. Different solutions are always possible to achieve the same end. about 60±70% for machining. all mold designers have their own ideas on how to solve certain design problems. mold designers (especially beginners) may not be familiar with machining and assembly practices. Since. to ensure the best possible design. and the best design or a composite of the various ideas should then be agreed upon. of course. or to arrange a design meeting of peers to discuss the proposed design. readable drawing. To take advantage of various ideas. Time and money can be saved by spending more time during the design stage to consider alternatives and to get the designer involved in the manufacturing process of the mold. than by rushing a job through the design of®ce to save a few hours there.6 Starting New in the Mold Design Field appearance of the resulting picture. and to arrive at the best mold. It is much less expensive to catch an error while it is still in the designing stage.

1 Schematic of an injection molding machine (top view). molding machines. . which contains much basic information on injection molding.000 kN Figure 3. and molds.1) provides         A safe support for the mold The opening and closing motion of the mold halves The clamping force to keep the mold closed while injecting The melted (plasticized) plastic to be injected The injection force to ®ll the mold cavity space The ejection force All necessary sequencing and temperature controls Any additional functions as may be required Molding machines come in many different sizes. to giant machines with 80. from small machines with a few kilonewtons (tons) of clamping force.) The injection molding machine (Fig.7 3 The Basics of an Injection Molding Machine (See also IMT. 3.

All machines can be equipped with a choice of standard injection units. we will explain. suitable for the mold size and output required. At this point. we will not go further into the functions of the molding machine.8 The Basics of an Injection Molding Machine (8800 US tons). for very large products. when required. . When discussing the injection mold. how the functions of the machine and the mold are interrelated.

1 The Basic Mold Mold Cavity Space The mold cavity space is a shape inside the mold.2. we are looking for permanent molds that can be used over and . 4.1). ``excavated'' (by machining the mold material) in such a manner that when the molding material (in our case. and household articles. Molds have been used to make tools.9 4 Understanding the Basics of the Injection Mold Design Rules 4. convenience. The principle of a mold is almost as old as human civilization. Such molds. can be used only once because the mold is destroyed to release the product after it has solidi®ed. But occasionally. Today.2 4. and molding. by pouring liquid metals (iron. mold making. These rules and standard practices are based on logic. bronze) into sand forms. therefore. In this text.1 There are many rules for designing molds. which are still used today in foundries. past experience. For designing. bells. the plastic) is forced into this space it will take on the shape of the cavity space and. 4. to new molding and mold materials that may affect these rules. The designer must ever be open to new ideas and methods. the desired product (Fig. it is usually of advantage to follow the rules. it may work out better if a rule is ignored and an alternative way is selected. statues. but the designer will learn only from experience which way to go. and economy. weapons. the most common rules are noted.

2. It takes only little more time to inject several cavities than to inject one. The reason for this is purely economical. a 4-cavity mold requires only (approximately) one-fourth of the machine time of a single-cavity mold. so the mold must be strong enough to resist the injection pressure without deforming. But it may also require a Figure 4. A mold with more cavities is more expensive to build than a single-cavity mold. but (as in our example) not necessarily 4 times as much as a single-cavity mold. particularly molds for larger products. 4. especially large production molds. but many molds. durable materials. Now molds are made from strong. are built with 2 or more cavities (Fig.10 Understanding the Basics of the Injection Mold Figure 4.2 Number of Cavities Many molds. Conversely. In injection molding the (hot) plastic is injected into the cavity space with high pressure. . or from softer aluminum or metal alloys and even from certain plastics where a long mold life is not required because the planned production is small.2 Illustration of basic mold with two cavity spaces. For example. are built for only 1 cavity space (a single-cavity mold). over. with one cavity space. the production increases in proportion to the number of cavities. such as steel. 4.1 Illustration of basic mold.2).

The alternative to the cup shape is the ¯at shape. A smaller number of cavities can also be laid out in a circular pattern.3 Cavity Shape and Shrinkage The shape of the cavity is essentially the ``negative'' of the shape of the desired product. It may also be created by casting (and then machining) certain metals (usually copper or zinc alloys) in plaster molds created from models of the product to be made. Most plastic products are cup-shaped. and because it will use (in this example) 4 times the amount of plastic. and for symmetry around the center of the machine. 128. the hollow (concave) portion of the cavity space is called the cavity. 64. 32. 6. 48. most multicavity molds are built with a preferred number of cavities: 2. which is easier for designing and dimensioning. which is highly desirable to ensure equal clamping force for each cavity.3 Cavity and Core By convention. such as galvanic processes. for manufacturing. The fundamentals of shrinkage are discussed later. with chemical etching.3 Cavity and Core 11 larger machine with larger platen area and more clamping capacity. with dimensional allowances added to allow for shrinking of the plastic. 4. 4. 8.2. 12. This does not mean that they look like a cup. 9. Today. such as 3. so the machine hour cost will be higher than for a machine large enough for the smaller mold. or with electric discharge machining (EDM). or by any new method that may be available to remove metal or build it up. 96. The shape of the cavity is usually created with chip-removing machine tools. often raised (or convex) portion of the cavity space is called the core. In this case. or by casting (and then machining) some suitable hard plastics (e. 4. even with odd numbers of cavities. The cavity shape can be either cut directly into the mold plates or formed by putting inserts into the plates. These numbers are selected because the cavities can be easily arranged in a rectangular pattern. provided such rules as symmetry of the projected areas around the machine centerline (as explained later) are observed. epoxy resins). 5.4. but they do have an inside and an outside. The matching. The outside of the product is formed by the cavity. 16.. there is no speci®c convex portion. It is also possible to make cavity layouts for any number of cavities.g. it may need a larger injection unit. 24. the inside by the core. 7. and .

but. the cavities are placed in the mold half that is mounted on the injection side. this area is actually seen as a line (Fig. the core looks like a mirror image of the cavity. Usually.3 Illustration of schematic mold. Actually.4 The Parting Line In illustrations Figs. Most injection molding machines do not provide ejection mechanisms on the injection (``hot'') side. in this context it is referred to as a line. while the cores are placed in the moving half of the mold.12 Understanding the Basics of the Injection Mold sometimes. We have seen how the cavity spaces are inside the mold. with the cavity in one side and the core in the other. showing the parting line. by convention.1 and 4. In a side view or cross section through the mold. The parting line can have any shape. Typical examples for this are plastic knives. we must have at least two separate mold halves. or round disks such as records.2 we showed the cavity space inside a mold. 4. or to have it at Figure 4. 4. this is a parting area or plane. to make ejection of the product from the mold possible. and designated P/L. The reason for this is that all injection molding machines provide an ejection mechanism on the moving platen and the products tend to shrink onto and cling to the core. While these items are simple in appearance. To be able to produce a mold (and to remove the molded pieces). it is preferable to have it in one plane. game chips. but for ease of mold manufacturing. they often present serious molding problems for ejection of the product. now we consider the other basic elements of the mold. The parting line is always at the widest circumference of the product. With some shapes it may be necessary to offset the P/L. 4. .3). The separation between these plates is called the parting line. from where they are then ejected.

(A) Simplest case: P/L at right angles to axis of mold. . to ensure that it shuts off tightly when the mold is clamped during injection.6). This force also exists in the other examples. otherwise. or ``¯ash.4 Schematic illustrations of location of parting lines (P/L) (only one half of mold shown): (a) core. creating an additional P/L 2. the product could be unusable. Cavity is split.4 The Parting Line 13 an angle. which do slightly expand during injection and then return to their original shape once the injection cycle is completed. and often ground. (In (B) and (C). which shows up on the product as an unsightly sharp projection. There is even a danger that the plastic could squirt out of the mold and do personal damage. These are the separating lines between two or more cavity sections if the cavity must separate (split or retract) to make it possible to eject the molded product as the mold opens for ejection. Figure 4. but is resisted by the strength of the solid cavity walls. The machine clamping force holds the mold closed at the P/L.4. (b) cavity. (B and C) Product with rim but still simple. the mold plates (the ``mold shoe'') must be suf®ciently solid to Figure 4. 4. but in any event it is best to have is so that it can be easily machined.4. the parting line could be anywhere on the outside of the rim.1 Split Molds and Side Cores There are other parting (or split) lines than those that separate the cavity and core halves. (D) Simple product but with rim and projection. P/L can be either as in (B) or in (C). Since these side forces can be considerable (see Section 4.4 shows simple ``up and down'' molds. between the two positions shown. which will force the two cavity halves in the direction of the the large arrow m. but is preferred as in (B). If the parting line is poorly ®nished the plastic will escape.'' which must then be removed.) In (D) we must consider the injection pressure p (as shown with small arrows inside the cavity space).

but they could also be sections molding whole sides of a product. can represent just small parts of the cavity. but requires the clipping or machining of the relatively large (sprue) gate. as. which are (usually) small openings leading from the runner into the cavity space. mostly with large products. runners. with the plastic ¯owing through the sprue and the runner and entering the cavity space through relatively small gates. Figure 4. The right drawing is of a typical (2-plate) cold runner system. for example. cools so much that the plastic cannot ¯ow anymore.5 shows the simplest case of a single-cavity mold.5 (right). with beverage crates or large pails.5). the runners. This is a frequently used method. 3. It is inexpensive. we must add provisions for bringing the plastic into these cavity spaces.3. from where the machine nozzle (see Fig. We discuss the great variety of sprues. there can be any number of cavities supplied by the cold runners. and the gates. We illustrate here only two methods of so-called cold runners (see Fig.1) contacts the mold. or even only small pins to create holes in the side of the products. Instead of the 2 cavities as shown here. This must be done with enough pressure so that the cavity spaces are ®lled completely before the plastic ``freezes. we showed molds with cavity spaces and parting lines. 4. and gates later. which distribute the plastic to the individual cavities. 4. These and other runner methods are explained later. The left part of Fig. Now.5 Runners and Gates In Fig. or split portions of the cavities.14 Understanding the Basics of the Injection Mold contain these forces and provide the necessary preload to prevent opening of the mold during injection.'' that is. 4. These side cores. which break off easily after ejection. 4. Illustration of schematic mold. showing cold sprue (left) and cold runner . with the plastic injected directly from the sprue into the cavity space. The ¯ow passages are the sprue.

6 Projected Area and Injection Pressure 15 4. The actual area can be seen (and measured) in a plan view of the mold cavity. From this it becomes clear that the clamping force. as delineated in this section view of the mold. We can easily calculate the injection pressure inside the machine nozzle. must be at least as great as the force F to keep the mold from opening (cracking open) during injection. in most molding machines. . 4. The dif®culty is how to determine the value of the injection pressure p. the pressure.6 Projected Area and Injection Pressure At this point we digress and consider injection pressure and how it affects mold design (see Fig. in the direction of the mold (and machine) axisÐin other words. which is directly related to the size of the injection cylinder of the machine and the hydraulic (oil) pressure supplying the injection cylinder. and in some machines can be as high as 200 MPa (29. in the direction of the motion of the clampÐwill tend to open the cavity at the parting line. showing a cavity ®lled with plastic under pressure acting in all directions. the force exerted on the mold by the molding machine.6). This pressure. 4. As the plastic ®lls the cavity space under high pressure p. to a high of about 140 MPa (20. The injection pressure at the machine nozzle.000 psi) or even higher. Figure 4.6 Portion of a schematic mold. The separating force F created by the pressure p is equal to the product of the pressure p times the projected area A. is adjustable between any low values.000 psi). The arrow describing projected area in Fig.6 really describes an area not a line.4. which is the area of the largest projection of the product at the parting line. in general.

16

Understanding the Basics of the Injection Mold

however, is greatly reduced (by the pressure drop) by the time the plastic passes through the machine nozzle ori®ce, the runners, and the gates, and as it ¯ows through the narrow passages of the cavity space. The ¯ow also depends largely on the viscosity (de®ning the ease of ¯ow) of the plastic, which depends on its chemistry and on its temperature (the higher the temperature, the lower the viscosity). This area is the subject of much research and experimentation, and computer programs are available to calculate the pressures and the ¯ow inside the cavity space (see Appendix). A good working assumption is a cavity pressure p of approximately 30±40 MPa (4000±5000 psi) for average product wall thicknesses of about 2±3 mm or more, and 40±50 MPa (5000±6000 psi) or even higher for thin-wall products. For example, a disk of 100 mm (10 cm) diameter, with a thickness of 2 mm, will generate an opening force of (102  p Ä 4) cm2  30 MPa ˆ 235 kN (approx. 26 US tons) per cavity.

4.6.1

Clamping Force

From the above example we see that a clamping force of at least 235 kN (26 US tons) per cavity should be used to ensure that the mold will not crack open. If the average wall of the product is thinner, or if the de®nition, that is, the accuracy and clarity of reproduction of details in the cavity wall, is important, then the pressure must be higher and a larger clamping force will be required.

4.6.2

Strength of the Mold

There are two other serious effects of the injection pressure p. First, as can be seen in Fig. 4.6, the pressure also acts in the direction at right angles to the axis of the mold. These forces, which are the product of the projection of the cavity in this direction times the pressure p, will tend to stretch and de¯ect the cavity walls outward. The greater the height H of the product, the greater will be this force and the stronger must be the walls surrounding the cavity. Second, the clamping force is applied as soon as the mold closes. At this moment, the whole clamp force is resisted (``taken up'') by the area of the land, which is the area surrounding the cavity that touches the core side. If this area is

4.6 Projected Area and Injection Pressure

17

too small, the land will be crushed and damage the sealing-off surfaces of the parting line, eventually ruining the mold. Proper sizing of the land and correct materials and hardness (steel, etc.), or other measures to counteract the clamping forces are the solution to this problem. Also, the mold setup technician should be informed by a nameplate attached to the mold that the recommended maximum clamp force for the mold must not be exceeded during mold setup or during operation.

4.6.3

Why Are High Injection Pressures Needed?

High injection pressures are needed to ensure that the mold is completely ®lled during the injection cycle, with the desired clear surface de®nition. There are several problems to consider. (1) The thinner the wall thickness of the product, the more dif®cult it is to push the plastic through the gap between cavity and core, thus requiring higher pressures. Since material (the plastic) usually accounts for 50±80% of the total cost of a molded product, it is highly desirable to reduce the weight (mass) of plastic injected to a bare minimum. This usually means reducing the wall thickness as far as possible without affecting the usefulness of the product. Over the years, many products have been redesigned just to reduce the plastic mass of a product. This is also why many modern injection molding machines provide higher injection pressures than older ones. (2) The colder the injected plastic, the higher its viscosity, and the more dif®cult it becomes to ®ll the mold. The cost of the product depends directly on the cycle time required to mold a product. The higher the melt temperature of the plastic, the easier it will ¯ow and ®ll the mold. However, higher melt temperatures also require increasing the cooling cycle time to bring the temperature of the injected plastic down to a level where the product can be safely ejected without distorting or otherwise damaging it. This means more power (for heating and cooling), longer cycles, and therefore higher costs. It is often better to inject at the lowest possible temperatures, even if more pressure is needed to ®ll the mold. Note that higher injection pressures will require greater clamping forces and a stronger, possibly larger, machine. Another solution to the problem might be to select a plastic that ¯ows more easily. Such plastics, however, are usually more expensive and may not be as strong as desired. (3) High injection forces are needed for good surface de®nition. Typically, this is important when molding articles such as compact discs, where the clarity

18

Understanding the Basics of the Injection Mold

and precision of the surface de®nition is in direct relation to the quality of the sound reproduction of the recording.

4.7

Venting

As the plastic ¯ows from the gate into the cavity space, the air trapped in it as the mold closed must be permitted to escape. Typically, the trapped air is being pushed ahead by the rapidly advancing plastic front, toward all points farthest away from the gate. The faster the plastic entersÐwhich is usually desirableÐ the more the trapped air is compressed if it is not permitted to escape, or vented. This rapidly compressed air heats up to such an extent that the plastic in contact with the air will overheat and possibly be burnt. Even if the air is not hot enough to burn the plastic, it may prevent the ®lling of any small corners where air is trapped and cause incomplete ®lling of the cavity. Most cavity spaces can be vented successfully at the parting line, but often additional vents, especially in deep recesses or in ribs, are necessary. Another venting problem arises when plastic fronts ¯owing from two or more directions collide and trap air between them. Unless vents are placed there the plastic will not ``knit'' and may even leave a hole in the wall of the product. This can be the case when more than one gate feeds one cavity space, or when the plastic ¯ow splits in two after leaving the gate, due to the shape of the product or the location of the gate. Within the cavity space, plastic always ¯ows along the path of least resistance, and if there are thinner areas, they will ®ll only after the thicker sections are full. Venting is discussed more thoroughly in ME, Chapter 11.

4.8

Cooling

Cooling and productivity are closely tied. In injection molding, the plastic is heated in the molding machine to its processing (melt) temperature by adding energy in the form of heat, which is mostly generated by the rotation (work) of the extruder screw. After injection, the plastic must be cooled; in other words, the heat energy in the plastic must be removed by cooling, so that the molded piece becomes rigid enough for ejection. Cooling may proceed slowly, by just letting the heat dissipate into the mold and from there into the environment. This is not suitable for large production, but for very short runs ``arti®cial'' cooling of a mold is not always required. However, for a production mold, good cooling to remove the heat ef®ciently is very important.

the lowest DT value may be necessary for quality requirements of the product. based on experience. j j Rule 1: Only moving coolant is effective for removing heat. and based on assumed temperatures of melt and coolant. depending on the jobÐthe system is working properly. The smaller the difference. which will raise its own temperature.1 Basics of Cooling The physics and mathematics of cooling are quite complicated. In many molds there can be a good argument for compromise by having a greater DT and thereby using less coolant. and (b) there will be less temperature rise of the coolant from the ®rst to the last cavity (or core). the better it is. such as heat characteristics of the coolant and the mold materials. In some cases. Turbulence within the ¯ow causes the coolant to swirl around as it ¯ows. Computer programs can determine the appropriate means of cooling a particular mold.4. ¯ow patterns and sizes of the cooling channels. and other variables. Stagnant coolant in ends of channels. By contrast. to help the designer. The faster the coolant ¯ows. thereby continuously bringing fresh. the more coolant will be required (which is more expensive in operation). laminar ¯ow moves along the channel walls j j . The coolant temperature will rise as it passes through each cavity (or core).8 Cooling 19 4. but this is the very purpose of the coolant: to remove heat. however. after input of the geometry of the product and the mold. Rule 4: The coolant must ¯ow in a turbulent ¯ow pattern. or in any pocket. rather than in laminar ¯ow. and removing more heat. because (a) a greater volume will ¯ow through the channels. There are several rules. cool liquid in contact with the hot metal walls of the cooling channels. As long as the temperature difference DT between the ®rst and the last cavity in one group of cavities (or cores) is not too largeÐon the order of DT ˆ 1 5  C (2±9  F). But the designer wants to know how to design the best cooling layout in the ®rst place. This means that a computer program can determine the best planned cooling layout for a mold only after the mold is designed. does nothing for cooling.8. Rule 3: The amount of heat removed depends on the quantity (volume) of coolant ¯owing through the channels in cavity (or core). Rule 2: All cavities (and cores) must be cooled with the same coolant ¯ow (quantity of coolant per unit of time) at a temperature that is little different from cavity to cavity (or core to core). This may require special coolant capacity and pumps.

2. and cores. Most cooling lines for cavities and cores are supplied from channels in the underlying or surrounding plates. thus doing little cooling. The higher the number. in Table 25. j Rule 5: Serial or parallel ¯ow? (See Fig. as long as each branch has the same ¯ow. cavities are in one arrangement of series. or both. where V is the velocity of the coolant (m/s). n ˆ m Ä r. and can be much larger. For water at 5  C …41 F). There is no rule for which way to go. or whether the ¯ow is split so that the coolant ¯ows in a parallel pattern (Fig. side cores. D is the diameter of the channel (m). For good cooling. 4. in the same mold. that is. (More values can be found in ME. and r is the density of the coolant (kg/m3 ). and n ˆ 1X5508  10À6 m2 as.20 Understanding the Basics of the Injection Mold relatively undisturbed.000 ` Re ` 20. 4. inserts.7c). whichever is more suitable for the layout. A Reynolds number of more than 4000 (Re b 4000) designates turbulent ¯ow. m ˆ 1X55  103 kgam Á s.) Thus. Turbulent ¯ow is de®ned by the Reynolds number (Re). 10. r ˆ 999X5 kgam3 . In many multicavity molds. Often. as long as the ¯ow rules are followed. where cooling is importantÐin cavities. inserts. the better the cooling ef®ciency. j Rule 6: The channel sizes (cross sections) must be calculated so that there is always more than enough ¯ow capacity in a preceding section to . Figure 4. and (c) series±parallel cooling. which is calculated as Re ˆ …V  D† Ä n. 4. so that the outer layer of the coolant in touch with the metal will heat up.000 should be attempted. where m is the absolute viscosity (kg/m Á s).7 Schematic layout of (a) series cooling. which come in contact with the hot plastic. cores. But this is usually satisfactory because these plates do not need as much cooling as the stack parts. the cooling channels are arranged so that they are partly in parallel and partly in series (Fig. therefore having a much smaller Re number.7b). and so onÐsmall-diameter channels and fast-¯owing coolant are also important. parallel. but the center of the coolant ¯ow will remain cold.7a). or side cores. and n is the kinematic viscosity (m2 /s).7. from cavity to cavity (or core to core) in sequence (Fig. (b) parallel cooling. 4. are in another arrangement.) It does not matter whether the coolant follows a serial ¯ow.

that the ratio of length over the narrow bottom dimension or diameter of a pin or insert is more than 2 to 1. and each of 4 succeeding parallel cross sections are x. The mold designer should discuss this problem with the product designer. this is often missed in designs and the mold does not function properly. Remember that heat always ¯ows from the higher toward the lower temperature. the (preceding) feeder must have at least 4  40 mm2 ˆ 160 mm2 cross-sectional area. Unfortunately. Heavy sections are particularly bad if they are toward the end of the plastics ¯ow where there is less pressure to ensure good ®lling. Dif®cult-to-cool areas limit the mold cooling capability and seriously affect the molding cycle. even where it is easy to provide good cooling. These are. but it must not be smaller. Coolant. j Rule 7: The dif®cult-to-cool areas in the mold must be considered ®rst. such as thin and slender core pins. Rule 8: Study the product to locate heavy sections of the plastic. For example. if there are 4 parallel channels of 40 mm2 cross-sectional area each. essentially. if the coolant is to ¯ow equally through all subsequent channels. like plastics. There is no sense in providing good cooling for the easy-to-cool areas of the mold if there are poorly cooled areas elsewhere in it. in this context. if the preceding cross section is 3x. Selecting materials such as beryllium±copper alloys may help to remove the heat faster. or special cooling methods may be used. all delicate mold features. There may be the possibility of a minor alteration of the product design to avoid heavy sections so that not only is plastic saved but also cooling time is reduced. and one of the 4 channels will see little or no ¯ow through it. parallel sections. or at least get the best cooling into the mold parts supporting these thin projections. there will not be enough coolant. solid handle of a coffee mug could be redesigned j . In some molds there are 4 or more points where the cross sections step down in the cooling system. Slender signi®es. always takes the path of least resistance. such as blowing (cold) air at the thin sections while the mold is open.4. They are always a problem. the heavy. the ¯ow decreases as the length of travel increases and as the cross-sectional area through which the heat travels gets smaller.8 Cooling 21 feed equally all the channels in the following split. because of potential shrink and sink marks. But ®rst the designer must try to ®nd a way of getting coolant (not necessarily water) into the thin sections. It does not matter if the preceding section is greater than the calculated minimum value. For example. blades. For example. and sleeves.

but would greatly reduce the cycle time. In this process. the example shows the pins will bend at every cycle. they will expand differently from their original. For example. requires heating of the mold. If the mold plates are at different temperatures. certain plates are essential for the alignment system because they carry the leader pins and bushings or other alignment members. As is explained in Section 4. usually employed for thermosetting materials. (See also Understanding Product Design for Injection Molding. for blowing immediately after injection. This could add to the mold cost. With an approximate heat expansion for steel of 0.025 mm (0. Chapter 13.) 4. the plastic must be heated to set (or harden). Considering that the standard diametrical clearance between leader pins and bushings is only 0. such as the hot runner systems discussed later or. allowing suf®cient space . cold state.9 Ejection After the plastic in the cavity spaces has cooled suf®ciently and is rigid enough and ready for removal. where the mold cores are heated to keep the plastic hot. The question is whether the customer wants to sacri®ce design features for productivity. and cause misalignment between the alignment elements. 4.8. such as injection blow molding. but also for cooling the various mold plates that are close to areas heated by the plastic. or bind in the bushings.10.00173 inch). all materials expand when heated. in special cases. the product leaves the mold hotter than the raw material used to ®ll the mold. regardless of productivity.) More about cooling later.001 inch). assume that the distance of two leader pins in a mold is L ˆ 400 mm and that a temperature difference of DT ˆ 10  C (18  F) exists between the two plates carrying the pins and bushings.22 Understanding the Basics of the Injection Mold by coring it from both sides. See also ME.000011 mm/mm/ C. In many molds. the mold halves move apart. (Compression molding. L will increase by DL. This points to the importance of ensuring in the design that both mold halves should be kept as close as possible to the same temperature. DL ˆ L  DT  0X000011 ˆ 400  10  0X000011 ˆ 0X044 mm (0.2 Plate Cooling An often overlooked fact is that mold cooling is not only for cooling the plastic.

8  Stripper plate or stripper ring. (b) core pin retainer plate. the products are ejected by one of the following methods: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) Pin (and sleeve) Stripper plate or stripper ring Air alone Air assist Combination of any of the above (1). (g) sleeve ejector. (f) ejector pin. (Right) Section through sleeve ejector mold: (a) backing plate. but for deep cup-shaped products (right) it is restricted to only certain plastics and shapes. etc. 4. combined with robots The most common and oldest methods are  Pin (and sleeve) as shown in Fig. (e) molded product. as shown in Fig. Combination of any of the above. (c) ejector retainer plate.9 These two systems can be used in most molds and for most plastics. (g) stop pin. or almost no. moving Figure 4. (2). in case of screw caps. but this would not be practical in most molds. (e) molded product.10. 4. a quick blast from an air jet applied manually by an operator and directed at the parting line can lift a (simple) product off the core or out of the cavity. (h) core pin. The problem with both these systems is that there are heavy moving parts involved. and (4) Unscrewing. left). Usually.9 Ejection 23 between the mold halves for removal of the product. (b) ejector plate. the complexity of any provision for ejection from the mold is a question of the desired productivity. 4.8 (Left) Section through ejector pin mold: (a) backing plate. (d) core plate. (3). As with cooling. For example.4. (d) sleeve retainer plate. (c) ejector plate. Some products don't need any provision within the mold for ejection. and is rarely used for real production. . (i) stop pin. (f) core plate. The main advantage is that it has no. and the upkeep of such molds is high.  Air ejection alone can be used for ¯at products (Fig.

(e) molded product. Note that for best productivity.9 (Left) Section through stripper ring mold: (a) mounting plate. (e) molded product. (f) machine ejectors. (Right) Section through stripper plate mold: (c) core and mounting plate. (b) core tip. Certain ejection methods permit earlier ejection. parts. Air ejection alone is often used in very high production molds. (c) air valves. . (b) molded product. (f) machine ejector. to reduce cycle time. (d) pressure air supply. the same applies to (7). (c) circular air gap. (d) stripper ring. (d) pressure air supply. (d) stripper plate. (g) connecting sleeve. (Right) (a) core and mounting plate. (e) molded product. (Left) (a) core and mounting plate. whereas unscrewing requires the pieces to be more rigid. others depend on the plastic to be stiffer. the products should be ejected as early as possible. (b) ejector plate.24 Understanding the Basics of the Injection Mold Figure 4. (c) core plate. by combining any of the above ejection methods with integrated robots. Figure 4.10 Air ejection alone. For example. stripping permits hotter (softer) products to be ejected without damage to them.

but especially in the dosing (the amount of plastic injected) and the melt temperature. Fully automatic (FA) molding depends essentially on two factors: (1) Reliable injection. (2) Reliable ejection. There was also the problem of absenteeism of the personnel. The designer must select the appropriate method of ejection and make sure that there is enough ejection stroke to clear the products from the cores. Since much of this operation also depended on the acquired skill of the operatorÐsome workers are faster.4. the operator was also often required to reach into the molding area to pry loose a stuck. The designer must keep in mind Murphy's law. The key to good ejection is that the product always stays on the side from which it will be ejected. They also were. This is 100% the responsibility of the mold designer. possibly defective product. Because the molds were often not properly ®nished. Many areas must be considered in the design. many rejects resulted.9. usually. or had unreliable injection and ejection systems. Much effort was therefore spent on eliminating operators from the actual molding process. After every cycle they opened the safety gate to remove the products from the molding area. some are discussed later. All this was not only labor intensive. but not necessarily. it will. Every mold (with very rare exceptions) can be designed so that there is no chance of the product hanging up and not ejecting. The molding machine must be repetitive from cycle to cycle in every aspect.1 Automatic Molding Earlier molds were all designed to require operators (often lowly paid and unskilled) to sit or stand at the molding machine. which often played havoc with production planning. This is frequently overlooked and can also be caused by improper setup of the mold. but was also very unsafe and the cause of many serious injuries. resulting in quality differences of the product because of different residence times of the melt in the machine. or even on the day of the week. See also ME. in some cases. some slowerÐand on the time of the day or night. . the overall molding cycle time could vary considerably. reclosed the gate and initiated the next molding cycle. and from time to time had to lubricate the molding surfaces with mold release agents. which says that if it can happen. adding greatly to the cost of production. supposed to visually inspect the products at this time and even make adjustments to the machine if they thought it necessary. by today's standards. from the core side of the mold. Chapter 12.9 Ejection 25 4.

we now have two conditions that work against each other: heat expansion and compressibility. these ®gures indicate only a range within which to choose. but not to water). for guiding purposes. liquids) expands as its temperature increases (heat expansion) and returns to its original volume if cooled down to the original temperature. Plastics ®lled with inert substances. plastics. For practical purposes. have a much lower shrinkage than that for the same but un®lled material. so the shrinkage there will be less and will require a smaller shrinkage factor. this is not accurate enough. Conversely. plastics will compress signi®cantly (i. When pressure is applied to plastics (or to hydraulic oil. gases. With crystalline plastics. All solid materials compress under load.e. more than two . and for many products and molds. but most not as much as plastics..1 Variable Shrinkage The designer must understand that the areas within the cavity spaces close to the gate see higher pressures. such as polystyrene (PS) and polycarbonate (PC). such as glass or carbon ®bers or talcum. it is both hot and therefore expanded. where the volume or size of a product is important. polypropylene (PP). and a higher shrinkage factor will apply.10. but also under signi®cant pressure. the pressure in the plastic is much lower than near the gate. Thus. However. In some cases.10 Shrinkage One of the most misunderstood areas of mold design is shrinkage. In some applications. the shrinkage factor is much higher than with amorphous plastics.26 Understanding the Basics of the Injection Mold 4. The problem with all plastics is the characteristic of compressibility. usually between 0 and 5%. the injection pressure required to ®ll the cavity space. and polyamide (nylon). such as polyethylene (PE). the melt temperature. 4. Every material (metals. Shrinkage ®gures should be obtained from materials suppliers. the shrinkage factors supplied by materials suppliers can be used. which reduces its volume. This makes it very dif®cult to arrive at a true shrinkage factor. As the plastic is injected. reduce in volume) in proportion to the amount of pressure applied. and the temperature at which it will be ejected from the mold. This may be (within the range of molding operations) as high as 2% of the original volume. near the end of the ¯ow through the narrow cavity space. because the actual change in volume depends on the type of plastic.

4.11 Alignment

27

shrinkage factors may have to be selected within one cavity. It is also important to establish at what temperature the product will be ejected. If it is ejected while still hot, it will shrink more outside of the cavity space as it cools to room temperature. If ejected later, when it is cooler, it will shrink less, as measured in comparison with the steel sizes of the cavity and core. This is sometimes, but uneconomically, used to arrive at the proper size of a product such as a container or lid. If a molded product is too small because not enough shrinkage value was added to the product dimensions when specifying the mold steel dimensions, the proper product size can be achieved by ejecting it later, when it is cooler, but this means loss in productivity. With high production, the proper procedure is to resize the steel dimensions. See also ME, Chapter 8.

4.11

Alignment

Various methods are used to align cavity and core plates. The method selected depends on the shape of the product, the accuracy (or tightness of tolerances) of the product, and even on the expected mold life. Several choices are available: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) 4.11.1 No provision for alignment within the mold Leader pins and bushings Taper lock between each cavity and core Taper lock between a group of cavities and cores Wedge locks Taper pins Combination of (2) with (3), (4), (5), or (6) No Provision for Alignment

In the case of a ¯at product, without any cavity (depression) in one mold half, and the cavity entirely in the other mold half, for example, in a mold for a ¯oor mat, there is no need for alignment, even if there is some engraving on the ¯at surface of the mold, because the most the dimensions can vary is by the amount of play between the machine tie bars and the tie bar bushings.

28

Understanding the Basics of the Injection Mold

4.11.2

Leader Pins and Bushings

This common method of alignment between mold halves is shown in Fig. 4.11. In cup-shaped products with heavy walls, there is really no need for alignment within the mold, because the clearances between tie bars and their bushings are usually much less than the tolerances of the product wall thickness. The main reason to have leader pins in these cases is to protect the projecting cores from physical damage, when handling the mold. The protection of the cores by use of leader pins applies also to all other mold alignment methods. Wherever leader pins are used, they should be placed at the same mold side as the cores and be longer than the longest projection of the cores to protect them from damage (see dimension s, in Fig. 4.11). There are exceptions to this rule, for example, in some 3-plate molds. What is often missed is that for most applications leader pins and bushings are a very accurate method of alignment. Consider dimension t in Fig. 4.11, and let's assume a wall thickness t ˆ 1X50 mm (0.060 inch), with a tolerance of Æ0X05 mm (0.002 inch), or 1.50 Æ 0.05 mm. With standard commercial hardware, the leader pin is usually nominal size minus 0.025 mm (À0X001 inch), and the bushing is nominal size plus 0.025 mm (‡0.001 inch). Therefore, with one set of pins and bushings, the maximum clearance, in the highly unlikely worst case, between one set of leader pins and bushings could be 0.05 mm (0.002 inch) on the diameter, so the centers would be misaligned only half that amount. By having at least 2, but usually 4 sets, the total clearance between the pins in all the bushings would be even less. In the worst case, the

Figure 4.11 Typical mold with leader pin and bushing alignment: (a) core plate, (b) cavity plate, (c) leader pin, (d) leader pin bushing, (s) safety distance of pin above core, (t) wall thickness of plastic product at parting line.

4.11 Alignment

29

possible play and misalignment would be well within the tolerance limits speci®ed in this example, and therefore acceptable. It can be easily seen that this holds true as long as the product has not much smaller wall thicknesses, as is often the case with thin-wall containers, with wall thicknesses in the order of 0.4 mm (0.015 inch) or even less. In those special but frequent cases, other methods of alignment must be used such as taper ®ts. We also must not forget the in¯uence of heat expansion of the mold plates, which will affect the alignment accuracy.

4.11.3

Taper Lock Between Each Cavity and Core

Figure 4.12 shows 3 possible con®gurations of taper or wedge locks. On the left, the tapers in both male and female members match perfectly. Because of manufacturing tolerances, this is impossible to achieve except, perhaps, by individual ®tting of parts, and even then it is dif®cult. To be able to produce any mold part without need for ®tting (center), they must be closely toleranced and accurately machined. To solve the problem of providing proper alignment, the matching parts are dimensioned such that the male member is slightly larger than the female member, and the female member will be slightly expanded from the moment the mold halves touch, until the mold is fully clamped. The amount that the pieces stay apart before ®nal clamping (d) is called preload in Fig. 4.12. This amount d is very, very small, and depends on the length of the taper and on its angle. It must be greater than zero. On the right, the female member is larger than the male member. This taper lock is useless because the tapers don't touch (f); no force is generated to pull the mold halves into alignment.

Figure 4.12 Taper (or wedge) lock: (a) male member, (b) female member, (c) taper. (Left) Ideal condition. (Center) Correct application. d is called preload. (Right) Useless taper.

core±stripper ring. ¯at bars. especially with multicavity molds in which every stack is aligned with taper locks.4 Taper Locks and Wedges Taper locks are conical (usually round) matching mold parts. this must be considered and the forces calculated. if they are rusty. It is surprising how many molds are in this category. to move the tapers for the preload distance d. Any size taper is acceptable. between 5 and 20  . etc. too large a taper requires too much force to close. means that the matching. Obviously. (2) Once the tapers wear. it can be easily seen on a mold if the tapers work: If the tapers (or wedges) are shiny all around. and the mold probably depends on the tie bars and tie bar bushings for alignment. with one side tapered. and 15  . Four sets of wedges are always required per alignment. The easiest way is often to replace the worn elements. (Common tapers are 7. either for each cavity. the mold will be more accurately aligned. Note that working tapers are subject to severe wear and must be made from suitable. they are dif®cult to repair and reuse without changing other mold parts as well. When considering the clamp force of the machine. In most of these cases. and the taper of the cone is designed to provide the alignment between two mold parts (cavity±core. 4.) Too small a taper may cause locking and separation dif®culty because of friction in the tapers. or for the whole mold. which must touch and rub. but has two inherent disadvantages: (1) The alignment of the various components depends on the accuracy of machining and once the assembly is ®nished. This requires considerable force. there is no possibility of adjusting the alignment. which is unavoidable due to the very nature of this design. or on the mold leader pins and bushings. they work. This method is very accurate and relatively inexpensive. The advantage is that wedges can be shimmed or ground on . female taper will have to be spread. Many times the designer (or the mold maker) thought that by providing tapers. hardened steels. and even so will have to be replaced or repaired from time to time. they don't work.30 Understanding the Basics of the Injection Mold In practice. If too much force is required for closing the mold. there may not be enough clamp force left for holding the mold closed during injection. the taper ®t was wasted money.11. until they seat properly. Wedges are pairs of hardened. 10.). or just dirty.

It is questionable whether they do any better job than the other methods of alignments explained here. It is therefore necessary to equip the mold with leader pins (but not necessarily with leader pin bushings). They act similarly to taper locks and are available as standard mold hardware. cavities and cores can be aligned by either leader pins and bushings. Where high accuracy in alignment is required. in addition to the taper locks.11. In addition. Typically. they ensure the ®nal alignment of each stack. they do not assure that the mold halves will stay together when handling the mold. usually located at the top of the mold on the core side. Similarly. or taper (or wedge) locks. Quite often.6 Too Many Alignment Features Another problem is frequently encountered in poorly designed molds. only two such pins need to be provided. Since the tapers will determine the ®nal alignment. The disadvantage of wedges is that they require more space on the mold surface. two or four large leader pins are used to align the complete mold halves. where it is believed that the accuracy of leader pins is insuf®cient. some multicavity molds are built with small leader pins (usually only two) and bushings for each set of cavity and core and are mounted on the stack plates. even for large molds. but these pins also must be ``loose'' in their bushings.4. or easily replaced if shimming is not practical. taper (or wedge) locks are the preferred choice. regarding wear and accuracy of machining the mold and/or core plates. 4. However. the leader pins must ®t only loosely in their corresponding openings (or leader pin bushings) without actually contributing to the ®nal alignment of cavities and cores. and they are subject to the same problems as taper locks.11 Alignment 31 opposite pairs to adjust for wear or for inaccurate manufacturing. so the mold size will be larger than when using taper locks. to prevent ``®ghting'' between the two . there is always the danger that the cores and cavities could be damaged if the mold halves should separate and bang together once the taper engagement is lost. 4.5 Taper Pins Taper pins (and bushings) are sometimes used for the ®nal alignment of cavity and core in addition to leader pins.11.

32 Understanding the Basics of the Injection Mold separate sets of alignments. the ®nal alignment (tapers or pins) will move each core into position relative to its cavity. . as the mold closes. standard clearances. An exception to this rule of loose pins is when a more expensive but superior method is used: the cores are mounted such that they can move slightly (¯oat) on their backing plates. the leader pins mounted in the mold shoe (on the core side) will have their regular. In this case.

. if the product does not look or function as expected.2 Are the Tolerances Shown? Are the dimensional tolerances speci®ed on the drawing the same as when the mold cost was ®rst estimated and the mold price quoted? This can have serious implications. if a molder requests an approximate mold cost so that he can estimate the ®nal cost of the product for his customer.1 Before Starting to Design a Mold Information and Documentation Before starting to design a mold. to ensure that the product can be easily molded and will be satisfactory for the purpose intended. While it is desirable that the mold designer is involved in the product design. 5.1. and if they do. mold designers should not agree to make a product drawing. Unfortunately. just a sample or model of the product used for the estimate. they must insist that it be signed by the customer as acceptable. especially if no tolerances were shown when the job was quoted. sometimes there is not even a drawing. for example. or when signi®cant changes are made after starting that can affect the concept of the mold. the designer must make sure that all the information is on hand. 5. This will eliminate any possible unpleasantness later on.1.33 5 5.1 Is the Product Design Ready? It is frustrating and wastes valuable time to ®nd during your work that information is missing.

but .000 or more parts. 1. production (the actual molding) can become very expensive.1.10. The molder. If the customer insists on any guarantee.). or the ®nal user. but only one link in a chain of requirements to produce a molded product. it could require experimental work (test molds. to very close tolerances. etc. This must be made clear before work is started. 5. Any such anticipated costs should be brought to the attention of the customer. This consideration will affect all aspects of a mold.1. It cannot be repeated often enough that the mold is the most important. 5.4 What are the Cycle Times? The designer should never guarantee cycle times and must make sure that the customer understands this. or 10.3 Are the Tolerances Reasonable? Are the requested product tolerances feasible. which could become very expensive. As we have seen in Section 4.5 What is the Expected Production? The designer must be aware of the total production expected from the mold. or should try to get this information from someone with molding experience with such products.1. from mold materials selection to many mold features selected by the designer. However. a process that can be very costly and time-consuming.000.000. If very close product tolerances are wanted. requiring close inspection of the molded products and possibly causing many rejects.000. and the expected life of it. and added to the mold price. 100. this does not mean that the molded part will satisfy often unreasonable and unnecessary requests for close tolerances. while it is nearly always possible to make the mold parts accurately. Note that in the case of very stringent tolerances. in view of the size of the product and the plastic speci®ed? This is sometimes overlooked when quoting. an experimental setup may be required to determine steel sizes.000. remaking of mold parts. the designer should have some idea of the expected cycle. should not really be interested in the mold cost. from past experience with similar products.34 Before Starting to Design a Mold 5. There is a signi®cant difference if the mold should be built for 1000.

What size mold will be required? How will the mold cost. In some (today rare) cases. sprue bushing radius.1 Information and Documentation 35 only in the cost of the molded product. 5. the designer must know the machine or machines on which the mold is to operate.000.1 Mechanical Features (1) Tie bar clearances and platen size. as long as the cavities are located within the area between the tie bars. because of the small quantity. The locating ring centers the injection half of the mold on the stationary (or ``hot'') platen. the customer estimates that during the next year he could sell 10. 5. and each one is suitable for the speci®ed requirement. a more complicated mold.000 over the next 3 years? The ®rst mold probably will not be able to produce these quantities in time. top to bottom. which will cost much more but. it may even overhang the platens. much different mold. Also. will result in a much lower cost of the molded piece. and so onÐin short.6. (2) Locating ring size.1. Will the planned mold ®t on the platens? In some cases it is all right to have the mold larger than these dimensions. because of the relatively small quantity. If this is required. This will then require a new. This means low productivity. with more cavities. The sprue bushing . A simple cold runner system could be suitable and quite inexpensive. It is the duty of the designer to advise the customer accordingly and build the most economical mold for the intended job. front to back. a hot runner system. After a few hundred test samples.000 pieces.6 What are the Machine Speci®cations? Before starting. it may be necessary to pull one or both top tie bars to be able to install the mold. the mold cost will be signi®cant in this calculation. divided by this quantity. there may be only one cavity or at most 2 or 4 cavities required. despite the higher mold cost.5. resulting in a higher molding cost. He does not yet know if the widget will be accepted at large. The following is also a frequent scenario: A new widget is to be marketed. the designer must ®nd out if the planned machines have provisions for easy tie bar pulling. affect the cost of the widget? Obviously. But what if the widget turns out to be a success and the required quantities increase to an estimated 1. Which is the better mold? They are both good.1.

often built-in hydraulic or air actuators. plate thicknesses can be increased. or other standard?). (c) If neither is possible without compromising the quality (strength) of the mold. a different machine must be selected. In some molds.3). the mounting plate under an ejector box can be omitted. so more than one locating ring (or an adaptor ring) and different sprue bushings may be required. that is. The machine ejectors are always on the moving platen. (b) Reduce the thickness of one or more of the mold plates. If the mold will make use of the machine ejectors it is important to know their size and location when designing the ejection mechanism. SPI. which is not always a good solution because it makes the mold unnecessarily heavy and adds cost to the mold. if the shut height is too small. (3) Mold mounting holes and slot pattern (Euro. but make sure you have the appropriate sizes. This should be discussed with the molder before proceeding. other standard?). Some of the machines for which the mold is planned may have different sizes. but their size and pattern will vary according to the builder's standards (Euro. but there are cases where this is not enough. But this is often not possible. How will the mold be mounted on the platens? The best method is where the mold halves are directly screwed onto the platens. using standard mounting holes on the platens or clearance holes on the platens with threaded holes in the mold. (4) Quick mold change features. This distance must not be greater than the maximum distance of the platen surfaces of the machine when in fully closed position. 7. which is suf®cient for most molds. the distance from the mounting face of the cavity half to the mounting face of the moving half. there are several ways to reduce it: (a) Investigate whether all the shown mold plates are really necessary. The ejector force is usually about 10% of the clamp force. With this method the full holding force of the screw is utilized. The machine speci®cations indicate maximum and minimum shut height. There are standards. especially if the mold must ®t several. Some machines are equipped with Bolster . SPI. by fastening the mold to the machine using the mold parallels (see Fig. In these cases. If the laid-out shut height is too great. The mold may have to be equipped with additional ejection means. mold clamps are frequently used. Conversely. There are a number of commercial and proprietary systems. with the clamp screws making use of standard mounting holes or slots in the platens. for example.36 Before Starting to Design a Mold radius must ®t the injection nozzle radius. (5) Machine ejector. (6) Shut height. This is the total height of the mold. The disadvantage of this method is that only a portion of the holding force of the screw is utilized. different machines. and the designer must get the speci®cations to ®t the system before starting to design the mold.

the total mass (weight) of the products coming from all cavities.1 Information and Documentation 37 plates. There are again some exceptions. For many molds. With good draft. The total calculated or estimated shot size. plus the projected areas of any runner system in the same parting plane. (8) Ejector stroke. Is the machine equipped for such circuits. the stroke should not be less than about 150 mm (6 inches). Some molds may require specially designed air circuits for air ejection or for air actuators. multiplied by the estimated injection pressure. In borderline cases. the mold clamp stroke is adjustable. particularly when using automatic (robotic) product removal methods. in a very large product. Has the machine a provision for timed core pulls? 5. (7) Clamp stroke.5. In most machines. will not be greater than the available machine clamping force. or bolster blocks. in cases where little draft is speci®ed. (9) Clamping force. the suggested minimum stroke should be about 2. There are exceptions to these two suggested values. it is usually not necessary to do more than push the products some short distance before they fall free. for special applications. for example. the estimated injection pressure depends on the ease of plastic ¯ow (viscosity. (10) Auxiliary controls. so that the mold surfaces can be accessed for servicing while the mold is open.5 times the height of the product to ensure that the molded pieces have enough space to fall free between the mold halves during ejection. which are outside the scope of this book.2 Productivity Features (1) Shot size (mass per shot). that is. or before air-assist features will blow them away. This stroke is also adjustable. it is sometimes possible to change conditions. by increasing the number of gates and placing them far apart. when molding deep-draw containers. The designer must make sure that the total projected areas of all cavities. As we have seen earlier. hydraulically actuated side cores may be required. which are mounted on the moving platen in order to decrease the minimum shut height.1. it may then be possible to use lower injection pressures. to be timed within the molding cycles? In some cases. however. plus the mass of the runner system (in the case of cold runners) should be within 30±90% of . thereby requiring less clamp. temperature) and on the wall thickness of the product. for example. particularly with robotic product removal methods.6. within the limits of the machine speci®cations. The designer must make sure that the available ejection stroke is large enough to push the products completely off the cores.

exact values should be checked with materials suppliers. A machine could be well suited for a hot runner mold but be unsuited for a cold runner mold for the same number of cavities. mostly smaller. Multiplying the total shot weight S (g/shot) calculated in (1) above. Because of the narrow gap through which the plastic must ¯ow within the cavity space. this increase in temperature will also cause an increase in . in other words. it would not make sense to build it for this machine. the melt and/or the mold temperatures could be increased so that the plastic will not freeze before ®lling the mold. per shot.90 to 0. the same mass will have a greater volume. These are only approximate ®gures. Since shot size is rated in grams (or ounces) but is actually a volume (cross section of extruder barrel times the stroke of the extruder).) (2) Plasticizing capacity (kilograms per hour). The shot capacity of a machine is given in g/shot of PS. melt the cold plastic pellets into a melt of a speci®c temperature (and viscosity). (This is a major advantage of the hot runner system. for example. However.38 Before Starting to Design a Mold the shot capacity of the machine. that is. or any other. Plasticizing capacity is the amount (mass) of plastic a machine can plasticize per hour. the shot size of these materials will be less than for PS. The speci®c gravity of materials such as PE and PP is less (about 0. it is also suggested to use only between 30 and 90% of the rated plasticizing capacity. with a speci®c gravity of about 1. ®rst. As the plastic cools. that is. fewer shots per hour can be produced than the mold could yield with a suitable. Dividing 3600 (1 hour equals 3600 seconds) by the number of the seconds of the estimated cycle will give the number of shots per hour (N). If Wt is more than the rated capacity. in kilograms (pounds) per hour. to ®nd out how much plastic per hour will be required. such as PE. PP. This should be carefully considered before starting. making it more dif®cult to ®ll the mold. the injected plastic will cool rapidly when in contact with the cooled cavity and core walls. Plasticizing capacity is usually given as mass for PS. with the number of shots N per hour we ®nd the total mass Wt in grams per hour required (Wt ˆ S  N ). The actual mass of other materials. an 8-cavity mold is required to run in a speci®c machine. but its shot capacity is not large enough. (3) Injection speed (grams injected into the mold per second). will be different.05. by about 10%. the gap narrows even more. where the mass of the runner can add considerably to the mass of the sum of all molded parts. This is an important consideration when molding thin-walled products. sometimes greater. the designer must estimate the molding cycle.95). To overcome this condition. But. For best quality of the melt (and the molded piece). larger size machine. Here. What are the practical implications? If. This is especially important with cold runner molds. the machine can still be used but the cycle time will have to be lengthened. the same applies as with shot capacity.

 Air-operated actuators. The problem is now that the injection speed depends on the speed with which the hydraulic injection cylinder is ®lled with pressure oil. the speed of the injection cylinder depends on the hydraulic pump outputÐoil volume per secondÐentering the cylinder. and must discuss this with the molder to make sure the right machine is available to run the mold. This points to two areas for possible remedy: (1) The injection speed and (2) the injection pressure must be increased. 5. called an accumulator package.3 Additional Requirements for Some Molds (1) Pressure air. The preferred solution is to provide the machine injection system with an accumulator. the machine could be equipped with a much larger pump and motor. In general. the injection speeds required for thin-wall production require the cylinder to be ®lled more rapidly than what the pump alone can provide. valves. The air volume used is usually small. which is often sold as an ``option'' with the machine. but in many cases this would be uneconomical or impractical. Therefore. The higher the pressure.6. Most machines for conventional (not thin-wall) products are served suf®ciently well by the output of the pump (and the motor driving it). which stores highpressure oil during the time pressure oil is not used. especially in large volumes. the faster the melt will be pushed through its paths.5. There could be problems with controlling the speed . the designer should be aware that compressed air. Their initial cost is paid back rapidly by savings from wasted air volume.1 Information and Documentation 39 the cooling cycle (and a lengthening of the molding cycle). resulting in a smaller output from the mold. To remedy this. especially if it is left to blow for any length of time. There are several commercial air jets on the market with low consumption of pressure air. Some molds require air pressure for their operation. Additional valving and other hardware is required.1. can be very expensive. However. from the machine nozzle to the farthest corners of the cavity space.  Blow downs (air jets or air curtains) are often used to assist the products to rapidly clear the molding area. But these two are interrelated. The accumulator releases the stored highpressure oil together with the pump output into the cylinder when required for injection. but it also depends on the size of the associated hardwareÐhoses. The designer will need to recognize when an accumulator package is necessary for the product for which the mold is to be designed. and so onÐfrom the pump to the cylinder. compared with a blow down.

is a preferred solution to ensure that there is no oil or water contamination in the air as it comes into contact with the plastic products. such blower can be directly mounted on the top of the mold. on the order of 0. and rarely 900 kPa (120 psi). In many cases. the forces can be uneven and the member can jam. to prevent contamination of the products if they are used for food or pharmaceutical purposes. high-volume blower with its air intake from the shop environment. the air must be ®ltered from any oil residues. Most of the time. for a very short time. (a) Air cylinders are often jerky in their operation. unless their seals are selected for dry air. (b) In cases where several air cylinders actuate one large mold member. or even outside the mold. one or several suitable accumulators could be installed near or even on the mold.500 kPa . The hydraulic pressure could be taken from the machine system with a pressure reducing valve. which is usually activated on demand.6.  Air required for air ejection. A preferred method. or better yet. so large air actuators are needed to produce large forces. is to use an auxiliary power supply. but they are simple and inexpensive. and so on. (2) Auxiliary hydraulic supply. and by providing the necessary safety measures to protect against the very high pressures in that system. (c) In most molding shops the compressed air pressure is fairly low. for the added volume of air that will be required for the planned mold. before reaching the outlets in or at the mold. This is similar to the hydraulic accumulators cited in Section 5. and does not require timing or valving.) A low-pressure. however. compressed air may be not suitable. In all these cases. the much more powerful hydraulic cylinders would be an alternative. Another advantage is that the power consumption of this type blower is low. the actuation time is controlled from the machine control panel. in blow downs or in air ejection.1. water (always present in air lines). It could be dif®cult to accommodate suf®ciently large cylinders within the available mold space.2 (3). usually about 600 kPa (80 psi).2 kW (1/4 hp) or less. for example. It may be even necessary to add pump capacity. especially with long strokes. For some operations. valves.40 Before Starting to Design a Mold and uniform motion of air actuators. (Unfortunately. most air actuators require lubricated air. from within an enclosure built around the molding machine when special ``clean room'' requirements are speci®ed. usually at a system pressure of about 3. and large enough supply lines). The designer must make sure that the intended machine is equipped with suf®cient controls and hardware (timers. If much air is needed for short blasts. Where pressure air comes into contact with the molded products.

This is not the case in developing countries. heat controllers) available to operate a mold on a speci®c machine must be discussed with the molder when designing a mold that will require additional heat controls. . and pressure. volume.) than that for higher pressure. that is. for example. It is also important that the coolant is clean. For safety reasons. especially if the leaks were to occur near heated areas of the mold. a machine using a cold runner mold will just stop. and the power consumption may be from as low as 40 W per heater. Dirty coolant could gradually plug the water circuits or coat the channel walls with a poor heat conducting layer of dirt and lime. The controls (breakers. Corrosive action of the coolant could attack and eat away the mold steels. in the case of a power failure. and to specify that only clean. There is not much sense in designing the mold with very sophisticated cooling circuitry if the cooling water supply is insuf®cient in temperature. The motion of hydraulic operators is smooth and the speed can be well controlled. with a minimum of minerals or dirt.5. exceptions) is highly ¯ammable and there is always the danger of leaks. but can resume work as soon as the plastic is again up to molding temperature. as. typically. An individual chiller unit may be the answer if the plant supply is too small or has not enough pressure. noncorrosive coolant is used with the mold. such as in some nozzle heaters. Also. and is not corrosive. in a hot runner mold the melt will freeze in the manifold and nozzles and it may take much more time to restart (in small molds between 15 and 30 minutes). rust creates insulating layers similar to lime and dirt deposits. hoses. Chapter 13. heaters in molds are rated at 230 VAC or less. (3) Cooling water supply. where power interruptions occur frequently. This is a very important area of concern. the effects of such interruptions on the operation of a mold may cause concern. thus reducing the cooling ef®ciency. and could require frequent cleaning of the coolant channels if the mold is expected to maintain high productivity.1 Information and Documentation 41 (500 psi). though. Two points of caution. etc. products used in the food or pharmaceutical industry could be contaminated by the oil. and of not much concern to the designer. such controls are required for hot runner molds. this is usually speci®ed as not allowed. However. except during natural catastrophes. The expected savings through using a hot-runner mold may become an illusion. Hydraulic oil (with some special. See ME. This is much safer and requires much less expensive hardware (valves. near a hot runner system. It is always good policy for the designer to check with the molder to ensure that there are no such problems with the water supply. The electric power supply in North America and in most developed countries is usually suf®ciently stable and uninterrupted. expensive. (4) Electric power and controls. and up to several thousand watts in hot runner manifold heaters. Typically.

strippers.1. whereas some will need thermocouples and heat controllers. consists essentially of only two parts. the most economical mold for the job must be selected.42 Before Starting to Design a Mold Since heaters are often bundled in parallel and operated by designated controls. With the expected production in mind.2. A decision on which way to proceed with the mold shoe should be made only after the product drawing is carefully studied. 5. plus alignment features and air valves. The entire mold. typically. As was already stated earlier. the cavities. cores. The designer must always ®nd the most costeffective mold. side cores. but not including the stack. Cooling channels are built right into the plates. There are several choices for the designer. a very expensive mold intended for high productivity will not necessarily be the best choice. then. which is the arrangement of all mold parts that touch the injected plastic. 5. ejectors.1 No Mold Shoe Used The mold may consist of only one plate for the cavity and another plate for the core. Ejection is facilitated by air valves built directly into the core plate. any inserts in either of them.2.2 Start of Mold Design Now that all our preliminaries are clear. 5. that is. the designer must decide what kind of mold should be designed. it is important to ensure that adequately sized circuit breakers and so on are available. with both cavity and core machined right into these plates. some can be controlled with time-percentage controllers or variable (voltage) transformers. that is.1 Mold Shoes A mold shoe (sometimes also called ``chase'') is the total of all mold plates making up the mold. the mold that will result in the lowest cost of the product. and never losing sight of the expected productivity of the mold. including screws and alignment features. and so on. In simple molds (not necessarily low-production molds) the cavities and cores can be machined right into the mold plates. . the most suitable.

which could be detrimental if they appear on a molding surface. also. it must be hardened and ground after machining. In highquality molds. ``mild steel.2 Standard Mold Shoes Mold shoes can be bought from mold maker supply houses (DME. The larger mold parts are then machined from prehardened steel. (2) Another common steel supplied is a type of ``machinery steel. Mold steel is always supplied very soft (about the same as mild steel).. or by just oiling well after use. they may permanently deform if loaded beyond their yield point.g. The higher material cost can often be justi®ed with savings in mold maintenance.2. (More about mold steels in Chapter 9. It is treated to a Rockwell hardness of approximately Rc 30±35.) from a large selection of standard sizes. P20PQ is produced especially clean. (3) In high-quality molds. and from mold steels for smaller products. or where the plastic is corrosive and could attack the stack parts. considerable expense. All plates are machined and ground square. Hasko. etc. before storing the mold. both the mold shoe and the stack parts are made from stainless steels (SS). It is suitable only where the expected forces and wear in the mold are small enough that the steel will not be damaged. and rather specialize in the making of the stacks and doing the ®nal mold assembly. which is the pushing of a supported small insert into a mild steel backing.1.'' typically a steel called P20 or P20PQ (plastic mold quality). Also. for example.5. This is helpful in humid climates to prevent rusting of the mold shoe. Many mold shops prefer to buy these ready-made mold parts.) . with low strength. and are ready for adding the required mold features.'' which is soft. which represents an additional. for easy machining. that is without dirt enclosures. This is of special advantage for large products where the cost of mold steel would be very high. or by the hobbing effect. Mild steel plates and P20 plates can be protected against rust by a relatively low-cost electroless nickel coating. which is expensive and requires additional maintenance. Note that for corrosive plastics (e. PVC) the stack parts made from regular mold steels must be chrome plated. These plates are usually available in several qualities of steel: (1) The ®rst type is an inexpensive. the stack parts are usually made from steels such as P20PQ for large products. they are very suitable for cutting the cavity or core right into the plates. and with or without ejector plates. and smaller parts from SS mold steels. by the clamping pressure on a too small P/L.2 Start of Mold Design 43 5. with or without leader pin alignment. since mild steels have a low tensile (and compressive) strength. and little wear resistance. These plates are more expensive but cost much less than socalled mold steels.

It is an economic decision that may be different from shop to shopÐwhether to make the plates or buy them as standard plates or as complete mold shoes. . for the small quantities required this is no problem. often prehardened stainless steel is used for such molds. in sizes and to rules speci®ed by the maker of these universal mold shoes. etc. rather than the stacks being ®t into the space available in standard molds. especially if a large number of such ``inserts'' are used or foreseen. where the mold shoe is built around the stacks.2.5 Universal Mold Shoes For low production and relatively small products. heavy lifting and storage equipment. and the mold is much less expensive than a complete mold.4 Special Mold Shoes This applies mostly to special molds for which no suitable standard sizes are commercially available. but. a universal mold shoe offers another solution for making a relatively low-cost mold.) create their own mold shoe standards.44 Before Starting to Design a Mold 5. 5. The mold maker may keep certain plate sizes and thicknesses in stock. In highproduction molds. Some mold makers specializing in certain areas (preform molds. and to very high production molds.3 Home-Made Mold Shoes The mold shoes can be made in-house from raw steel plates. Also. and accurate milling and grinding machines. and cut and machine them to size as needed. which the mold maker can buy from the steel mills or dealers. unscrewing molds.1.1. The mold maker concentrates on making the stacks. and ejection are usually not as ef®cient as in a mold speci®cally designed for a product. such in-house made mold shoes or plates are built to the dimensions listed as standard parts by the hardware suppliers. 5. Mold features such as runners.2.1. cooling. the same choices of steel apply. and the mold will not cycle as fast. Universal mold shoes are essentially standard size chases that are constructed so that different stacks can be easily mounted into them. Note that often. the mold shoe too is usually made from prehardened steel. This makes a lot of sense. This requires much plant space. and optimum layouts are used for all mold features.2. In any case.

It is always more economical to buy these parts rather than to attempt to make them in-house. These machinists need detail drawings. ®nally. Today.1 Mold Drawings Assembly and Detail Drawings The purpose of the assembly drawing (including the Bill of Materials discussed later) is to convey the intentions of the designer to the people involved in purchasing hardware and materials. such as lathe. most mold makers depend on machinists specialized in their trade. 5. EDM. they are mass produced.2 Start of Mold Design 45 5. These detail drawings are prepared from the assembly drawings. a way can always be found to make the design use a standard size diameter. Once the assembly drawing is ®nished. screws used in molds must never be modi®ed. and machined to very close tolerances.2.2.6 Mold Hardware Hardware items include leader pins. Also. milling machine. using high-quality materials. They are all listed in catalogues issued by the various mold maker supply houses. . and. and ®nishing.1. bushings. Because screws should be tightened to about 60±70% of their yield strength. not even their length. screws. in good maintenance procedures all screws should be replaced every time the mold undergoes a major overhaul. A diameter should never be modi®ed. operating the mold. which are used to explain where the drawings alone could be ambivalent or misinterpreted. assembling the mold.2. other instructions such as hardness. a good mold designer will never modify these products. The assembly drawing of the mold must contain all pertinent information. a modi®ed screw is also dif®cult to replace in the ®eld. if deemed necessary. and many other mold parts that are required for the mold. Also. or other machine tool operators. complete with tolerances and. often by just changing the depth of a counter bore for the screw head. ejector pins and sleeves. there must be no doubt left about how the mold is to be built and operated. given in plan and section views and in notes. Any modi®cation of a screw will reduce its strength.2 5.5. with only one exception: the cutting to length of the ejector pins and sleeves.2. plating. there is always a way to make the design use a standard size.

the core half is shown. Sometimes other mold parts have to be altered to make it possible to use an incorrectly made but expensive part. or it could cause major interruptions until a solution is found to use and repair the wrong part. The answer is simple: enough to make sure that there is no possible misreading of a drawing. (d) ejector plate. (g) stop button. (e) mounting plate. The assembly drawing should Figure 5. 5.3 Arrangement of Views Most molds are laid out by starting from a (signi®cant) cross section and then drawing to the right of it (as the mold would be when mounted in the molding machine) a view into the cavity half of the mold. (m) leader pin. In the worst case. . This could become very expensive if an incorrectly made piece is not discovered until it reaches assembly.'' On the left side of the section view. (c) parallels.1).2. The assembly drawing should show above this view words such as ``Plan view into cavities. Too few views (or sections) means that in the best case.2 How Many Drawings and Views? This question is frequently asked. (h) ejector pin. (j) locating ring. often unnecessary views make more work for the detailer and can be confusing for the user of the drawings. the machinist will interrupt his work to come and ask for explanations. (n) leader pin bushing.46 Before Starting to Design a Mold 5. 5.2. (b) core (plate). (f) ejector retainer plate. that is. as if looking into the direction of the core and the moving platen. which costs in lost time. but will proceed in the wrong direction. (i) sprue bushing. into the injection side (see Fig. On the other hand.2.1 Arrangement of mold drawing layout: (a) cavity (plate).2. too many. the machinist will not ask. and then has to be remade.

on another sheet if necessary. 5. at what point in the cycle ejection starts. in case of an accident caused by the mold not being installed and operated as recommended by the designer. and must show clearly what the notes apply to. .4 Notes on Drawings Whenever it is impossible or cumbersome to specify some important information by using standard drawing techniques. it is good practice to show also. However. This can have legal implications: complete and correct information will protect the designer from any possible future litigation. not making pretty pictures. preferably ``to size'' (1 : 1).2 Start of Mold Design 47 show above this view words such as ``Plan view into cores. often 1 : 2. The note should be short. the drawing should not be cluttered with too many notes. or even 1 : 5.2. so that the various parts can be seen in proper proportion.5. often 2 : 1. Remember. 5 : 1 or 10 : 1. Also. the drawing must always be drawn to scale. Note that the drawings are part of the job and must be shipped to the customer together with the mold. set ratio. (2) any air and hydraulic circuits.'' The plan view drawings are made so that we see the parting line (plane) as visible. and all plates and mold features behind it as invisible lines. in case of large products. (3) any special electric circuits. a note should be added to express in concise but clear words what is intended. smaller.2.2. 5. and (4) a sequence of operation of the various mold functions. but not so short that it could be open to misinterpretation. for example.5 Additional Information on the Drawings For more complicated molds.2. or if this is not practical. ``To scale'' in this context means to draw to a selected. Additional full or partial cross sections and/or plan views should be added (usually on separate sheets) only when they can add information to the views already shown. or larger. separate schematic views of (1) all coolant circuits. and when air should be activated. the designer is in the business of designing molds.

2.2 Will the Product Slide (Pull) out of the Cavity? This point should be investigated ®rst.3 The Stack Layout By now. there is usually no problem.48 Before Starting to Design a Mold 5. The designer must always keep an open mind and be ready to scrap an earlier idea for a better one. (If more than one signi®cant feature cannot be shown in the main cross section.2. of secondary importance. at this point.2.2. the designer will probably have decided what type of mold should be built. to scale.) The cross sections will now be examined and a number of questions will have to be asked.1 Signi®cant Cross Section Which type of mold shoe will be ®nally selected for the job is. (1) In the case of a simple. 5. cup-shaped product. This means the section that shows all the areas that must be considered when designing the stack. all four walls may have to move. (2) Holes (cutouts) or projections in the side wall of the product may require special attention: will it be necessary to provide side cores? If side cores. a signi®cant cross section of the product. this will save time and money in the long run. The designer must now start with showing.1. guided by the possibilities discussed in Section 5. the more successful will be the ®nal result. because it will determine the complexity of the cavity. The more time spent on thinking and rethinking the problems at this time.3. All this will considerably . step by step. should there be one for each hole or one for a group of holes or projections? Should the cavity have a complete side wall moving? In the case of beverage crates.3. This does not necessarily mean that the designer is bound by this early decision. It may become necessary to reconsider as the design progresses. 5. which will create four vertical split (parting) lines. additionalÐor partialÐsections may have to be shown.

provided there are features (such as undercuts) on the core to ensure that there is enough force on the molded piece to pull it out of the cavity. Cases like this should be discussed with the designer of the product for which the mold will be built. shaped to snap over a similar extension in a matching product. and the cavity will split into four sections. there is no problem. thereby saving considerable expense. Are there other projections in the side wall of the product? If they are deep. as. they must be preloaded and backed up against the forces generated by the injection pressure. especially for large openings in the side walls. There may be a good chance that the product design could be slightly changed such that side cores are not necessary at all.3. creating two vertical split lines. Will the Product Eject Easily from the Core? 5. There may not always be enough space for the long side motions required for two splits. In some cases. for example. A frequently used undercut is a snap feature. small parting lines. which is a (usually circular) rim inside the product.2. but not require side cores or split cavities. Note that in all cases where side cores are used.2 Start of Mold Design 49 (3) (4) (5) (6) increase the complexity of the mold and increase the space required for each cavity and for the stack in general. The most common case is where the cavities split into two halves. Provided the shape of the snap rim (its cross sectionÐtapered and/or rounded suf®cientlyÐand the total circumferential length) is suitably designed for ejection. they will probably be considered like holes. If they are shallow (for example. where the cavity and the core can meet at an angle and produce additional.3 Are there any raised portions inside the product that would be molded in severe undercuts in the core and prevent the product from being ejected easily? (1) Snap (Fig. the large cutouts in the sides of a typical. shallow engraving could pull out of the cavity. large laundry basket. it will depend on the draft angle of the side wall and the plastic injected. the lid over a can. 5. this is common with pail molds where four moving side cores are wedged within the cavity block walls to contain the outward forces of the side cores. typically with draft angles over 5.2). Other possibilities can be considered. engraved printing or ornamentation). for example.5. and a stripper ring will easily eject the product by forcing the rim to expand while .

judiciously designed and placed undercuts should be speci®ed at the time of designing. or specially shaped slots and holes as often required in technical products. and the product will tear. (Right) example of 4-section snap. where the product will tend to shrink tightly onto the core. it can sometimes be broken down into several sections. do not leave it to the molder to add undercuts after the mold is in operation and causes ejection problems. Multiple threads may cause damage to the molded thread projections as they are dragged over the depressions for the successive threads in the core during ejection. they can be stripped from the core like the snap rim described above. Stripping with ejector pins. With many products. for example. (3) Unscrewing. Of course. If this is not enough to hold the product on the core. Undercuts are used to hold the product on the core. In some cases. To make the snap ring easier to stretch and to come off the core without breaking. the same is true for cup-shaped products with little side draft. to ensure proper ejection. such as slots for ribs. may also be used for stripping. and if the product is small. each covering about 60±70 of the circumference. There are several moldmakers specializing in unscrewing molds.2 (Left) Section through a cap with snap. the product must be unscrewed from the core. customer's approval must be secured before making such a change. If the threads are designed suitable for stripping. so that there will be. instead of covering the whole 360 . which means a much more complicated (and expensive) mold. to hold the product on the core side. there may not be enough length in the circumference to stretch. (4) Undercuts. located at some strategic points. using standard design mold shoes and stacks. (2) Internal threads. (In many cases. thereby reducing the cost of such molds. It is better if there is not more than one complete thread (360 ). there are enough ``vertical'' surfaces in the core. The proper location for these .) It must also be understood that there is a relationship between the amount the plastic that is stretched radially and circumferentially. often held by the vacuum between product and cavity wall. ejecting (``stripping''). For a certain cross section of the snap rim or thread. in nonround products. four sections. Note that this is more dif®cult to machine. especially in cases where the product is designed so that it could stay in the cavity while the mold opens.50 Before Starting to Design a Mold Figure 5. one thread may be strong enough for its intended purpose.

or ``collapsible cores. Before proceeding. As stated earlier. (5) Two-stage ejection. at right angles to the direction of the mold opening.3.2. preferably. a straight P/L is easiest to produce.'' Both systems are expensive. somewhat larger undercuts inside the core. the axis Figure 5. the location of the dividing plane (parting line. but it is frequently used in products that require a snap design inside the product. 5. and hard to maintain in operation. Chapter 12) This a more expensive design of the core and the ejection mechanism. then the stripper moves up to push the product off the sleeve while the projection on the inner sleeve moves inwards. (6) Deep projection inside the product. retractable core sections.2 Start of Mold Design 51 undercuts (which are usually not speci®ed by the product designer) is (a) near ejectors. During ejection. Chapter 12) 5. possibly with moving. or (b) preferably.4 Establishing the Parting Line (1) Primary parting line. as shown by the small arrows. and thus run much slower than a comparable mold without these features. that is. (See ME. but it is a well-accepted and reliable design. P/L) between cavity and core must be decided. This feature often requires very complicated core design. dif®cult to build.3 Schematic of 2-stage ejection: (a) core.3) may be a solution for some. they are also usually dif®cult to cool adequately. (See ME. near the tip of the core where the undercuts are more effective because the bottom of the product is stiffer. especially with hot runner molds. this is usually simple: it is at the widest portion of the product.5. In cupshaped products. It is often used for overcaps for spray bottles that are produced in really large quantities. Two-stage ejection (Fig. ®rst (1) and (2) move together so that the core can slide out. but not necessarily. (b) sleeve. . The cooling is less ef®cient. (c) stripper ring.

due to the shape of the rim. or rollers in tracks.4). and some method of operating mechanism. showing offset parting line: (a) cavity. (c) round core pin. such an offset P/L is preferable to a side core. they could also be timed. occasionally. hydraulic actuators independent of Figure 5. (2) Split cavities or side cores. both of which translate the opening motion of the mold into sideways motion. a simple handle of a mug. Operating mechanisms can be angle pins (horn pins). An offset (or stepped) P/L is sometimes required. of the mold. (e) core pin with shaped tip. and side cores at right angles to it. It is also. At this time the designer must also determine if the cavity needs to be split and where the split lines will be located. 5.52 Before Starting to Design a Mold Figure 5.5 Example of a louver mold: (a) cavity. (d) side core.4 (b) core. . for example. Schematic of mug with handle. or if side cores will be required. Both split cavities and side cores need backing up and preload against the forces created by the injection pressure. (b) core. on the outside of the product. the split lines are parallel to the axis of the mold. Usually. used for molding a large projection. but not always. which will also require space in the mold. which would be much more expensive to build (see Fig.

3.5). The core must now be withdrawn sideways. at this time of the design process.) These backups. (b) splits.5. the projected area (at right angles to the axis) of the product is very small compared to the projected area of the sides of the product. which would make for a much simpler mold. it will have a much smaller area exposed to the injection pressure and will need much less backing-up force. can result in a very bulky mold. (See also Section 5. If the core has suf®cient draft. but is often preferred to the alternative of split cavities. (e) product. . 5. especially for large splits.6) the primary P/L replaces the split line. These forces must be adequately backed up and preload provided to prevent the splits from cracking open during injection. but the stroke of such side cores will probably be much greater than the stroke of the split cavities.6 Illustration of a product and two possibilities of mold layout: (a) cavity. The right schematic shows the normally expected mold layout. Therefore. This could be an undesirable feature. Because of the outside shape (e. (d) core backing plate. deep engravings or projections) the cavity will have to be split. rotating the product 90 could also result in a better mold. air pressure alone could be suf®cient to eject the product from the core.2 Start of Mold Design 53 the clamp motion.6. the open end of the product is on top and the product is ejected downward from the (side) core and can fall unhindered.g. in Fig. to achieve with a straight (up-and-down) mold what would otherwise require side cores (see Fig 5. Figure 5. and the cavity and core halves are clamped by the machine clamping force Fc. 5. will the designer be able to determine which is better for the contemplated mold and how to proceed. Note that in the position shown in Fig. with the center line of the product parallel to the mold axis. Only by laying out to scale these alternatives. (Fc) clamp force. The designer should also consider if a better mold layout could be achieved by turning the product slightly.. In some cases. (Fs) force on splits.6. 5. (c) core. as shown schematically in Fig. the side cores will see considerably larger forces Fs at right angles to the mold axis. But by turning the product by 90 (left schematic.

in (B) and (C).2. (C) open-sided Figure 5. the pressure p within the cavity tries to separate the cavity and the core by pushing the cavity to the left and the core to the right.8 Schematic illustration of (left) a balanced and (right) an imbalanced mold: (a) cavity. (b) core.5 Is the Cavity Balanced? Figure 5. the forces of the imbalance will have to be taken up by the leader pins and bushings. the pressures inside the cavity push to the left and the right by the same amount. Figure 5. 5. which may not be strong enough in some cases.6 Determining the Method of Cavity Construction (1) Cavity and/or core are cut right into the mold plates. It does not matter if the side walls are at right angles to the internal pressure. In the drawing on the right. and wear rapidly. similar stack near the ®rst one so that the forces are pushing in opposite directions.3.54 Before Starting to Design a Mold 5. 5. the cavity is imbalanced. Some molds have only one or a few cavities cut into the mold . as indicated with heavy arrows.7 product.8. This would make the simplest mold. There is always a component of the pressure that will press in the direction at right angles to the mold axis.3. there could be one pair of wedges (similar to a wedge lock) located so that the imbalance is taken up there. Failing this. If this is not done. the cavity pressures are balanced. Within (A).2. on the left. The force trying to separate cavity and core can be balanced by placing a second. and there will be no force to move the core relative to the cavity. (p) internal injection pressure. The cavity is therefore balanced. (B). As can be seen in Fig. This must be taken into account when designing a mold with imbalance in the cavities. Schematic of cross section of (A) cup-shaped product.7 shows the elements present in every cavity shape.

'' prehardened. with more cavities. would be very costly to repair if they should be damaged.2. a typical mold steel is P20PQ. that is. or stainless steel. In some cases. The mold could consist of fewer parts. To machine such projections from the solid steel. If the outside of such an assembly is a (not necessarily round.2 Start of Mold Design 55 plate. arranged to form the cavity assembly. but there have been molds like this built for smaller products. The problem is to provide the necessary accuracy of machining. prehardened. where the product is deep. Such cavities and cores may still require inserts (usually pins) whenever small holes and so on in the product would require delicate projections in the molding surface. It can be seen that this total space can be much larger than the cavity by itself. These forces will tend to loosen the inserts and can create gaps between them or between inserts and cavity plate. without the need for a surrounding ring.7 Determining the Total Area of the Stack The total area of the stack is the total of the space of the cavity (including the ring discussed above. mainly for very large products. and mold life. actuation. this assembled cavity can be treated as a solid cavity and mounted on top of the cavity plate or be inserted into it. but the cores are usually separate from and mounted in or on the core plate. cooling. 5. where plastic can ¯ash into. These cavities are then either mounted on top of the cavity plate or inserted into it.5. and will determine the size of the mold and affect the cavity . The mold steel selected should be of ``mold quality. Individual. while possible. but suf®ciently strong) ring (or ``chase'') into which the inserts are placed. (2) Composite cavities and cores. and if there are no foreseeable problems with ejection. one-piece cavity and core plates are often selected for single-cavity molds. Cavities can also consist of an assembly of separate pieces. For practical reasons. this is the most common design. which may also include cooling channels) plus the area (space) of any added features that may be required. such inserts must be pressed into their chase (or into the mold plate) to create a preload larger than the expected side forces. especially in the absence of suf®ciently large. it is a good method. with inserts as needed. accurate machine tools. such as side core components outside the cavity or core. and the backup. solid cavities are cut from mold steel. the inserts are directly placed inside the cavity plate. plus space for their motion. Note that the forces from the injection pressure on the sides of the cavities are considerable.3. especially if the projected area at right angles to the mold axis is large. especially for very large molds. Properly designed.

8 Determining the Core Construction Cores may require quite a number of inserts and even moving parts. and where uneven wall thicknesses can create differential pressures on opposing sides of a core.2. Chapter 10. Single-Cavity Molds The arrangement. they are rarely inserted into the core plate. which require higher injection pressures. Such de¯ected cores return to their original shape as soon as the product is ejected. the injection pressure is usually of little concern (except in some special cases) because this pressure tends to compress the core from all directions rather than expand it as it does the cavity.3. we should understand the various systems and where they are most appropriate. Core shift can also be affected by the location of the gate. resulting in uneven wall thicknesses around the core. Problems like this can sometimes be solved by supporting the tip of the core in a matching hole in the cavity when the mold is closed or by some other.1 Cold Runner. is simple.4. 5. This could have been speci®ed with the job order. (See ME. but is also often used for smaller ones. effective. It is easily understood that a mold without side cores requires much less space. 5.) Cores are usually mounted on top of the core plate. . but by that time it already has uneven walls. 5. which is better. The disadvantage is that the gate is large and must be cut or even machined if appearance is important. This is mostly of concern with thin-walled products. thereby creating forces that de¯ect (bend) the core during injection. multiple gates are sometimes a solution. but. as shown in Fig.2. but more expensive.2. thoughÐthe ``core shift. There is one serious problem.'' especially with long slender cores. nevertheless. either solidly (the most common method) or ¯oating.4 Selection of a Suitable Runner System We must now consider how the plastic will be channeled from the machine nozzle to the cavity space. and is resisted by the compressive strength of the core material. when the ¯ow and the pressure of the inrushing plastic can de¯ect a core. and a much smaller layout. and good for very large products. often patented methods.9. 5.56 Before Starting to Design a Mold layout. for the same number of cavities.

(b) core. (f) gate. 2-Plate Molds The mold on the left in Fig. (c) sprue. (center) a 3-plate mold. (h) nozzle. (e) hot runner. If a gate is blocked.9 Schematic of (large) single-cavity mold: (a) cavity. (2) The mass Figure 5. The products and the runners stay together when ejected and must be separated after molding. but products and runners are still mixed together and require separation. An edge-gated arrangement is shown. and (4) the system is not sensitive to dirt in the plastic. Also. There are other methods of gating.5.2 Cold Runner. (3) color changes are easy. The advantages of this system are (1) simplicity and (2) low cost. (d) cold runner. (f) hot runner manifold. P/L. some of which are self-degating as the mold opens. The disadvantages are (1) these molds usually have longer molding cycles because of the longer time required to cool the often large runners.4. (b) core plate. (d) nozzle seat.10 Schematic illustrations of (left) a 2-plate mold.2.10 has only one P/L. . (c) third plate. Chapter 10. parting line. it is clean again after the runner is ejected. 5. 5. (g) hot runner backing plate. More about gates in ME. and (right) a hot-runner mold: (a) cavity plate.2 Start of Mold Design 57 Figure 5.

see the difference between left and center (or right) illustrations in Fig. ®rst in plasticizing. or gated anywhere on the top surface. and so on to provide the necessary motions. losses of plastic (maybe 10% of the scrap) in the course of this process are unavoidable. but the system is inherently selfdegating. with the products still on them) continues to move away from the cavity plate and the products can be ejected. with links.58 Before Starting to Design a Mold of the runners must be added to the mass to be plasticized for the products. the mass of the runners is as great as the mass of the products. such as screw caps. or even greater. 5. (2) It is very dif®cult to guarantee 100% automatic ejection of the runner system. and there is always a danger of contamination of the plastic. The mold in the center of Fig. Disadvantages: (1) Three-plate molds are much more complicated and expensive. the cavity plate travels with the moving mold half.4. as soon as the cavity plate has reached a limited distance the moving mold half (the cores. (5) The system is not sensitive to dirt in the plastic.2. Also. energy is needed for regrinding. This system is often used for very small products. (4) Color changes are easy. the plastic in the gates is severed. still on the cores. Advantages: (1) The products can be center gated. At the moment when the product. the cavities can be closer together and more cavities can be placed in a mold of comparable size. therefore. and so on. (3) With 3-plate molds. (2) Due to the absence of runners in the P/L. 5. (3) The gate vestige is usually very small. which should be center gated for best molding ¯ow. P/L 2 separates and permits the ejection of the runner system in a separate plane. air actuators. There are numerous systems. the runner mass can be greater than the total mass of the products. this requires more handling (costs). with excellent appearance. Then. ®rst. start pulling out of the cavity.10 has two P/Ls. In some cases. overcaps. 2-plate molds are used in the vast majority of multicavity molds. As the clamp opens. such as in containers. (3) Although in many cases the runners can be reused. If a gate is blocked. and where the appearance of the top surface of the molded piece is important. too. Even so. the same comments regarding productivity apply as for 2-plate molds. 5. 3-Plate Molds Three-plate molds are also cold runner molds. after P/L 1 is opened.3 Cold Runner. by some more or less complicated mechanism.10. it is clean again after the runner is ejected. chains. energy is wasted. . then in cooling.

can be very important for the ®lling of the cavity spaces. the plastic (melt) is kept hot. in some cases. Advantages of hot runner molds: (1) The cavity spacing can be similar to a 3-plate mold.4 Hot Runner (HR) Molds In the system on the right in Fig. thus adding to the mold cost. that is. new color is . A measure of a good hot runner system is the number of shots required to change from a darker color to a lighter one. as timed. When the mold recloses. (3) There is no need for regrinding. once ``on cycle. 5. the HR manifold. The plastic within the hot runner system must be completely clean before a new color can be used. after clean.5. A good HR will do this in about 15 shots.2. Larger gates are also of advantage for materials that are sensitive to high stresses. The size of the gates can be much larger than with open gates. But during operation of the mold. and the materials selection. Some molds. (1) Open gates depend on their size and shape and on the operating pressure and temperature of the plastic. the heaters must be strong. Disadvantages: (1) Higher mold cost (but not much different from a 3-plate mold. especially with a well-designed system with a minimum of heat losses to the surrounding.'' require no heat at all or as little a 5% of the rated heater capacity of the hot runner system. closer. the injection pressure must push the frozen ``plug'' of plastic out of the gate into the cavity space and thereby permit the plastic to ¯ow again. (Note that it is not the purpose of the hot runner system to add to or regulate the melt temperature.4. the gate must freeze suf®ciently to stop the plastic from drooling into the cavity while the mold is open for ejection of the products. To make the plastic hot again to restart the mold in a reasonable time (15±30 minutes). cooled plates. when the power is off. the temperature pro®le around the gate. because dirt can more easily pass through a large opening. This requires more mechanisms and controls.) When the mold stops operating. except for scrap during start-up. but just to keep it as it comes out of the machine nozzle. and (usually) the HR nozzles (which terminate at the gate) ensure that the plastic stays at the required temperature. (2) Dif®cult color changes. it also reduces the sensitivity to dirt. (2) Valved gates are closed and opened by mechanical (or electrical) means. the heat requirements are small. The main design problems in hot runner molds are the gate shape.10. Heaters in the sprue bushing. the plastic in the hot runner will freeze. At the end of the injection stroke. that is. on its way from the machine nozzle to the gate. (2) The mold output can be greater since all material that is plasticized is used to produce products. making good use of the available space. which.2 Start of Mold Design 59 5.

(a) Cavity.11 Schematic of a 16-cavity mold: (Left) common cold runner mold. A good mold design makes sure that this cleaning can be easily performed while the mold is in the machine.11. If there is a gate blocked by dirt. The sensitivity to dirt also suggests that the molder should use virgin plastics rather than regrinds. (1) For multicavity molds (Fig. This is done sometimes for very small products. (c±f) cold runners. the runner channels taper down from a heavy cross section where the plastic enters the mold at the sprue. (4) Cost of plastic.5 Cold and Hot Runner Molds. which are more likely to be contaminated. Many such combinations are possible. To prevent large pressure drops while avoiding unnecessary large masses of plastic. Two typical examples are shown in Fig. there are still problems to mold very small products. This will affect the cost of the product. which.4. (5) With today's technology. it may even be necessary to remove the mold from the machine. to reduce the pressure drop from machine nozzle to the gates. because of the long residence time of the plastic in the runner system.2.60 Before Starting to Design a Mold coming from the injection unit. . 5. especially if the distances from nozzle to gates are very large. becoming gradually smaller every Figure 5. (g) hot runner. which may take anywhere from half an hour to a day. 5. if too long.11. to avoid excessive residence time in the HR system. in Combination Combinations of hot and cold runner molds are usually selected for cases where cold runner molds (edge or center gated) would have advantages over hot runner molds. left). the runner system could become quite large. causes the plastic to degrade. or for very large products. the nozzles must be accessed for cleaning. (Right) combination hot and cold runner mold. 5. (b) sprue. (3) Very sensitive to dirt in the plastic.

5.11. this is wasteful. and each branch will then supply a cold runner system. but instead of having a large cold runner supply. (i) gate. for example. without signi®cant loss of pressure and without the need to reprocess the heavy runners. 2-plate in this example. these edge gates. for a balanced clamp force. 5. . schematic example for a similar mold in which the total runner system is divided into a (4-branch) hot runner system. (b) sprue. the heavy runners are dif®cult to cool and add much to the plastic that must be recycled.2 Start of Mold Design 61 time the runner splits. This will ensure that all cavities are ®lled properly. as explained earlier. in the automotive industry. a (usually nonstandard) hot runner manifold. right shows a simple. until it arrives at the gates (symbolized in Fig.12 Schematic of a large molding. (j) cold runner.11. 5. (g) hot runner branch. The pressure drop in the hot runner channels is small.5.) Figure 5. Figure 5. or other method of ducting the hot plastic will bring the plastic to the gates (or group of gates). (h) hot runner nozzle. the product should be edge gated.12) as found. (2) For very large products (Fig. but not with 2-plate molds because the machine nozzle is in the center of the platens. and the ®nal branches of the cold runner can be kept as small as they would be with the common runner layout shown on the left in Fig. (Exception: Special molding machines equipped with an offset extruder or one that can be located outside the platen and injected in the side of the mold or even into the P/L. This is possible with standard 3-plate molds. Another advantage is that the product can be placed approximately symmetrically around the center of the machine. The edge gates are located where best suited for the product. with 6 cold runner edge gates and a hot runner system with nozzles into each of the cold runners: (a) product. However.11 with the line width of the runners).

but only if the cycle is not too long. the.6 Insulated Runner Molds Figure 5. and reliable. even pushing the. (e) insulated runner. but the sprue is an insulated runner. In this system. The hot runner is replaced with a much simpler insulated runner channel (e). frozen gate out of the way. (d) nozzle seat. as if the gate were frozen. and it is not sensitive to dirt. the next cycle can be started. the plastic in the center of the runner remains hot. (b) core. by now. Molds with up to 16 cavities have been built and run successfully. and with some materials even longer. (c) backing plate.13 (left) shows a mold similar to that in Fig. before the plastic freezes.9. This system is very inexpensive.13 (right) shows a mold similar to the schematics in Fig. successive injected plastic will be able to ¯ow through the hot core of the runner system without any added heat. frozen runner must be removed. the cold ``plug'' is easily extracted after retracting the machine nozzle. as soon as the machine nozzle is again in position. by then. simple. even though the plastic close to the cooled walls will freeze.4. This method is simple. 5. inexpensive.2. the mold must be split open between the cavity plate (a) and the backing plate (c). The plastic within the runner will stay hot long enough that the material injected during the next cycle will ``shoot through'' the still hot plastic. but the start-up procedure is somewhat awkward and possibly dangerous if performed by operators not skilled in this system. The gate can be very small but must be properly designed for shape and size.10 (right). Figure 5.62 Before Starting to Design a Mold 5. Cycle times of up to 30 seconds can be successfully handled.13 Schematics of single and multiple insulated runner molds: (a) cavity. depending on the plastic used. It works well at cycle times up to 15 seconds. . and reliable. and even longer. and the plates locked together again before restarting. If the plastic freezes. often several starts are needed before the mold will run on cycle. If the runner freezes. but it is better to stay Figure 5. If some dirt blocks the gate. it can be easily removed. (f) gate. 5.

there should be as small a volume (inventory) of plastic as possible in the system between machine nozzle and cavity. in the case of cold runner systems. There should be a minimum pressure drop between the machine nozzle and the cavity space. There should be a minimum heat loss between machine nozzle and cavity. the same applies when molding very small products. others are not. Without ever stopping the machine.5. In hot runners. therefore. the higher will be the pressure drop. This affects selected runner lengths. after the gate. some of these requirements are contradictory. the smaller the runner cross sections. Unfortunately. so that the plastic within the manifold is continually replaced. 57. j Rule 1: Pressure drop. and the smaller the gates are. after about 15 shots. which can degrade the plastic within the runner system. Color changes are very easy. because of the larger mass of the runners. 5. and in such cases the best compromise must be found. thereby reducing the length of exposure to heat.4. Heat loss affects the melt temperature and increases the viscosity of the plastic. The time for each temperature before the plastic starts to degrade is different for each plastic and is shown in graphs that can be obtained from plastics materials suppliers. runner cross sections.2. making it harder to inject. This is especially important with slow cycles where the plastic resides for a long time in the manifold. thereby increasing the inventory (see rule 2) in the case of hot runner molds. This means that often the length and thickness of runners must be increased. j j . and the longer the plastic will be exposed to the heat in the hot runner manifold. by just changing to a new color in the extruder hopper. it is desirable to have the inventory not larger than between 2 and 3 times the total mass of one shot.2 Start of Mold Design 63 with not more than 6 cavities. This will increase the time required for cooling the runners. Some plastics are very heat sensitive. For most plastics. Rule 3: Heat loss. Rule 2: Plastic inventory. pieces with the new color are produced. less pressure is available to ®ll the cavities. see rule 1). The larger the runners (less pressure drop. More about this in IMT. the greater will be the inventory.7 Common Rules for Runner Systems There are some basic rules to consider that apply to any and all runner systems. The longer the runners. p. and gate size.

Some heat losses are unavoidable because the hot runner manifold must be well supported (against injection pressure) by its backing plate.2. Rule 9: Breaking up the plastics ¯ow. In any runner system. Rule 8: Location of gates. for shortest molding cycles.4. thus increasing the electric power used. while waiting longer until the runners are cool (stiff) enough for ejection. the heat loss into the surrounding plates can raise their temperature and affect the mold alignment. A general rule is that the distance from the gate to the farthest corners of the cavity space should be about the same. Rule 5: Hot runner molds only. there should be only one gate per cavity. and appearance of the product. gating in the center of the product will ®ll this condition. The area around sprue and all runners should be well cooled.64 Before Starting to Design a Mold j Rule 4: Cold runners only. These necessary areas of contact conduct heat away from the hot runner to the surrounding cooled plates. There are exception to this rule: (1) where core shift could be a serious problem.8. The hot runner system should be well heat insulated from the surrounding plates. Also. good cooling is necessary for these plates. center gating is not acceptable if the center of the product must be clear or does not permit a gate vestige. the density of the plastic in the cavity space. poor cooling of the runners (little heat loss of the melt) means longer cycles. This applies especially to large moldings. It is not always possible to follow rule 6 completely. It will also result in differences in the surface de®nition. but every effort should be made to do so. and by the features necessary to locate it within the mold. (2) where the ¯ow length L from the gate to the farthest corner (or rim) of the molding is very great.) Pressure differences from cavity to cavity will affect the amount of plastic entering the gate before it freezes. Ideally. gates should be located so that the stream from the gate is broken up as soon as it enters the cavity j j j j j . Gate location depends on the shape of the product. Preferably. Rule 6: Balanced runners. Rule 7: Number of gates per cavity. the pressure drop from the machine nozzle to each cavity space (gate) should be the same. (See also rule 10. but this is often more expensive than edge gating. In some cases. In cold runner molds. Heat may have to be added through the hot runner manifold heaters to make up any heat losses. and thereby the strength and quality of the molded piece. individual adjustments to gate sizes may help to ensure more uniformity of the products. Wherever possible. In some cases. two or more gates may be located symmetrically around a delicate core to equalize pressure and ¯ow around the core. See also Section 5.

or other surface ¯aws. such as containers. . by increasing the number of gates and spacing them judiciously. L/t Ratio 5. that is. center gated in the bottom. In the case of large products. In this case.4. visible ¯ow lines of the plastic.5.2. by colliding either with an opposing wall or.2. For example. has a distance of 300 mm from the gate to the rim.5 5.0 mm.2 Start of Mold Design 65 space.1 Venting What Is a Vent? A vent is a small gap in the molding surface. whether they are center or edge gated. but also to ¯at products. j Rule 10: Avoid reversed ¯ow (if possible). it can be stated that an Lat smaller than 100 is usually easy to ®ll and (with some exceptions) a ratio of 100 to 200 is more dif®cult to ®ll. with some projection (such as a pin) in the cavity space. This is the distance from the gate to the farthest corner (or rim) of the product. at least. the Lat ratio can be reduced. it may even be impossible to ®ll. It applies not only to cup-shaped products. This will prevent the effects of jetting. during injection. it will trap air. Reducing the Lat ratio in this way would also allow the mold to cycle faster. This creates additional fronts ¯owing toward the front of the stream coming from the gate.5. which must be vented. a container. The wall thickness is 2. Any ratio above 200 is dif®cult to ®ll and may require special attention. located where air is expected to be trapped by the advancing and/or converging streams of plastic. Venting must be carefully considered to ensure that any air trapped between the fronts of the plastics ¯ow from more than one gate will be able to escape. Gating into ribs or other heavy sections may cause the plastic to ¯ow easily and quickly around some thinner areas of the cavity space. and a piece can be produced that would otherwise be impossible to mold. the Lat ratio is 300 divided by 2.8 An important characteristic of any product (and the cavity space) is the Lat (``L over t'') ratio. and venting can often be provided by judiciously placing ejector pins or vent pins at such locations where the plastics fronts are expected to meet. divided by the typical wall thickness through which the plastic must ¯ow. This occurs sometimes in heavier moldings. From experience.2. which equals 150 (Lat ˆ 150). 5.

5. Its size (the gap) will obviously depend on the viscosity and the pressure of the plastic. Consider locating vents at points where two or more fronts of plastic ¯ow will meet (for example. (f) vent channel. . The distance in the gap through which the air has to squeeze is called the land. Especially with thin-walled.) Rule 3: Weld lines.66 Before Starting to Design a Mold 5. Rule 4: Vent gap. Commonly used are gaps of about 0. when large cross sections in the cavity space cause the plastic to run around an enclosed area. Rule 5: Land. where weld lines are anticipated).2.14 Examples of vents: (left) section through vent. typically. but other areas are often as important. (d) land. and channels (Fig. but also with others products. thereby preventing the melt to enter there. provide vents where the melt ¯ow is expected to end.01 mm (0. (b) core. vent grooves. It is good j j j j Figure 5. The gap must be large enough to let air pass. Remember. disposable goods. (c) gap. vent groove. (g) continuous vent. (h) spot vent. for example. (right) spot vents. typically. all ¯uids always travel the path of least resistance. This is important when using more than one gate into one cavity space. 5. the molding cycles depend on the speed with which air can escape the cavity space. at deep bosses or ribs. and vent channel. Rule 2: Ends of the melt ¯ow.2 j Design Rules That Apply to all Molds Rule 1: How much venting? Always provide as much venting as possible! The parting line is the ideal location for vents.14). (a) Cavity. but small enough so that the inrushing plastic cannot follow. For good ®lling of the product. and at any and all other points where air could be trapped. (e) vent groove. (If ribs end at the P/L. (center) continuous vent.0004 inch). there is usually no need for additional vents. There are several considerations when designing the vent. or where it is expected that the melt ¯ow from one gate will split and then reunite.

Most plastics exude sticky substances that over time plug the vents. the deciding factor is the ease of machining (grinding) them into the mold. (Longer land is. and venting where two ®xed mold components have a vent cut. a small vent at the P/L was cut into the mold.5 to 2. are considered self-cleaning.250 inch) wide.080 inch) or even less. but to a permanently pressurized air supply that blows through the vents when the mold is open. This applies to ®xed vent pins. the land should connect to a hole leading to the outside. j . the land should end in a vent groove. Rule 7: Cleaning of vents. because of their motion while ejecting. j Rule 6: Width of gap. For vents not at the P/L. The length suggested for most molds is 1. at least 1 mm (0. Frequently.060 to 0. not to the outside. Today. the vent pins or other vents inside the mold are connected with drilled holes. The molder noticed spots where the plastic was burnt at the edge of the product. the cross section of the vent grooves and channels should be commensurate with the amount of air expected to ¯ow through them. at the bottom of a deep rib. Continuous vents on the P/L are often speci®ed for high-speed molds where they allow air to escape quicker than through a number of spot vents.0 mm (0. with hand tools.5.080 inch) wide. but are more often about 6 mm (0. There are spot vents and continuous vents. it must be permitted to ¯ow away from the mold. The vents can be as narrow as 2 mm (0. possible but will offer more resistance to the escaping air. the mold designer must anticipate where spot vents will be required and specify their width. Consider how vents are to be kept clean. It does not matter where the vents or channels are located on the P/L. they can be on the core side or the cavity side of the mold. for example. the best-designed vent will not function if the air cannot go anywhere. Specially designed vent pins are ®xed in their locations and will have to be cleaned from time to time to ensure proper functioning. of course. running approximately parallel to the edge of the product. often crudely. The vents in the P/L can be easily cleaned by wiping from time to time.) However. For venting at the P/L.040 inch) deep 6 2 mm (0. Spot vents were used commonly in earlier days of mold making. Ejector pins and sleeves have clearances suitable for good venting and. where the burning occurred. and vent channels leading away from speci®c vents or from vent grooves.080 inch). As the air escapes through the vent gap.2 Start of Mold Design 67 practice to make the land very short. It does not affect the molding because the injection pressure is many times greater than the air pressure.

The plate thickness can be calculated with complicated but accurate methods.9. and after a few months of operation.6 Ejection (See also ME. almost the whole area under the core can be well supported because there are no ejector pins or sleeves there. . The designer must also consider that the core must be backed up against excessive de¯ection of the core backing plate during injection. there are many ways to eject a product. while allowing suf®cient space for the backing up of the core plate and for aligning and guiding the ejector plate. the cavity or core surfaces meeting at the P/L are compressed to such extent that the vent gap is reduced or even eliminated. including the location of the now also selected ejector plate return features. This may take several attempts of layouts before settling on a ®nal solution. it still may be necessary to relocate some ejector pins or some cooling channels. heavy core backing plates to minimize de¯ection. Chapter 17. can in¯uence the spacing of the stacks in a multicavity mold. The selected method will now be shown in proper relationship to the (cavity and core) stack. (2) the type of mold. At this point in the design process. This is sometimes overlooked. that is. If it is not possible (because of close spacing of ejector pins) to provide direct backing support. As discussed in Section 4. a mold that ran ®ne at ®rst gradually stops producing good products and will require recutting of the vents. these plates must not be guided by ejector pins or return pins. The designer must also consider that after the mold cooling has been decided.2. Chapter 12) This is the next step in the design of the stack. due to fatigue of the mold steels. 5. The designer must make sure that in strength calculations referring to the compression of this area when clamping the mold. Note that all ejector plates must be guided independently. Space requirements for ejection mechanisms. But even in molds to be run in vertical machines it is good practice to guide the ejector plates. The designer must not forget that the vents and the vent channels reduce the area where cavity and core meet (the P/L). This backing up is usually simple with stripper rings or plates. and (3) the expected productivity. the actual area of the P/L is considered. or approximated as shown in ME. the only solution is to provide very thick. It is often quite dif®cult to locate the ejector pins in the most effective locations. the designer will determine which method will be most suitable for (1) the shape of the product. such as support pillars. because the weight of the plate will tend to bend these pins in the (usually horizontal) molding machines.68 Before Starting to Design a Mold j Rule 8: Strength of P/L. under the core plate.

Chapter 13. The designer must understand that there are great differences in heat conductivity in the materials commonly used for molds.1 Purpose of Cooling a Mold (1) Cooling is directly related to productivity. air could be blown at the hot mold surfaces to cool them and to speed the process up somewhat. it could rely entirely on giving up the heat energy. even for high production). Instead of water cooling. the added cost to the molding process is small compared with the possibly much higher mold cost with intricate cooling arrangements.2.7. the better must be the cooling. to the surrounding shop (ambient) temperature. The designer must also understand that the amount of heat removed . but it is done occasionally if the total production is very small. with high production molds. and the mold cost becomes signi®cant only if production is fairly low. The heat must travel through cavity and core to the surface where they are mounted. the faster the mold must be brought back to its optimal operating temperature. that is. it should be done without ``going all out''. This could take a very long time. especially with heavy sections and large masses of plastic. when it is not possible to cool a very delicate mold part by conventional cooling means. In certain types of molds (especially molds for intricate technical products. there should be no limits to ingenuity when designing the cooling channel layout or selecting the mold materials for good conductivity and mold life. the cooling of the mounting or backing plates is often acceptable. without any intricate cooling channels within cavities and cores. that is. while a relatively low production mold should be well cooled. but only highlights the most important areas and principles to be considered by the designer. the molder is really interested only in getting the best product at the lowest cost. which was put into it during injection of the hot plastic. An injection mold could also work without any cooling. The higher the productivity that is expected from a mold. However. This method is inexpensive but will add time to the molding cycle.7 Cooling This section does not go into the details of mold cooling. 5. and be removed by the plates by a pattern of simple (drilled) water channels.2. (3) Heat conductivity of mold materials. This is a typical area where compromises may be necessary. This is sometimes done even in production molds. For more information. This means that. (2) Productivity.5.2 Start of Mold Design 69 5. As should be stressed again and again. when compared to complicated cooling layouts. the designer should consult ME.

In most such molds the cavity does not need as much cooling as the core. more energy (heat) is needed to melt crystalline plastics. it will start to shrink. as the plastic stream tends to wash out and increase the gate size. This method is often used in mold parts opposite the gate where the hot plastic hits ®rst as it comes out of the gate. The designer will make sure that such replacement is easy to do. for example. and special precautions. which is in many applications suf®cient.g. by using the same mold. there will be (a) a better contact with the core. Note that BeCu is much more expensive than mold steel. and are often used for such delicate mold parts. have different heat conductivities. This is signi®cant for products with heavy walls and will increase the cooling time regardless of how well the wall (or mold part) is cooled. is not as resistant to wear as hard mold steel. it may be almost impossible to provide cooling lines in small mold parts. There is also the difference between crystalline and amorphous plastics. As soon as the plastic touches the walls of the cooled cavity space. this happens (in most cases) in the direction away from the cavity. PS). and (b) a space created between the plastic and the cavity wall. Caution: BeCu gives off poisonous gases during machining. it can be used prehardened at about Rc 35±38.70 Before Starting to Design a Mold per unit of time depends on the distance the heat must travel. (4) Heat conductivity of molding materials. are necessary. small pins and blades. it will take longer to mold a product from PE than from PS. Because the shrinking plastic will start to hug the core. In some cases. will heat up much more than the well-cooled cavity walls. as soon as the plastic begins to cool. gates if made from BeCu must be replaced frequently. BeCu. PE or PP) contain more heat and give it up slower to the coolant than amorphous plastics (e. it freezes.g. Unfortunately . wherever it is important that heat be removed fast. will contain air. even though such parts can be well cooled by cross drilling or are surrounded by coolant channels. and in parts surrounding the hot gate. provide about four times better heat conductivity than steel. such as beryllium±copper (BeCu) alloys. In practical terms. and more energy (in cooling) is needed to cool it down again. Certain larger parts in high-speed molds are also made from BeCu. Dirt and corrosion in cooling lines also act like heat barriers and affect the heat transfer from the mold to the cooling medium. for example. which makes it more dif®cult for the following layers to give up heat to the mold wall or insert. without going into details.. Crystalline plastics (e. Both air or vacuum are ideal heat insulators and reduce the heat ¯ow from the plastic to the cavity wall. such as ventilation of the work place. this space contains a vacuum or if properly vented. the heat will then move faster than in steel to reach a well-cooled mold part or plate. too. Also. Special mold materials. even when hard. Plastics. and thereby control the molding cycle..

Many existing molds have lots of unnecessary cooling in the cavity. and each has its own coolant connection to a central water supply (header. All this can add .2 Start of Mold Design 71 for the designer. occasionally.) This is fairly inexpensive. and. For very high production molds. it is somewhat different. and the cooling of the cavity also becomes important because the plastic stays in contact with the cavity walls for much longer. similarly.2. especially when there are more than six cavities. It may also require going back to the stack layout and changing the ejection layout to arrive at a good compromise in locating both ejection and cooling. For example. This may require several attempts of layouts before settling on one solution. and the plastic stays in contact with the cavity wall longer. often more than one cooling circuit per core or cavity. core.5. there is much more space in the cavityÐwhere cooling is not needed as muchÐto provide lots of cooling circuitry. make sure that all channels are dimensioned so that the coolant will have turbulent ¯ow and that the location of channels from the molding surfaces is as suggested for ef®ciency and strength. in case of multicavity molds? There are several possibilities. etc. and/or air channels in it. the shrinking volume is replenished during the cooling cycle. some plates should also be cooled because of possible alignment problems. this may take considerable design time but it is always worth it. the cavity. and often there are several cooling circuits per cavity. How will the coolant be supplied to the cavities and cores. (1) Each cavity or core is mounted on its respective backing plate.2 Show Cooling Lines in Stack The next step in the design is to show the selected cooling lines in the stack. and. especially when there are also ejectors. while the coreÐwhich does more of the coolingÐis much more dif®cult to cool. In addition. but not very good because of the large number of hose connections required. moving parts. Even so.7. There are exceptions to the foregoing. that is. 5. The injected plastic is so thin that there is less effect of shrinkage. the stripper plate and any side cores or cavity splits. As mentioned earlier. if a product has heavy walls and a large gate. there is a problem: usually. With molds for thin-walled products. the cavity cooling is never as important as the core cooling. injection pressure can be maintained longer. Remember that every cooling circuit has an IN and an OUT connection (2 hoses).

but reduces the number of hoses required to a minimum. they can be held in them with ``heels. Cross-drilled channels are more expensive to produce than the method shown in (1). To prevent leaking. where cavities or cores are inserted in plates. The coolant should be either ON or OFF. a possible nightmare for mold installation. (3) The cavities are often inserted (fully or partly) and therefore ®xed in position. the same amount of coolant. for example. the designer will locate the screws connecting the cavities and cores to their plates. sometimes even allowed to ¯oat. more than one passage may be covered by one O-ring (use O-ring manufacturers guidelines). In some cases. In exceptional cases. These sizes should be calculated and located so that all cavities or cores will be able to draw. but if the inserts are round. individual alignment. but it is important that no screws are allowed in a wet area. It is very desirable (for mold making and for servicing) that all stack parts are the same. but even this is old-fashioned and unnecessary if the mold is properly designed. This method is more complicated than (1). with dowels. or in operation. O-ring grooves and ®nishes must be properly speci®ed. For the coolant connection. the designer should spend some time to see if all parts can be mounted without the need for ``right'' or ``left'' parts. O-rings will be required at all ¯uid passages from one mold part to another. for perfect. it may be necessary to shut off the cooling around hot runner nozzles during start-up.72 Before Starting to Design a Mold up to a very large number of hose connections.'' and. The designer should always make sure to use .2. so that they cannot turn. In cases (2) and (3). do not require screws. the same applies as in (2). 5. Note that the coolant should not be used to regulate the ¯ow through some portions of the mold during the operation of a mold.3 Screws At this time only. as nearly as possible. therefore. Regardless of which of the above three methods are used. If screws are used they too should be located so that there is no need for ``right'' and ``left'' parts. Any leakage from one passage to another within the O-ring (``wet'') area can be ignored. The mold plates are cross drilled with channels of various (larger) sizes to supply the coolant and to return it.7. The cores are usually screwed on backing plates. the designer must now consider where the coolant connections are located in those stack members that will be cooled. (2) Cavities and cores receive the coolant from their underlying plate. but such molds are much less troublesome to install. this can often be achieved by judiciously locating the coolant channels. they must be oriented. In some cases.

What is preload? As an example.'' Often. and to select the largest screws possible in that location. or to ``go back to the drawing board. 5. imagine two blocks that are held together by two screws. Chapter 19. (See also ME. These blocks are subjected to a force F trying to separate them. or at least should be. see Section 4. and the result will be a better operating.2. If both screws are hand tightened. screws. most molds have too many. but frequently. 5. and maybe a lower cost.11.5. not necessarily the stack. Will the overall alignment of the mold shoe with leader pins be enough? Should each stack be aligned by taper locks? By a pair of leader pins? For this decision.9 Design Review This is a good time to sit back and contemplate what has been achieved so far. in the head of the experienced designer. and all the work done up to now would normally not take more than a few hours for an easy mold or maybe a few days for a more complicated one. new ideas come out of these meetings. mold. before proceeding. any screw thread smaller than 8 mm diameter (while of course possible) is more costly to produce. as experience has shown. without any gap between them. This is also the time that the designer arranges for a design review. Note that the foregoing applies for all screws in the mold. only minor changes may be required. Is it really the best thing the designer could come up with? Please note that all the things discussed up to now in this text are. From experience.) 5.3 Preload The term ``preload'' has been mentioned several times in our discussion. that is. as discussed earlier. the screws will not exert any force SF on the .3 Preload 73 the lowest number of screws required to contain the expected forces that the screws are supposed to withstand. often unnecessary.2. The result of such review will then determine whether to proceed as shown. as a general rule.8 Alignment of Stack This should also be decided now. In manufacturing. tightened just enough that the blocks touch.

preferably both on the cavity and core side. as in the following example. the preload is provided by having the cavity sections backed up by wedges. Screws must always be tightened to the manufacturers suggested values. and because F is greater than FS (F b FS). or by shrinking of rings or bars overÐusuallyÐcavities. the designer will think of the materials (steels. such as tapers. (See also Chapter 9) . (2) The preload can be provided by stretching the steel of mold parts. As the mold closes fully (over the length of the ``other. it is common practice to indicate the distance (which. the splits will open under the injection pressure and the mold will ¯ash both at the handle side and at the side opposite the handle. the combined total screw force SF equals zero (SF ˆ 0). is also called preload) that the tapers are allowed to move (and thereby stretching the steel) before coming to a stop. If the two cavity halves are not preloaded. As soon as the force F is applied.) to be used for the mold. while designing the stack). which are a kind of preload. etc. When the force F is now applied. To prevent such gaps. and is not acceptable. The stretching of these plates provides the necessary ``real'' preload (in kN or US tons) to hold the mold together against ¯ashing. In practice. which will make contact with the cavity sections before the mold is fully closed. the blocks will not separate unless F becomes greater than FS. 5. the blocks have separated and left a gap between them. unfortunately. wedges. and by press ®ts. or mold plates. stripper rings. Chapter 30.74 Before Starting to Design a Mold blocks. For example. a mold for a mug with handle (see Chapter 7) will split in a vertical plane through the handle. the blocks will separate and the screws will be stretched until the resistance (or force) in the screws SF equals F (SF ˆ F). that is. any undesired gap means ¯ashing or leaking. FS must be greater than the expected force F (FS b F). This preload is especially important where cavities split in two or more sections. for building up cavities from sections. When specifying preload on tapers or wedges. there are two types of preload. In this case.'' calculated preload) the wedges stretch the cavity plate and (preferably) also the core plate. (1) The preload exerted by screws.4 Mold Materials Selection At this time (or maybe even earlier. The resulting force (or holding power) of the screw can be found in all screw tables. In molds. Preload is explained in much detail in ME. the screws must be tightened to such an extent that they will be stretched to a desired preload. and so on. to about 60±70% of the yield strength of the screw. But by then.

24 million pieces are to be produced in a 24.2.3.2 Forces in Molds The designer must know what forces are present within the mold when deciding on the strength of the mold component to resist these forces. The most important forces acting within the mold affect these strengths: (1) Tension: the forces created by the injection pressure of the plastic inside the runner system and in the cavity space. 5. as discussed in Section 5. the mold will operate 3 million cycles. with 24 cavities. or tapers and wedges for alignment. and so on (3) Bending (or de¯ection): the forces seen by cores. see Section 9. . which create wear on the matching surfaces (5) Torsion: the forces seen by coil springs and in mold features.4.or an 8-cavity mold. 5.4. usually requiring high tensile strength (2) Compression: the compressive strength required to counteract the clamp force of the machine.3. There is no point in specifying the best possible (and expensive) materials if the mold will be required for a small production. as in stripper rings and so on. it will operate only 1 million cycles. especially the ejector and stripper plates (4) Wear: the forces created by wedge action. the forces on the P/L.1 Effect of Expected Production Before making any decision. With 8 cavities.3 Characteristics of Steels and Other Mold Materials For mold steel selection. there is a difference whether.4. This requires the designer to consider fatigue in metals. and by all plates. typically. or in some robots (6) Shear: forces seen by dowels. and the forces seen where inserts are supported by plates.5. we have combinations of any of the above forces. or by the backup of wedges Note that in many cases.4 Mold Materials Selection 75 5.4. Also. for example. such as unscrewing. the designer must again consider the lifetime production expected from the mold.

g. hardware.3 Fatigue (See ME.15. the rated strength gradually declines. Always watch whether the values given are in ISO or in inch systems. sometimes millions of cycles. BeCu. some of them are directly opposite to each other (e. on the shelf.3. in the desired size.4. and so on. Strength is speci®ed by its tensile strength.1 Availability This applies not only to selected raw materials.. The strength values are given either in kPa (kilopascal) or in psi (pound/in2 ). tensile or yield strength) for one cycle to a point where the value remains the same regardless of the additional number of cycles. The designer should always get the exact values from a machinery handbook or from the supplier.3. in logarithmic graphs. for one cycle only.76 Before Starting to Design a Mold For every mold part the following must be considered: which of these characteristics are most important? Unfortunately. as a straight line declining from the rated strength (e. but molds often operate many. this is for all steels at about 2 million cycles. aluminum. The . Shear and torsional strength is about one-half the tensile strength. 5. Chapter 18) The strength ®gures for steel and other metals are arrived at from stressing a test sample.g. If there are more cycles.3.. 5.4. but also to hardware items: the designer must make sure that any material. or standard mold component intended to be speci®ed is also available when required. 5. by preloaded screws. such as seen. compressive strength is often but not always about the same. This decline is usually shown. toughness and hardness) and compromises are necessary. and in the quantities needed. 5. as in Fig. The results of such tests are satisfactory for steady loads.4. Many items are often shown in catalogues or other listings as ``standard'' but this does not always mean that they are readily available. for example. bronze.2 Strength of Material This applies to steel.

5.4 Mold Materials Selection

77

Figure 5.15

Typical fatigue graph for a machinery steel.

strength of the material, after 2 million cycles (the fatigue strength) depends very much on the material and hardness selected, but also on features such as notches, holes drilled into it, and surface ®nish. The fatigue strength can be as low as 15±20% of the yield strength (yield, in hardened mold steels, is only a little less than the tensile strength; many data are given in yield rather than tensile strength). Note that so-called machinery steels, but also the related P20 or P20PQ, do not lose as much strength as hard mold steels. The fatigue strength is equivalent to the safety factor often used by designers (frequently, 5) when calculating the strength of a part. The problem is that all force calculations depend on an assumption of the injection pressure, as discussed in Section 4.6.1. But we know that the forces will be greater for thinwall molding, and since most of them are designed for a very large number of cycles, the selection of only the very best materials with appropriate strength and hardness is suggested. Note that springs inside molds (sometimes speci®ed for ejector plate return) are especially sensitive to cycling. When designing for springs, use the manufacturer's suggested values for maximum compression and load of the selected spring.

5.4.3.4

Wear

Some materials are better for wear than others. Lubrication (or the lack of it) can be a decisive factor. Wear points could be steel on steel, steel on bronze, steel on hard plastic, and so on. Hard steels are always better, but the designer must never use the same alloy for both members rubbing against each other, as in wedges or

78

Before Starting to Design a Mold

taper locks, except if the wear points can be lubricated. Each alloy has a distinct, different grain structure, and the problem is that when using identical grain structures, the surfaces will lock (seize) when sliding under pressure, and damage (tear) the surfaces. Hardness differences alone are no substitute for different grain structure, except where one of the rubbing surfaces is treated with methods such as nitriding. In nitriding, very hard nitrogen compounds enter between the grains and alter the surface of the steel. Lubrication in molds is never permitted where it could contaminate the molded products, especially for pharmaceutical and food use.

5.5

Stack Molds (See also ME, Chapter 15)

All that has been said so far applies to any mold, single-level (conventional) or multilevel (stack). In principle, a stack mold is an arrangement where a number of single-level molds are placed back to back in the molding machine. Here, only the most common, two-level stack mold is discussed, although 4 levels and more have been built. The two injection (usually cavity) halves are mounted back to back in one moving (``¯oating'') platen between the standard machine platens; the core halves are then mounted one each on the stationary and moving platens. (Because these are usually also the sides where the ejectors are located, special provisions must be made for ejector actuation on the stationary mold side; this is sometimes built into the mold.) The stack mold system is often used for very large production, requiring many cavities, but often also for molds producing different parts that are paired in assembly. Stacks for one product are in one level, and stacks for another matching product are in the other level. The mold cost is about the same (or even a little less) than the cost of two molds, each built for half the number of cavities. The advantage is that one stack mold on one machine, requiring much less plant space and investment, can have the same output as two molds, requiring two machines, provided that the clamp has suf®cient stroke and shut height to separate both P/Ls far enough for ejection from both sides. Also, the injection unit must have a large enough plasticizing and shot capacity to ®ll both sides without increasing the cycle time, which, of course, would defeat the purpose of this system. Because the molds are stacked on top of each other, only the projected area of one level need be considered. The forces due to injection pressure within the center plate cancel each other; however, it is suggested to use a machine that has a clamping force of about 10% more than would be required for an equivalent single-stack mold. Today, in most systems, the injection unit is

5.6 Mold Layout and Assembly Drawings

79

connected with a long sprue extension to the hot runner in the center platen with the cavities. In some cases, the plastic is injected from the side, with a special extruder arrangement. A disadvantage of the stack mold system is that in case of mold or machine trouble, with stack molds, there is no production at all, whereas with conventional molds, half the production will continue.

5.6

Mold Layout and Assembly Drawings

Now the designer has all the basic information about the mold to be built and can start to ®nalize the mold assembly drawing. 5.6.1 Machine Platen Layout

The platen layoutÐincluding tie bar locationsÐof the machine (or machines) the mold will be used on should be shown ®rst. This will determine the outer limits of the mold and where to place certain mold features. It will, for example, specify where coolant connections must not be located, or any planned auxiliary actuators outside the mold, latches, and so on. The mounting and ejector holes that will probably be used for the mold must also be shown. 5.6.2 Symmetry of Layout, Balancing of Clamp

For multicavity molds, it is important that the stacks are positioned such that the projected area of each cavity is as symmetrical as possible about the center of the machine, to ensure that all tie bars are loaded equally as the mold is clamped, thereby providing each cavity with the same preload to prevent ¯ashing. This can present a problem with ``family molds,'' where several different stacks or cavities with different projected areas are used in one mold. A small amount of asymmetry is often acceptable. With edge-gated, single-cavity molds, to balance the load, a pressure pad must be used opposite the stack location to simulate the force of a second cavity. In this case, the cavity itself will see only one-half of the clamping force of the machine. This is important for the selection of size of clamp, for the job. There is no such problem with center-gated, single-cavity molds.

S2 for screws and D1. screws. if this is planned to be a hot runner mold. This prevents surprises arising when one view is far advanced and then it becomes apparent that it does not go together because another view shows some interferences. . show also where the outside of the mold must be marked (preferably die stamped) to identify coolant and air connections.4 Completing the Assembly Drawing Everything can now be shown in all views. the method of mold mounting and any connection (®xed or loose) with machine ejectors. If it is a mold for which the hot runner section is purchased completely assembled by the supplier. they will be also important when completing the cooling lines layout in the plates and the location of plate supports and large screws holding together the various mold plates. where applicable. such as S1. 2 IN. 5.3 The Views Start with the signi®cant mold cross section or sections. with heavy. AIR 2. The IN and OUT can be important for cooling because in many cases it does make a difference where the cold coolant should go ®rst (IN). D2 for dowels. dotted lines. It would make it dif®cult to read the drawings. and so on should be identi®ed in all locations with small crosses and/or circles. alignment features. but always work with all views at the same time. There would be a 1 IN. in the core of a container mold. However. At this time. it should ®rst hit the area opposite the gate. for example.6. the ejection system. and just its outlines in all other locations. and everything else needed by the detailers to produce the shop (detail) drawings. It is not a good practice to show the complete stack in every location. show the interface points and dimensions only. 2 OUT. and so on. important information such as the centers of coolant connections. 1 OUT. the stack should be shown in only one location of each plan view. For example.6. To facilitate the reading of the drawing. that is. even though it is easy to do with a CAD system. Such codes will make it easier to read the drawing. Show now also the alignment features. and AIR 1. and so on. both the plan views of cavity and core will ``grow'' side by side with the cross section. especially if there are many other features in the stack.80 Before Starting to Design a Mold 5. Show the selected hot runner hardware. which can then also be identi®ed with a code.

The BoM should specify not only the ®nal sizes of steels and so on.6 Mold Layout and Assembly Drawings 81 5.6 Finishing Touches Finishing information of the molding surfaces should also be shownÐ preferably with standard symbolsÐon the assembly drawing.6. additional. (See also Section 5.5. 5. and so on. . and to be used by the detailer when making the shop drawings. if applicable. Preferably. and the detailer. and any other information that deserves to be recorded for future use. This is important not only for the buyer.2. Several methods are used. This is also the time to show any notes on the drawing.2. Each balloon has a leader (line) connecting it with the part identi®ed. Cross hatching should be used sparingly. preferably on the drawing with the main cross section. It will also show any other information pertinent to the product and will specify for which machines the mold was designed. The title blocks identify the mold design of®ce or the mold maker. but only if they are different from standard ®ts and clearances. This number corresponds to a line in the BoM. but only once. Each balloon contains a number identifying each mold component.4) Usually one ``main'' title block is shown. the types of plastic. the designer (by name and initials). from stack parts to plates to screws. but the preferred one is to show balloons (circles or ellipses about 12±15 mm in size) outside around the drawings. ``Ballooning'' is the identi®cation of each mold part on the assembly drawing.6. only where it really helps to make the assembly drawing clearer.5 Bill of Materials (BoM) and ``Ballooning'' This is also the time to specify the BoM so that all materials can now be ordered and be available when required for the machining operations and the ®nal assembly. This also applies to detail drawings. smaller title blocks are on all other drawings. only if these locations would not be clear enough and could cause errors should they be shown in other sections or in the appropriate plan view. but also the hardness of the ®nished mold part. the project number and drawing numbers. the checker. but also for the detailer of the shop drawings. However. the balloons should be shown around the main cross section of the mold or near partial sections. for future reference. it is a good practice to show ®ts and clearances where they apply. Tolerances are not shown on the assembly drawings. They are strictly limited to the detail drawings.

frequently. A complete report. times. especially in case the designer has not heard from the molder ®rst. a mold goes into the customer's molding shop. and if there is any problem. all temperatures.82 6 Review and Follow-Up After the drawings and the ®nal BoM have been released for production. . Unfortunately. After the mold is ®nally ready for testing. as far as this mold is concerned. pressure settings. and it would be embarrassing if the same errors would then be repeated. the designer must be present and see that the installation and setup procedures are in accordance with the speci®cations on the assembly drawings. A good designer will then follow up the mold with the molder. there is usually a quiet time for the designer. for example errors in machining orÐheaven forbidÐerrors in the drawings. there are no problems in buying and machining. to see how the mold works in production. The designer must also approve any changes required to make the mold work as expected and record what was done to make the mold work before it is shipped. There is always the possibility that the same mold will be required again maybe in a year. Hopefully. and plastics speci®cations should be supplied to the customer. or much later. specifying the test machine. If there are problems in the shop. together with the mold. any corrective action must be approved and recorded by the designer or his delegate. the shop people cannot be bothered to go back to the mold maker but make adjustments that may not have been necessary if they had followed the instructions received with the mold. Any later problems experienced by the customer should also be recorded for future reference.

These examples are used to illustrate material discussed earlier in the text. Some examples are shown here. and the ejector plate comes to a stop when the stripper taper seats on the core taper.2 shows a conventional mounting plate (17).1 depicts two very similar cups: on the left is a typical cup (or container) with a plain bottom. which is the basis of higher productivity.1 Containers or Other Cup-Shaped Products Containers are not necessarily drinking cups. as shown. too many to show in one book.1. especially from high-shrinkage plastics. 3-plate. Note that Fig. insulated runner or through shooting. The mold on the left in Fig. Figure 7. unless the cooling cycle is greatly extended to permit the product to reach the mold temperature before ejection. In the case of an ejector plate using . It is always quite dif®cult to mold any straight surface.6. Note that the bottom is preferably domed. While shrinking. and on the right is a cup with a reentrant bottom. but any container. round or of any other shape.3 uses a stripper plate. The main characteristics of container molds are as follows: (1) Although they can be edge gated. There are all kinds of shapes. 7. such as boxes or many technical housings.2.1 (shut height). but there are some signi®cant typical differences. 7. As discussed in Section 5. so the ejector plate does not need a stop. 7. they are usually outside center gated. 7. A typical mold for such a product is illustrated in Fig. The gating can be a hot runner. the curvature of the dome will change somewhat but it will not pull inward and thereby deform the side wall of the container. this illustrates a typical example where this plate can easily be omitted.83 7 Typical Examples A few examples are provided of typical molded products and how they should be approached. (2) Core cooling is usually easily accomplished. they may have more than one gate.

otherwise. too. is completely withdrawn from the molded plastic piece. In Fig. especially on inserts. for a short distance (about for the distance f ) until the mold part that forms the inside of the reentrant.5. Only after this happens is the mold allowed to separate at the regular parting line. This method also facilitates good venting at the bottom. the parallels and the supports under the cores (supporting pillars) will sit directly on the machine platen. should be properly broken (rounded or chamfered). The right illustration in Fig. they can be mounted on the underside of the core backing plate. ejector pins (right illustration).2. Note that this method is . it would be very dif®cult to remove it without dismantling the mold. the designer must indicate this on the drawings. as indicated. or any other area where sharp edges could cause personal injury during handling. rule 2. they must sit on the machine platen but should not sit solely on top of any weak areas of the platen such as T-slots. if a piece of plastic breaks off in that narrow section and remains there. special measures must be provided in the mold: the cavity of the mold must follow the core as the mold opens. which usually also contains the gate. as already discussed Section 5. especially in the path of plastic ¯ow. The designer must make sure that when the mold is mounted in the machine.) must be provided.84 Typical Examples Figure 7. Note that in any mold. However.1 Schematic illustration of two typical cups: (left) a simple cup shape. all the outside edges of mold plates. it will be dif®cult or even impossible to ®ll this portion of the bottom. the bottom is preferably domed. etc. 7. Here. all pillars are fully supported. in some areas.2.3. also. 7. sharp corners must be kept sharp. as shown. Therefore. especially if the depth of the dimension f is greater than twice the thickness of the plastic at that spot. that is.1 shows a typical cup with a reentrant bottom. But because of the reentrant. solid stops (shoulder bolts. (right) a similar cup but with a reentrant bottom. the thin section would be a ``dead pocket'' and not ®ll.

in principle. stripper ring. 5. support under core. 8. back plate or hot runner plate.2 Schematic illustration of a section through portion of a simple cup mold: 1. core cooling. parallel. 7.4). Its stroke is limited to be only slightly larger than . it is. B. leader pin. locking ring (for alignment of cavity and core). 7. guide bushing for ejector sleeve. A. core backing plate.7. core. gate pad with cooling. 12. 14. similar to the two-stage ejection illustrated in Section 5. 2. 9.3. The cavity plate is guided on a separate set of guide pins to control its location relative to the gate retainer plate (or hot runner plate or cavity backing plate. 10. C. 16. 4.1 Containers or Other Cup-Shaped Products 85 Figure 7. 6. leader pin bushing. 3. ejector plate.3. called moving cavity (Fig. cavity. cavity retainer plate. as should be the case). 17. 15. cavity cooling. mounting plate. 11. 13.2. gate pad cooling. O-rings. ejector sleeve.

The left half shows the mold in the closed position.2. (Right) This application for a mold with ejector pins. Note the venting arrangement.86 Typical Examples Figure 7. 7. The product is ejected as soon as the cavity is suf®ciently distant from the cavity half. whereas the right half shows the mold at the point of opening when the cavity stops. There must be always a clearance (g) where shown. Figure 7. Mounting slots 18 have been added to permit the use of mounting clamps.3 The elimination of the mounting plate of the mold assembly. (Left) A variation to Fig. the core continues to open until the mold is fully open.4 Typical construction of a moving cavity feature to release deep reentrants in the cavity. .

The product is now easily ejected from the core. leading from the sprue to the ®nal branch runner (with the gates). must never be located so that it will have to cross an open space. This decision will also affect the choice of materials for the plates. used in the majority of all molds. one or more can be packed (see Fig. The cores are usually individual units mounted on top of a core backing plate with gaps between them. must not ¯oat in the stripper plate because of the obvious gap between ring and plate. into them. the cavities are frequently inserted into the cavity (or cavity retainer) plate or as individual units. with a perfectly smooth (but not necessarily ¯at) surfaceÐthe parting lineÐbetween them. consider ®rst: (1) gating and runners. The alternative is to gate into the top (outside) of the product. 2-plate molds with edge (or tunnel) gating are simpler and much less complicated and expensive than 3-plate molds or hot runner molds. insulated or hot runner molds. from 2-cavity to multicavity molds.2 Technical Products When designing molds for technical products. are built this way. The problem with edge gating is that any runner. a gap over which the runner would have to pass. if required. This makes it necessary that all cavities and cores must be inserted in the cavity and/or core plate. and (a) insert the complete cavities or cores with tight ®t into them. This also applies to any stripper plate with inserted stripper rings.6). There must be ample venting provided where the alignment ring meets the gate pad. Many molds. and still are today. without any gap into which plastic could ¯ow. because of the often large number of inserts within the core or cavity. where the runners are not in the parting line. from the cavity. 7. (2) core cooling. (1) As discussed earlier. and (3) alignment of cavities and cores.2 Technical Products 87 dimension f. Air actuators (usually four) built right into the backing plate push the cavity plate so that it follows the mold opening motion until the set limit is reached. . They can be. even though of great advantage for better alignment with the cores and ease of replacement. A round pocket will contain just one cavity or core. as with 3-plate. in a rectangular pocket. or (b) cut the cavities (or even the cores) right into the plates and just place inserts. and there is no danger that the ``foot'' gets trapped between the gate pad and the cavity. 7. (2) The core cooling for technical products is usually not as simple as for containers. Such rings.7. especially if the production is fairly low. Mild steels would be acceptable in one case (a) but usually not in the other (b). With this choice. The designer must decide whether to make rectangular or round pockets (or cutouts) into the plates.

to the supporting. There is most often only one choice: to forget about intensive cooling with channels right into the cores or the inserts. One rib is as shown in section x±x.5). small leader pins and bushings in each stack. better conducting materials.88 Typical Examples Figure 7. technical product is shown in Fig. with inside ribs. 7. most molds for technical products will cycle slower than the well-cooled molds for containers of similar weight and wall thickness. however. For this reason. but even every area of changeover from one part to another. or. and to depend on the heat conducted from the hot plastic. it is best to have the cavities ®xed in the cavity plate. which can shift the relative positions if the plates are not of the same temperature. 2-plate molds with inserted cavities and cores (or where they are cut right into the plates) require high accuracy in the location of cavity and core. and the cores mounted ¯oating on the core backing plate. are used to make inserts or even complete cores or cavities. venting of such rib is no problem since the sidewall ends at the well-vented parting line. There is also the problem of heat expansion of the plates.6). such as beryllium±copper. cooled plates (see Fig. even when ®tting tightly and without any gap.3 Mold with Fixed Cores If a rib ends in a side wall as in section z±z (Fig. A typical. constitutes a heat barrier and slows down the heat ¯ow. 7. the .5. because there is no possibility of adjusting their relative position once the mold is ®nished.5 Schematic of a technical product. 7. (3) Multicavity. For this reason. and will require a mold with gating into the top of the product. with additional. of course. If high accuracy is required. This will. as is most commonly done. with individual method of alignment either with tapers as shown for a container. If. make it impossible to use runners in the P/L. this type of mold should not be selected for thinwall products where the wall thickness can be greatly affected by any misalignment. Note: Every gap (clearance). through the inserts and core or cavity. 7. the other as in section z±z. as shown in (1) above. In some cases.

Note. but the requirements for accuracy are high. 7.5. section x±x. The illustration in Fig.6 A schematic of an edge-gated mold.'' that is. 7.5. Both cavities A and C and cores B and D are set into pockets in the mold plates. One cavity (right) has ribs as shown in Fig.4 Mold with Floating Cores 89 Figure 7. right side). Both cavities and cores are cooled from their underlying plates. the other (left) has ribs as shown in section z±z. with two of more cavities shown. or in pockets (core. as indicated by the circles. representing drilled holes for cooling. venting becomes very important. 7. especially if the rib is ``thin.7. so the cores are mounted ¯oating on the .6 could be a section through a 4-cavity mold. Note also that the runners sit on top of the line where two mold parts meet. if the ratio of depth over thickness is greater than about 2±3. left side).7 shows portion of a mold for a product similar to that in Fig. 7.4 Mold with Floating Cores Figure 7. rib is ``closed'' as shown in section x±x. Note that the inserts in the left core are better cooled because there are fewer heat barriers. that the venting channels for those ribs do not end in the side wall of the product. Inserts (cross hatched) are located either in cutouts (core. which is better for cooling. in the left portion of the illustration. they will not leak.

Much more can be gained by carefully considering where to gate.90 Typical Examples Figure 7. ¯oating core mounting. 7.2). these sections must be preloaded against the forces from the injection pressure to prevent ¯ashing along the split lines. . with or without ¯oating cores. (B) Core backing plate. As the mold opens. bushing. With the closed mold. by cross drilling. 7.7 Schematic of a mold portion with ¯oating cores. the cavity is usually easier to cool. The leader pins (1)Ðusually 2 per stackÐare shown here with a bushing (2) in the cavity. the cavity ``splits'' move for a short distance with the core. 1.8. (A) Cavity plate with runner system (R) indicated with broken line. however. Note that in these applications.4. there is not much gained by it because the core cooling usually controls the molding cycle. Section 14. F. 2. while the splits open sideways. than the core. and providing ample venting in any area of the stack where air could be trapped.5 Molds with Side Cores or Splits For all molds with side cores or where the cavity splits into two or more sections. but the bushing is often omitted. as mentioned earlier in this book. since the cavity itself is usually made from hardened steel. Leader pin. Refer to Fig. Only then can the cup be ejected. core backing plate (see ME.

3 of this book. F. (C) a similar mold. height of cup. In mold B. The forces F trying to push the halves apart are thereby divided. length of stretched cavity plate. This system is therefore only suitable for shallow products. but with wedges on both cavity and core sides. (B) section through a mold with wedges on the cavity half only. (2) Because of the distance m between the forces and reaction forces.7. the forces to be contained. F ˆ p  D  H. The preload must be calculated and provided for each set of wedges. and create an undesired gap at the split line. which has wedges both in the cavity and the core side. W. during injection. For deep products. L. the injection pressure p inside the cavity acts on the projected area of the sides of the cup. The wedges must therefore be preloaded as explained in Section 5. cup diameter. the side forces must be taken up on both the cavity and core sides of the mold. which is part of the cavity plate and is counteracted by the steel of the cavity plate. with a cross section of b  W . H.5 Molds with Side Cores or Splits 91 Figure 7. the force F pushes against the wedge. and both cavity and core plates will provide reaction forces. This is illustrated by mold C. . D. b. thickness of cavity plate along L. width of the plates. there will be a bending moment m  F which will force the wedge to bend outward as indicated (arrow d). There are now two problems to consider: (1) the force F will stretch the portion of the plate with a length L.8 Schematics of a mold for a cup with handle: (A) plan view into the cavity.

In many cases. One mold maker may then get the same inquiry from several molders. approximately. the mold maker is bound to lose money. to quote a price for such a mold.1 Need for Estimate Before estimating. and each of these molders may in turn approach three or more mold makers for estimates of the necessary molds. In some cases. faced with all these requests. the designer (and the person negotiating with the client for an order) should ®rst establish if the ``request for quotation.'' that is. they need a mold price to determine their own costs before proceeding. This means that the estimator. is serious and how the outlook is for getting the order. many molders are often approached by their customers solely to ®nd out how much it would cost. 8. should consider ®rst the background and reputation of . The estimator should be an experienced mold designer who can visualize from the product drawing submitted (and occasionally from a sample) what kind of mold will be most suitable to produce the product economically.92 8 Estimating Mold Cost One of the most dif®cult jobs in the mold making business is to determine as accurately as possible the cost of the mold for the product for which it is to be built. This is an important consideration: in the author's experience. the lowest price is often based on errors in quoting. but possibly three or more molders for mold prices. only one of all these requests for estimates can result in an order. with clients who habitually select the lowest bidder. before placing an order. From the author's experience. the ``boss'' of the mold shop will decide whether it is really necessary to quote at all. Any smart buyer of molds. to start a new product line. or he or she may decide to just give a ballpark ®gure and skip the formal estimating process altogether. or the cost of estimating would become excessive. In fact. for the same product. cannot spend too much time with each one. the customer approaches not only one. with such multiple requests.

the precedent can be a mold with only a few cavities for a product with a shape similar to the one for which the mold is to be estimated. and then adjust for it when pricing the mold. Only then should the price be considered. unfortunately. for the same number or for more or fewer cavities.8. the estimator will ®rstÐin his or her mindÐcompare the product with other jobs of similar products and then search for precedents in personal (or the shop's) records. such as old drawings. which is really what the client needs. how good the mold performed in operation. in general. For example. With the absence of good records. As has been said here repeatedly. if possible. this is possible only if there was little turnover in personnel in the shop. as was suggested in Chapter 6.3 No Precedents If molds for a similar product have never been made before or the estimator is not familiar with the type of mold requested.3 No Precedents 93 the mold maker and his or her expertise in building the particular type of mold requested.2 Precedents If there are close similarities (precedents). and if the hours estimated to produce the mold were adequate. there are. two possibilities to be considered. or electronic ®les. 8. in other words. was the customer happy and did the shop make money with this mold? This process is easy if proper records are kept. Requests for molds that are outside the mold maker's expertise should be declined. only the best-suited mold for the planned production will result in the lowest product cost. If the request for quotation is considered serious. which is bene®cial to both customers and mold makers. This often leads to specialization by the mold maker. unless the mold maker intends to enter this new ®eld. In this case it is up to the estimator to ®nd out from records. The estimator should consult with the people who actually made that mold to ®nd out if there were any problems during manufacture or testing of the mold. because there is a good basis from which to extrapolate what will be required for the new mold. . the estimating process is relatively simple. 8. book illustrations.

this will result in a lower mold and system price. The mold designer will then not use these sketches. or even ignoring any dif®culties that may arise due to a peculiar product shape. that is. . The main problem with this method of estimating is that the estimator makes a bad mistake. any responsible mold maker (whose reputation is at stake) will have no choice but to build this mold. Traditionally. If the mold is fully designed. which could be more (sometimes much more) expensive to build than was ®rst estimated. the estimator cannot devote as much time to it as the mold designer will have after the order for this mold has been booked. or where the product is considered very complicated to mold. the cost of the various machining steps (milling.4 Methods of Estimating (1) One method is to actually break down each and every mold part into its estimated cost: material. Such losses can then be written off as learning experience or as research and development expenses. typically by not seeing. In this case. mold makers add an often quite high safety factor when quoting unfamiliar molds. (2) A good alternative is to invite the participation of the client to share in advance the cost of designing the new mold before estimating. It is important that any such preliminary sketches are made available to the mold designer. After agreeing with the client that the proposed mold and/or the whole system will do what is needed. and even so. These sketches will then be the basis for the estimate. From the estimator's sketches it is then fairly easy to prepare an estimate. who then may (or may not) follow them for the ®nal design. or a complete mold. This is also often done for a whole system. the mold and related equipment cost can be fairly easily estimated on the basis of this preliminary design.94 Estimating Mold Cost (1) The estimator will make sketches using previous experience as a mold designer and show at least one method as to how the product could best be made. even if it will result in a ®nancial loss. This is often very useful if the product is completely new and the projected quantities are extremely large. underestimating. to cover the unexpected. (The problem with this method is that it will take much estimating time. there is no need for such insurance. not only a mold but including any product handling and postmolding operation of the product. If the client decides not to proceed with the project. the mold maker will offer to design either concepts of the mold. but will come up with a proper mold design. and there is much less risk of too low or too high an estimate. at least the mold maker will have the sometimes considerable design expenses paid. 8. For a certain quoted price. The cost of the design paid in advance is then considered in the ®nal mold price. which bene®ts the client.

risk (with this mold). and much risk if there are many unknowns. There is usually little risk if the same mold has been built before. however. this method expects that the estimator or assistants have intimate knowledge of the machining operations involved and the operating times required for each step. 8. time-consuming process. Since molds consist of many different parts. depending on the mold maker's practice and policies. the cost of heat treating and other expenditures for ®nishing in house or by suppliers. which. It requires real experience and solid background in mold making. and the costs of assembling and testing the mold. there is less risk of repeating earlier mistakes. or whatever the company's policy is to cover overhead. it is fairly easy to extrapolate. may be anywhere up to 50% (or even more) on top of the estimated cost.). It should also have the proviso that the quoted price is only a rough estimate and must be con®rmed at a later date when all data are ready (including tolerances) and after the order is received. the mold considered has 8 cavities and there is a suitable precedent of a 4-cavity mold. (2) The method used most often is to base an estimate on experience from precedents. and pro®t. prepares only the foreseen cost to be incurred when building the mold. It is best if the estimator works from a ®nished product drawing. this is obviously a slow. it is usually dif®cult to create a standard price list for molds. (3) ``Ballparking'' should be used with care. as long as the estimator really knows the business well it can yield quite accurate estimates. except if many identical molds based on standard mold components are built on a regular basis. with all dimensions. etc. complexity. and where all tolerances are shown. grinding. Since every mold is different in size. by calculating the cost of the new total number of stacks plus the proportional increase of the cost of the larger mold shoe. and so on. for example. Include also the cost of any ®xtures or special tools required in the manufacture of the mold parts. . the cost of standard hardware. EDM. number of cavities.5 Mold Cost and Mold Price 95 turning.5 Mold Cost and Mold Price The estimator. in percentage over the cost. While some of the costs are usually quite simple to establish from price lists and records. expenses. Many estimators then add a risk factor. The cost is the basis for quoting the actual price to the customer. polishing. If. depending on the difference from the precedent and the general familiarity with the type of mold.8. This method is good if there are good records of many similar molds made over the years. There will be a standard markup on top of the estimated cost. in essence.

solely to get the job. molds may be quoted at prices lower than the costs determined by the estimator.96 Estimating Mold Cost There is another management consideration: The plastics mold business is traditionally up and down. as the business picks up again. and to keep the shop busy to avoid layoffs. One unfortunate result of this method is that as soon as the shop is ®lled with such money-losing molds. In times of low sales. . seasonally. well-paying jobs may have to wait because the shop is busy.

up to then. such as leader pins and bushings. expensive machines. Mold Materials. thickness). large grinding machines or milling with large cutting heads in vertical or horizontal milling machines. using the best-suited materials and ®nishes.1 This section is not meant to be a guide for the actual machining operations. width. These supply houses rapidly widened their lines by adding other items that. but also at a much lower cost than would be possible in most mold shops. the biggest advance came with the standardization of sizes (length. with the blank held solidly and a single cutting tool moving back and forth over the surface. While they made (and still make) any requested size within a certain range.97 9 Machining. thereby making parts not only of better quality. Earliest mold components and plates were produced by ®rst sawing the raw blanks from steel plates of the appropriate thickness bought from the steel mill. and others. with their limited equipment. with reciprocating or (endless) band saws. but it took . National. ejector pins and sleeves. and Heat Treatment Machining of Mold Components 9. which smaller mold makers cannot usually justify economically. but also blanks for cavitiesÐon shapers. specializing in the machining of theÐoften largeÐplates. Since this requires large. Hasco. Today hardly any mold maker makes mold hardware. This slow method was abandoned in favor of rough grinding with special. available for fast delivery. The next step was then squaring and/or rough machining these blanksÐmostly plates. the molders had made themselves. often using specialized machines. but gives some descriptions of the evolution of machining in mold making. By standardizing designs of these hardware items it became possible to mass produce such parts. Both these methods are now used extensively. which permitted listing them in catalogues. this was the origin of the mold supply houses such as DME. a service industry developed. and many other mold components and accessories and hardware that have come into use as the industry expanded.

the old but still widely used practice was that the machinists move with the work pieces from one machine tool to the next until the mold part is ®nished. For the manufacture of the large mold parts. . to permit regrinding to the ®nal size. there have also been signi®cant changes. This last advance became possible only after the mold designs improved and began to provide mold part detail drawings.1 mm. the introduction of specialists (production planners or engineers). This gradually eliminated the need for the operator to actually work ``hands on'' during the cutting process. Some of the modern machines don't even require this step in the setup: the machine ®rst feels (reads) the position of the work piece as it is mounted in a jig or ®xture. and large cavity blocks. The setup of the work piece in the machine is always critical to ensure the proper reference to speci®ed edges or tooling holes of the work piece. Blank plates are usually purchased. multiple cutting heads. if necessary. in fact. the sequence of operations and the tools to use. and jig bores. and the low cost of these mass-produced parts. which may release stresses in the plates. and then automatically adjusts all coordinates to this position. ready rough ground. (Standard sized screws and nuts have been used for many years. which can result in warpage. allowing the use of better cutting tools. becoming much more rigid. ¯at and square to standard or special sizes.98 Machining. this was usually left to the machinist operating the machine tools. Up to then.) The supply houses also provide a service to machine large cutouts and openings in standard plates (and mold sets) and the bores for leader pins and bushings to their own standard or the customer's speci®cation. to prepare the logical steps in the machining of the parts. mostly plates. Mold Materials. and Heat Treatment quite a while for some to realize the advantages of the quality. and generally observing the machine to prevent trouble. carbide cutters. The plates (or large cavity blocks) are machined with common machine tools such as lathes. They should be somewhat thicker (maybe 0. which is very convenient if the mold maker lacks the large and accurate machines to do it in-house. This also necessitated another manufacturing step. These machines have also improved over the years. The next step in modernization was to provide the milling machines and so on with automatic tool changers. higher cutting speeds. that is. the ready availability. This is especially important after roughing out large volumes of steel. numerical controls (CNC). and even allowed the use of one operator for more than one machine tool. usually persons with all around experience in machining. seeing that all tools are prepared as speci®ed before installing them in the tool changer. drilling and milling machines. depending on the size of the plate) than the ®nal dimension. The responsibility of the machinists became mainly the mounting of the work pieces in the machine tool. and the introduction of computerized.

provides precision grinding. Since the EDM process may take many hours. in minutes rather than hours. these castings are made to order by specialists in this ®eld. cores. one operator can usually look after a number of machines. A main disadvantage of these methods is that they are very slow. both permit the shaping or cutting of odd or otherwise dif®cultto-machine (or even ``impossible'') shapes. The cutting electrodes for EDM are made from special copper alloys. blanks are still cut from bars or rods and machined with machine tools such as lathes. or from some carbon/graphite composition. higher cutting speeds. very hard tools. they remove much less steel than any chip-removing machine tool. tapping. by casting or molding them to shape.) can become so large as to make it possible to introduce fully automatic machines such as automatic (CNC) lathes combined with other operations. The ®nish surface and cylindrical grinding of these parts (where required) have also greatly improved over the years with higher cutting speeds and by pro®le grinding odd ¯at or round shapes. They are machined on conventional machine tools. for example.1 Machining of Mold Components 99 For smaller stack parts. drilling. etc. and two or more electrodes are required from roughing to ®nal sizing. for each part. etc. both for location and size. the faster will be the cutting speed. and the introduction of CNC. in any given time. and jig bores. and an increase in demand for multicavity molds. They should be used only if there is no other way to cut a shape. such as drills and taps.) To produce a ®ne ®nish. of holes (dowels. drilling and milling machines. Electrical Discharge Machining (EDM) and later the wire EDM have been major advances. As a result of specialization. These machines. But even a rough EDM ®nish is often good enough for some molding surfaces. Note that the ®nished surface created by EDM depends largely on the amount of steel removal. too. There are methods of reducing the cost of machining these electrodes. These machines usually run automatically. (The higher the current through the electrodes. milling. carbide cutters. from a work piece. by becoming more rigid.). or even nonround shapes in cavity . the very ®rst EDM machines were used mainly to remove broken. have improved over the years. stripper rings.9. such as heat treatment. another machining operation. the quantity of similar. often standardized components (cavities. Jig grinding. The increasing specialization of the mold-making business had another impact on the machining methods used.) ready for the next step. etc. using better cutting tools. with automatic tool changing. the type of ®nish must always be speci®ed. EDM can be used regardless of the hardness of a work piece. such parts can now be produced from steel blanks or rods right up to their pre®nished shape (turning inside and outside. the operation becomes very slow. the problem is that they are wearing and getting smaller during operation. that is.

and the mold must then be designed so that the ¯at surface (of the cavity or core) can be accessed when using a lapping machine. polishing was sometimes farmed out. It is up to the mold designer to specify where and how ®ne to polish. handheld machines. Some of the polishing operations that used to be done manually are now done by automatic machines.100 Machining. very deep holes. tedious. Mold Materials. In such cases. usually low-paid women who did the polishing at home. and diameters as small as 8 mm can be drilled fast. but it is also important for much shorter and smaller-diameter holes often required in cavity and core cooling circuits or in side cores. This is of particular importance when drilling cooling and pressure±air channels in large plates. Flat faces are very dif®cult to polish while maintaining their true ¯atness. without the problems of ``wandering'' encountered with the conventional twist drills. Later on. and without any signi®cant deviations from the intended straight path. Special drill bits are used either in attachments to lathes or in special deep hole drilling machines. cylindrical shapes can be honed. (See also ME. Chapter 22. which is especially important if the product requires optical clarity without refraction. Deep hole drilling. also called gun drilling. do the reciprocating motion required for the polishing stone or diamond paste. from diameters as small as 2 mm (0. which is a long. only some areas need good or even exceptional polish. Large. the punch must be very hard and strong. it originated in the manufacture of long bores in guns. Obviously. the operator mounts the work piece and the machine does the rest. often odd-shaped forms. in-house or at a specialist. is a relatively late addition to the mold-making business. Polishing is an important phase in the mold making process. much time can been saved in this operation. The cutting face of the drill bit is lubricated with pressurized coolant through the center of the bit. the use of lapping equipment may be required. and Heat Treatment work.) Holes as long as 2 m or even longer. and therefore expensive process. and the chips are ¯ushed out along the outside of the bit. The process allows the drilling of straight. the force is on the order of thousands of tons. By being critical. A male punch in the shape of the outside of the molded product (including shrinkage allowance for the plastic) is pushed with great force into a soft steel blank. This usually means providing the cavity or core with inserts that can be easily lapped. it is done by hand. Other. such as for bottle caps or other. a practice used for many years in accurate machine building. for appearance or for the intended use of the product. expensive equipment and are often subcontracted to specialists. The making of the . In the early days. others not. Traditionally.060 inch). Hobbing is another method of making small cavities. Both these operations require special. Often. the speci®cations for polishing were closely scrutinized: is it really necessary to polish this surface? Is the ®nish as it comes from the milling machine or grinder good enough? Some plastics require good polish.

and will not require additional polishing. The blank must then be machined on the outside to ®t a cavity retainer. layer by layer. The main advantage is that one punch. it is easier to do it once on the outside of a male part. 9. the steel of the blank must be soft enough to permit the process. Because the steel will slightly grow and possibly move in the hardening process.2 Materials Selection Production molds are almost always made from steel. after hobbing. but sometimes the only way to produce a cavity. Computerized molecular build-up is a new electrochemical approach to building small. the molecules of the desired mold material until the complete shape is created. It is slow and quite expensive. must be rough machined on the outside and then carburized and hardened. This process is still in development and the author knows of no actual molds built. which are then all identical. Sometimes bronzes or . the blank is then stripped off the mandrel.9.080 to 0. By necessity. can be used for as many cavities as 30±60. to date. Around the middle of the 20th century. for example. Nickel is slowly deposited on the mandrel until it reaches a desired thickness of about 2 to 3 mm (0. it was quite common to use this method for multicavity molds. The blank. and even lettering and escutcheons. the hobbing process is rarely used today. The ®nish of the cavity wall is an exact replica of the ®nish of the mandrel. who have the necessary skills and equipment. rather than inside of many cavities. except for certain mold parts where requirements for better heat conductivity suggests the use of beryllium±copper alloys. the polish on the hob is always perfectly reproduced.2 Materials Selection 101 hobs and the actual hobbing is done by hobbing specialists. both for the mold shoe and the cavities. where the ®nal shape of the product can be easily created in the already hardened but otherwise ®nished cavity blank. while dif®cult to make. and later. intricate cavities or cores. the hard blank must then be ground to ®t the bores in the cavity plate. usually for small and long shapes.120 inch). A mandrel of the shape of the cavity wall acts as the electrode in a nickel electrolyte bath. If. This method is best done by specialists in this ®eld. Also. the product has a dif®cult shape. with better machining methods. A computer reads the mold part drawings three dimensionally and builds up. and especially with the advent of EDM. If the hob is well polished. Electroforming is another method of making cavities. so will be the cavities made from it. These are all long and expensive operations. so no further polishing is required. ornamental ribs or embossings. such as fountain pen barrels. but this is too soft to serve for a highproduction mold.

cutting. The important features for mold makers are essentially as shown below. the price is much higher. metal-®lled epoxy-type mixtures. however. the blank size has signi®cant bearing on the cost. It is always worthwhile to contact a steel sales person and get all the details about steel pricing. but it is better to specify steels by their generic names or numbers. 9. the more volume is contracted to purchase over a certain period.102 Machining. Mold Materials. Mold makers were gradually switching to the types of hardened steels that were used in tool and die making. typically. or must not be for sanitary reasons. The types of steels used depend on the requirements for each application. large pieces are cheaper than small ones.Tensile strength Compressive strength .2. one year. but they did not last for long production runs. and it may become necessary to reevaluate and update the lists of steels used by the designers from time to time. and Heat Treatment even rigid plastics are used for cams and areas where moving parts cannot be lubricated. or at least. they will not be discussed further. copper alloys. or other materials. or even special. depending on the annual requirement of the mold makerÐthe higher the requirements. In general. Experimental molds may use softer materials such as aluminum. so that even though the base price may appear to be low. so the steel industry began to develop steels speci®cally designed for the plastics industry. particularly mold and tool steels. This is important for long life of the components as they are subjected to high stresses within the mold. different for each steel mill. Throughout this text it has often been said that the designer must always keep costs and planned productivity of the mold in mind. the lower the base cost of the steel. This will often determine the selection of the right steel for each mold component. by the time the piece is cut and delivered. particularly those created by high injection pressures and large clamping forces. and other charges.1 Steel Properties Earlier molds used mild steels even for stack parts. In general. there is little or no difference between steels of the same speci®cation originating from different suppliers. steels. are sold by brand names. these steels were often too brittle or otherwise unsuitable for mold applications. new mold steels are constantly developed for ``better'' characteristics. Per unit of mass. there are weight. However. (1) Tensile (or compressive) strength. There are two points to be aware of: (1) the material (mostly steel) represents about 10±15% of the total mold cost and (2) steel costs vary widely. In addition. Also.

9. and mostly wear from mold parts rubbing against each other. . good cooling can also be achieved with steel by using a better layout of the cooling channels. (8) Ease of machining. Don't forget. This is of special importance for hot runner components. This can be important with high-speed molds. Note that many hardened tool steels start to anneal at temperatures lower than the melt temperatures sometimes required for injection. This is especially important for long. molds corrode (rust) because of the high water content in the air. however. (9) Ease of polishing. (10) Ease of nitriding. that high polish is often not required. which require more upkeep than steel. the mold parts and plates should be chrome or nickel plated. in many cases. and thus avoiding the use of the softer copper alloys.2 Materials Selection 103 (2) Toughness. To nitride on top of a soft base does not make any sense: the hard (nitrided) surface will collapse under any heavy load because the supporting steel is soft. especially if the stainless steels can be bought in large volume. However. The addition of certain alloying elements to the steel makes it much easier to cut chips. Nitriding is a surface treatment applied on top of an already well-hardened and otherwise ®nished part to provide a very hard surface.Chromie plated Nickel plated (6) Thermal conductivity. which is more expensive than other steels. slender cores and inserts subjected to side forces de¯ecting them during injection. (7) Ease of hobbing. Hobbing is not much used today. It is used mostly to improve the wear characteristic of the steel. but also for molds for some plastics that are molded at high temperatures. butÐconsidering the overall cost connected with chrome platingÐthe difference may not be that big. In a high-humidity environment. (5) Corrosion resistance. especially when considering the often high handling costs where the plating is performed by outside suppliers. Wear results from plastic abrasion during injection. (4) Hot hardness. These stack parts and plates can also be made from stainless steel. Some steels are not well suited for polishing and will not permit or maintain the high surface polish often required. which can be quite expensive. Some plastics attack (corrode) steels and other mold materials. See Section 9. In all such circumstances. this can make a big difference in the time and the cost of machining. This is an important consideration. (3) Wear resistance.1 about hobbing. keep in mind that.

There is only one goal for the mold maker and designer: to produce the best mold for the speci®ed purpose.3343 Steel Code Recommended Hardness (Rc) 30±35 30±35 30±35 59±61 58±60 58±62 49±51 56±60 56±58 50±52 60±62 28±32a 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 a Prehardened Stainless steel Prehardened Carburizing steels Oil hardening Air hardening Stainless steel (SS) High-speed Beryllium±copper 42CrMo4 40CrMnMo7 X42Cr13 106WCr6 X40CrMoV5 1 X100CrMoV5 1 X155CrVMo12 1 X42Cr13 S-6-5-2 It is customary to indicate hardness of machinery steels and bronzes in the Brinell scale.2379 1. We stated earlier that material constitutes a substantial portion of the mold cost. however. The data are approximate. By studying the various steels. 4140 P20 420SS P5 P6 O1 H13 A2 D2 420SS M2 BeCu 1.1 and 9.1 Item Type Comparison Chart of a Few Selected Mold Materials AISI DIN Designation Material No. in general. (12) Cost. is not a good practice and should be done only in exceptional cases. Chapter 16. The above chart. Tables 9. and may vary somewhat from one manufacturer to another.2083 1. . a steel may be Table 9.104 Machining.2 shows the average of some of the properties of the above materials that are of interest to the mold designer.2363 1. the mold that will produce the lowest cost of the product for the speci®ed production requirements. Table 9.2735 1. Mold Materials. typically.2 are intended to give the designer an overview of some common mold materials.2330 1.7225 1. it may be important to be able to repair a worn mold part by welding. In some cases.2083 1. More about molds steels and application examples can be found in ME. While this. and Heat Treatment (11) Ease of welding. but cost alone must never be the reason to select any steel. it may permit a ``quick ®x'' to keep a mold running until it can be properly repaired.2344 1. uses equivalent Rockwell ``C'' values to give a better comparison with the hardness of tool steels. that is.2510 1. it can be seen that all steels have only a few of the characteristics required for a certain purpose.

1. E. P. excellent.Table 9. Item numbers 1±12 refer to the material types in Table 9. very good. good. poor. G. . F. fair. VG.2 Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Comparison of the Properties of Different Mold Materials Wear Toughness Compressive Hot Corrosion Thermal Hobbability Machinability Polishability Nitriding Weldability Resistance Strength Hardness Resistance Conductivity ability F F F VG VG VG G E E G E F VG E E G VG F VG F F G P P F F F G G E VG E VG G E P F F F G G G VG VG VG VG E F P F G F F P F F F VG F G G G F F F G F F F F F E P P P E VG G G F F F F E G G F E E VG E VG F VG F E G VG E VG VG VG VG VG G E G E F G VG VG VG F E VG E VG E N/A F F F E VG F G F P G F VG Note.

ease of machining. cannot be hardened.35% can be hardened. by heating to a high-temperature. the steel structure of certain steels can be changed by heating and subsequent chilling of the work piece to increase the hardness of the steel from a hardness (usually soft) suitable for machining to the hardness that will provide good working life of the steel under repeated exposure to heat. and special alloys were designed to provide better polishability. to keep pace with the development of new plastics and with new methods of use in mold making. with lower carbon content (usually in the range of 0. only steels with a carbon content of at least 0. 9. for about 24 to 48 hours.'' that is. high pressure. The work piece can then be hardened like through-hardening tool steels.5 and 1. So-called mild steels. to a carbon-rich atmosphere. and Heat Treatment very tough but not be very hard or it may not readily accept nitriding.5 mm (0. quenching in water or oil. subjecting the work piece at high heat. However. and ``maraging'' steels are tough. and availability. and then tempering (reheating to a lower temperature than before quenching) and ®nally cooling in air. The art in using these steels is to foresee such changes and to allow enough material for grinding after heat treatment to arrive at the ®nal . with better properties than before. In general.106 Machining. the surface of such mild steels canÐafter machining to their shapeÐbe provided with a carbon-rich skin by the process of ``carburizing. The disadvantages are the costs for carburizing and the subsequent heat treatment: during carburizing. Mold Materials.020 and 0.060 inch). and wear. the steel often distorts and even grows slightly. to use these relatively inexpensive steels for mold parts that need good hardness. This causes the surface to absorb carbon to a depth of usually between 0. Basically. The advantage of these steels is their relatively low cost. the designer will always have to ®nd the most suitable compromise when selecting a steel for a mold part.3%). for general mold making and for new applications. New steels are constantly being developed by steel manufacturers.1±0.'' most molds were made from these mild steels.3 Heat Treatment We will not go into details of the metallurgy and the behavior of steels during heat treatment and the various hardening methods. hard. Some very expensive steels are occasionally used in molds: tungsten carbides are very hard and three times as stiff as steel. and very stable steels that do not move in the hardening process. Therefore. but also very brittle and dif®cult to produce mold parts. At the beginning of the ``plastics revolution.

from through-hardened mold or tool steels. (2) the piece should then be stress relieved. Tool and mold steels are ``through-hardened. adding time and cost to the heat treatment. . Note that very large mold parts may require three steps for ®nishing: (1) premachining to remove the bulk of the outside and any large openings or cutouts. This allows the ®nish machining of most parts without the need for any heat treatment after machining. it may still be necessary to grind or otherwise machine the work piece to the ®nal shape before polishing. mild mold steels have been used less and less. thus requiring shipping of the parts to and from them. for larger mold makers. which are supplied from the steel mills and the supply houses at a hardness of about Rc 30±33. the danger is that too much grinding allowance can make the hardened skin disappear during grinding. After hardening. for high production molds. and in such areas the surface hardness is then as soft as the base steel. Today. Smaller mold stack parts are also often made from prehardened blanks. By standardizing a small number of different mold steels requiring hardening. costs can be reduced. Since the carbon content diminishes with its depth. For these reasons. with the development of better machining methods and more rugged machine tools. which may cause stresses within the steel to distort the work piece. this may make it economical to provide in-house heat treatment. which is dependent on the time required for carburizing. Heat treatment is usually done by specialists. over the years. larger mold stack parts are made mostly from prehardened mold steels. or.3 Heat Treatment 107 mold dimensions.'' and the amount of grinding to size will not affect the surface hardness. before (3) ®nish machining to the desired close dimensions.9.

) for physical strength and to check with other programs the expected ef®ciency of ®lling the mold cavities. it can now be merged with the new product drawing and the mold can be designed. etc. Once the to be molded part (the product) is drawn and dimensioned to the designer's shop rules. either designing ``from scratch. which may have been submitted as hard copy (prints) or electronically. the designer usually starts by redrawing the customer's information. runner sizes. and so on. Note that all results from using these programs depend on the accuracy of the data .'' or searching the ®les for a suitable precedent. various programs can be used to check selected areas (plates. and newly created mold designs can be easily checked for ef®ciency of plastics ¯ow. but about the logic and reasons behind a successful mold design and the questions the designer must consider and answer at every step of the design process. gate location and sizes. many calculations can be performed rapidly and accurately. and so on. The designer will now go through the motions as explained earlier. or different shrinkages may be applicable. cam motions.108 Appendix 1 CAD/CAM (ComputerAssisted Design±ComputerAssisted Manufacturing) As stated before. If a good precedent is found. strength of materials. especially if there are many precedents accessible to the designer to be used for new designs and if there is a large collection of standards that can be accessed from computer memories without the need for tediously drawing and redrawing. but originating from a different system than the one used by the designer. Because there are so many design programs. as explained earlier in this book. Computers now play an important part in this process. A constant factor may be used for the product. Also. the cooling layout. this book is not about the actual technique of designing (delineating) molds. a program will be used to add the mold shrinkage to established rules. by using special programs. from simple parts to complicated subassemblies. cooling. Once completed in principle. cavities.

Canada L3R 6H3 905-946-0928 Unigraphics. Unigraphics Solutions 2550 Matheson Blvd. which are often developed in-house. WA 98682 888-754-8628 MOLDFLOW. pressures. and the input of experienced machinist/programmers. compatible CAM programs.. Lexington. Markham. ON.CAD/CAM (Computer-Assisted Design±Computer-Assisted Manufacturing) 109 provided. CAD/CAM Programs Autocad. (mostly for PCs) 90 Allstate Parkway. all ¯uids) PO 1172. Parametric Technologies Co. cooling. Mississauga. and so on. Autodesk Canada Inc. Simcon Inc. St. Suite B-4. Mold¯ow Corp. shrinking and warpage) 10914 N 39th. USA 781-674-0085 FEMAP Enterprise (¯uid ¯ow. times. ON. USA 781-398-5000 Fluid Flow Programs CADMOULD. USA 610-458-3660 . MA 02421.. By using related. they are transferred to the manufacturing group. the manufacturing group will determine the best tools to use for the selected machine tools and the appropriate tool paths for each mold part for each tool and for each machine tool. (mold ¯ow.. cooling) 91 Hartwell Ave. Waltham. Exton. such as reasonable assumptions as to temperatures. (mold¯ow.. Canada L4W 4Z1 905-212-4500 Proengineer. PA 19341. 128 Technology Dr. Vancouver. Suite 201. MA 02453. Once the mold drawings are ®nished. The following is a list of better known and widely used CAD and CAM programs.

400 Carlingview Dr.. ON. PA 15288. 708-491-0200) Mechanical Stresses ANSIS Mechanical Dynamics Ltd. Canada L6M 3E3 905-465-1733 (partner for Fluid Dynamics International. Oakville. USA 412-967-2700 . Pittsburg. Toronto. SPRC (¯uid ¯ow) 1155 North Service Rd. Canada M9W 5X9 416-674-2144 AL GOR 150 Beta Dr. Suite 11.110 CAD/CAM (Computer-Assisted Design±Computer-Assisted Manufacturing) FIDAP. ON..

shape . .package accuracy adaptor ring air assist air ejection air-operated actuators alignment .construction .space 111 Links 14 58 97 39 39 27 36 23 23 39 27 80 26 52 58 2 2 109 25 79 37 76 52 55 54 64 81 75 70 48 45 21 39 40 66 41 27 2 109 106 11 54 11 9 57 87 40 87 37 37 64 73 64 45 80 101 81 45 109 97 16 38 This page has been reformatted by Knovel to provide easier navigation.Index Index Terms 2-plate molds 3-plate molds accessories accumulator .features amorphous plastics angle pins appearance assembly drawing assembly drawings assumptions automatic molding auxiliary actuators auxiliary controls availability backing up backup balanced cavity balanced runners ballooning bending beryllium-copper beverage crates Bill of Materials blades blow downs blower bosses breakers bushings CAD CAM carburizing cavity .

spacing .construction .channels .cooling .walls center gated chase chrome plated circuit breakers clamp stroke clamping force CNC cold and hot runner molds cold runner collapsible cores color changes composite cavities composite cones compressibility compression compressive strength computer conductivity containers contamination continuous vents coolant connections cooling .lines layout .backing plate .water supply copper alloys core .shift corrosion resistance cost-effective counter bore cross hatching crystalline plastics cup-shaped product cycle times deep hole drilling deep-draw containers deflection degrade Links 59 16 58 42 103 42 37 13 98 41 14 64 51 57 55 55 26 75 102 5 70 83 40 67 72 18 68 72 71 80 41 103 11 87 56 87 56 103 42 45 81 26 48 34 100 37 75 63 112 79 44 55 15 99 60 38 16 37 56 57 63 59 19 108 58 79 19 103 80 69 55 90 64 This page has been reformatted by Knovel to provide easier navigation.Index Terms .circuit . .lines .

angles drawings drinking cups drooling economics EDM ejection ejector pins ejector plate return ejector stroke electric power electrical discharge machining (EDM) electroforming electroless nickel electronic drafting estimator Euro experimental molds experimental setup expertise family molds fatigue Filtered air Fitting Flash Flashing Floating mounting Floating platen Flow capacity forces gate . .retainer plate .Index Terms design .location .review .size grain structure grinding allowance guide pins gun drilling handling the mold hardness Links 6 73 9 45 100 3 72 37 49 46 83 59 3 99 22 45 68 37 41 99 101 43 5 92 36 102 34 93 79 68 40 2 13 74 56 78 20 75 14 64 85 63 78 107 85 100 31 76 113 80 98 75 68 67 77 78 97 75 76 74 This page has been reformatted by Knovel to provide easier navigation.rules detail drawings diamond paste die casting dowels draft .

loss .treatment heaters high shrinking plastics hobbing holes horn pins hose connections hot hardness hot runner .Index Terms hardware heat .molds .barrier .expansion .losses . .manifold housings hydraulic supply in-house testing injection blow molding injection molding machine injection pressure injection speed injection unit insulated runner insulated runner molds interface points internal threads jig grinding L/t ratio laminar land lapping large production latches leader pins leaking learning experience legal implications locating ring low-cost mold lubrication machine ejector machine nozzle machine platen layout Links 76 69 89 41 88 63 59 97 41 83 100 48 52 72 103 38 41 63 83 40 2 22 7 13 55 38 78 62 62 80 50 99 65 19 16 100 78 79 27 74 94 47 35 44 77 36 14 79 97 114 64 106 59 103 77 107 63 59 79 64 87 15 59 39 17 74 37 75 39 66 45 97 This page has been reformatted by Knovel to provide easier navigation.controllers .

designers .plates .drawings . .materials .temperature .steels .supply houses molding cycle molecular build-up mounting plate moving cavity moving platens multicavity molds multilevel multiple gates nameplate nickel plated nitriding notches notes on drawings nozzle radius number of cavities number of gates number of screws open gates overcaps parallel parting line path of least resistance Links 35 43 97 45 59 41 17 38 66 17 103 9 36 4 1 45 45 1 69 36 74 92 25 42 43 97 38 101 83 85 78 11 78 56 17 103 103 77 47 36 10 37 73 59 58 20 12 21 115 103 64 64 25 59 92 95 74 80 95 44 102 70 97 30 31 71 84 51 66 This page has been reformatted by Knovel to provide easier navigation.mounting .heaters maximum clamp force melt .Index Terms machine specifications machinery steel machining machinists manifold .Flow .shoes .temperatures mold .price .release agents .hardware .maker .clamps .cost .

systems Links 83 18 63 38 64 22 68 68 80 35 76 100 100 3 41 41 2 11 107 29 79 74 39 16 33 95 34 18 15 48 28 106 36 92 83 93 58 34 25 51 65 50 95 23 52 14 80 56 116 78 97 103 93 108 49 91 52 55 73 63 75 37 37 87 42 78 68 69 84 60 60 66 75 63 This page has been reformatted by Knovel to provide easier navigation.mold .Index Terms plain bottom plastic fronts plastic inventory plasticizing capacity plastics Flow plate cooling plate deflection plate thickness plate supports platen size plates polishing polishing stone postmolding operations power consumption power failure precedents preferred number prehardened mold steels preload press fits pressure air pressure drop product design product drawing production productivity projected area projections protection of the cores quenching quick mold change quotation reentrant bottom records regrinding requirements residence time retractable core reversed Flow ribs risk factor robots rollers runner . .

bushing .Index Terms safety factor safety gate screw caps screws self-cleaning self-degating sequence of operation serial shallow engraving shot capacity shot size shrinkage shrinking shut height side cores side forces side wall significant cross section single-cavity molds single-level sink marks sketches sketching sleeves slender core pins slender cores slots snap specialists specialization SPI split cavities split molds splits spot vents springs sprue . .extension stack .molds stainless steels standard hardware standard mold components standard mold shoes standardizing Links 77 25 58 45 68 57 47 20 49 38 37 11 70 36 3 52 13 48 46 56 78 21 94 5 21 21 56 50 49 4 93 36 49 13 90 67 78 14 35 79 42 48 78 43 2 95 43 107 94 117 72 58 80 78 26 78 13 55 108 37 90 48 49 48 45 103 67 97 107 52 64 59 55 71 80 103 This page has been reformatted by Knovel to provide easier navigation.layout .

clearances title block tolerances torsion toughness T-slots turbulent two-stage ejection undercuts universal mold shoes unscrewing valved gates variable shrinkage vent . .grooves .gap .pins venting vertical split Links 108 72 78 34 74 76 107 23 23 50 78 68 17 77 10 27 27 74 87 102 75 2 2 103 42 77 56 79 35 81 2 75 76 84 19 51 49 44 50 59 26 65 66 66 66 67 18 48 118 101 87 68 74 75 87 84 18 64 29 31 30 82 71 27 103 71 50 75 33 34 95 65 This page has been reformatted by Knovel to provide easier navigation.Index Terms standards start-up stationary platen steel sizes steels strength of material stress relieved stripper plate stripper rings stripping stroke support pillars surface definition surface finish symmetry taper lock taper pins tapers technical products tensile strength tension test machines test report thermal conductivity thermocouples thin-wall molding thin-walled tie bar .channels .

Index Terms views virgin plastics viscosity wall thickness wear wedge .action weld lines welding wet area wire EDM yield strength Links 46 60 16 17 30 30 75 66 104 72 99 77 80 17 75 74 77 76 103 119 This page has been reformatted by Knovel to provide easier navigation. .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful